Operating Instructions

for advanced features

Digital Camera

Model No. DMC-GF8

Please read these instructions carefully before using this product,

and save this manual for future use.

Message Display P324

Troubleshooting P337

Finding the information you need P2

Contents P6

Menu list P328

SQW0645
F0116YD0

until
2016/2/1
 Finding the information you need
In this “Operating Instructions for advanced features”, you can find the information you
 need from the following pages.
By clicking a page number, you can jump to the linked page and quickly find the
information.


Search from “Contents”

 P6
 Click this icon to jump to “Contents”.

 Search from the list of buttons and dials P13

Search from the list of screens and icons P320

Search from “Message Display” P324

Search from “Menu list”

P328
 Click this icon to jump to “Menu list”.

Search from “Troubleshooting” P337

Click this icon to jump to “Finding the information you need”.



Click this icon to return to the previously displayed page.



For details on how to use this manual, see the next page. P3

Wi-FiR function P251

2
How to use this manual

About the indication of the applicable mode

Applicable modes:
The icons indicate the modes available for a function.
• Black icons: Applicable modes
• Grey icons: Unavailable modes

• Click a cross reference in the text to jump to the corresponding page.

• By entering keywords in the search field at the top of the Adobe Reader screen, you can run a
keyword search and jump to the corresponding page.
• Operations and other details of this manual may vary depending on the Adobe Reader version
you are using.

∫ About the symbols in the text

MENU : Indicates that the menu can be set by pressing [MENU/SET] button.

Wi-Fi : Indicates that the Wi-Fi setting can be made by pressing [Wi-Fi] button.

: Configurations that can be performed in the [Custom] menu.

: Tips for skilful use and points for recording.

: Conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.

: Continued to next page.

In these operating instructions, steps for setting a menu item are described as follows.

MENU > [Rec] > [Quality] > [›]

• Description in these operating instructions is based on the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032).

3
Quick Start Guide
If you want to start taking pictures now, refer to the steps for using the Intelligent Auto
Mode as a guide. In Intelligent Auto Mode, you can leave the settings to the camera and
take pictures easily.

Attach the shoulder 


Strap. (P19)
1 • Attach the other side of the
shoulder strap.  

Charge the battery. (P20)  

A : Plug-in type
2 B : Inlet type

Insert the card (optional)/the

battery. (P25)
3 • Insert the battery all the way in until it
clicks into place, paying attention to
the orientation.

Attach the lens. (P31)

• To attach the lens, align the lens fitting
4 marks, and rotate the lens in the
direction of the arrow.

Turn the camera on and set the clock.

5 (P33)

4
 [When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032/
H-FS35100) is used]

Extend the lens barrel. (P36)

6

Format the card (initialisation). (P27)

7

Press [¦]. (P71)

8 • The settings of the main functions are adjusted
automatically.

Press the shutter button halfway A

to focus.
A Focus indication

9 • Once the subject is in focus, the focus

indication is displayed.

Press the shutter button fully 3.5 60

(push it in further), and take the

picture. (P38)

Check the picture you have taken. 1/98

• The [Auto Review] function displays the picture you
10 have just taken. (P39)
• To display the picture in Playback Mode, press [(].
(P217)

5
Contents

Finding the information you need..............................................................................2

How to use this manual.............................................................................................3
Quick Start Guide ......................................................................................................4

1. Before Use
Care of the camera ................................................................................................. 11
Standard Accessories .............................................................................................12
Names and Functions of Components....................................................................13
About the Lens........................................................................................................16
Cards Compatible with this unit...............................................................................18

2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Attaching the Shoulder Strap ..................................................................................19
Charging the Battery ...............................................................................................20
• Charging .........................................................................................................20
• Approximate operating time and number of recordable pictures....................22
Inserting and Removing the Card (optional)/the Battery .........................................25
• About the Card ...............................................................................................27
• Formatting the card (initialisation) ..................................................................27
• Approximate number of recordable pictures and available recording time ....28
Changing the Lens ..................................................................................................30
Setting Date/Time (Clock Set).................................................................................33
• Changing the Clock Setting ............................................................................34
Basic Operations.....................................................................................................35
• Tips for taking good pictures ..........................................................................35
• Extending/retracting the lens [when the interchangeable lens
(H-FS12032/H-FS35100) is attached]............................................................36
• Monitor ...........................................................................................................37
• Shutter button (Taking pictures) .....................................................................38
• Motion picture button (Recording motion pictures).........................................39
• Mode dial (Selecting a Recording Mode) .......................................................40
• Control Dial.....................................................................................................41
• Cursor buttons/[MENU/SET] button ...............................................................42
• [DISP.] button (Switching the displayed information)......................................43
• Touch screen (Touch operations) ...................................................................48
• Taking Pictures Using the Touch Function .....................................................50
• [REC. SETTING RESET] button (Resetting the recording settings) ..............52
Setting menu items .................................................................................................53
Calling frequently-used menus instantly (Quick Menu)...........................................56
• Change the Quick Menu to your preferred item ............................................57
Assigning frequently used functions to the buttons (function buttons) ....................59
Configuring basic settings of this unit (Setup Menu)...............................................61
Entering Text ...........................................................................................................69

6
3. Recording Modes
Taking Pictures using the Automatic Function (Intelligent Auto Mode) ...................70
• Recording night scenes ([iHandheld Night Shot]) ..........................................74
• Combining pictures into a single picture with rich gradation ([iHDR]).............75
• Taking a picture with a blurred background (Defocus Control).......................76
• Recording images by changing the brightness or colour tone .......................77
• About Intelligent Auto Plus Mode and Intelligent Auto Mode .........................78
Taking Pictures of Yourself ([Self Shot]) ..................................................................80
• Changing the way the shutter is released ......................................................83
Taking Pictures with Your Favourite Settings (Programme AE Mode) ....................84
Taking Pictures by Specifying the Aperture/Shutter Speed .....................................87
• Aperture-Priority AE Mode .............................................................................87
• Shutter-Priority AE Mode................................................................................88
• Manual Exposure Mode .................................................................................89
• Confirm the Effects of Aperture and Shutter Speed (Preview Mode) .............92
• Easily set aperture/shutter speed for suitable exposure (One Push AE) .......93
Taking panorama pictures (Panorama Shot Mode).................................................94
Taking Pictures that match the Scene being recorded (Scene Guide Mode)..........97
Taking pictures of scenery, children or portraits with optimal settings...................106
• Scenery Mode ..............................................................................................106
• Child Mode ...................................................................................................106
• Portrait Mode ................................................................................................107
Taking Pictures with different image effects (Creative Control Mode)...................108

4. Picture Quality and Colour Tone Settings

Adjusting the Picture Quality by Adding an Effect ([Photo Style]) .........................119
Recording Images with Image Effects ([Filter Settings]) .......................................121
Adjusting the White Balance .................................................................................123
Setting the Picture Quality and Size .....................................................................127
• Setting the aspect ratio of pictures ...............................................................127
• Setting the number of pixels.........................................................................127
• Setting the compression rate of pictures ([Quality]) .....................................128
Using Image Correction Functions........................................................................129
• Compensating the contrast and exposure ([i.Dynamic]) ..............................129
• Raising the resolution ([i.Resolution])...........................................................129
• Combining pictures with different exposures ([HDR])...................................130
• Reducing the long shutter noise ([Long Shtr NR])........................................131
• Correcting the brightness on the screen periphery ([Shading Comp.]) ........131
• Setting the colour space ([Color Space]) ......................................................132
5. Focus and Brightness (Exposure) Settings
Taking Pictures with Auto Focus ...........................................................................133
• Selecting the Focus Mode (AFS/AFF/AFC) .................................................135
• Selecting the Auto Focus Mode ...................................................................137
• Setting up position of the AF area/changing size of the AF area .................141
• Optimising the focus and brightness for a touched position .........................144
• Setting the desired focus method .................................................................145

7
 Taking Pictures with Manual Focus.......................................................................148
Fixing the Focus and the Exposure (AF/AE Lock) ................................................154
Compensating the Exposure.................................................................................156
Setting the Light Sensitivity ...................................................................................157
• Setting the upper limit on ISO sensitivity ......................................................158
• Setting the step increment of ISO sensitivity ................................................159
• Extending ISO sensitivity..............................................................................159
Selecting the Method for Measuring Brightness ([Metering Mode]) ......................160

6. Shutter and Drive Settings

Setting the Shutter Type .......................................................................................161
Select a Drive Mode..............................................................................................163
Taking Pictures using Burst Mode.........................................................................164
Taking Pictures using Auto Bracket.......................................................................167
Taking Pictures with the Self-timer ........................................................................170

7. Functions Customised for Various Subjects and Purposes

Taking Pictures Automatically at Set Intervals ([Time Lapse Shot]) ......................172
Creating Stop Motion Pictures ([Stop Motion Animation]) .....................................175
Making Multiple Exposures on One Picture ([Multi Exp.]) .....................................179
Disabling Operational Sounds and the Output of Light at once ([Silent Mode])....181
Taking Clear Pictures by Registering Faces ([Face Recog.])................................182
Recording Profiles of Babies and Pets on Images................................................187
Using screens and displays suitable for recording................................................188

8. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Optical Image Stabiliser ........................................................................................190
Taking Pictures with the Zoom ..............................................................................192
• Raising the telescopic effect.........................................................................193
• Zooming using touch operations ..................................................................197
Taking pictures by using the flash .........................................................................198
• Changing Flash Mode ..................................................................................201
• Setting to the 2nd Curtain Synchro...............................................................203
• Adjust the flash output ..................................................................................204
• Synchronising the output of the flash to the Exposure Compensation .........204
9. Recording Motion Pictures
Recording Motion Picture......................................................................................205
• Setting the format, size and recording frame rate ........................................208
• How to set focus when recording a motion picture ([Continuous AF]) .........210
Recording still pictures while recording motion pictures ....................................... 211
Recording Snap Movies ........................................................................................212
Using the [Motion Picture] Menu ...........................................................................215

8
10. Playing Back and Editing Images
Playing Back Pictures ...........................................................................................217
Playing Back Motion Pictures................................................................................219
• Creating Still Pictures from a Motion Picture ................................................220
Switching the Playback Method ............................................................................221
• Using the Playback Zoom ............................................................................221
• Displaying multiple screens (Multi Playback) ...............................................221
• Displaying Pictures by Recording Date (Calendar Playback) ......................222
• Playing Back Group Pictures........................................................................223
Deleting Pictures ...................................................................................................225
Using the [Playback] Menu ...................................................................................227
• [2D/3D Settings] ...........................................................................................227
• [Slide Show] .................................................................................................227
• [Playback Mode] ...........................................................................................229
• [Location Logging] ........................................................................................230
• [Beauty Retouch] ..........................................................................................231
• [Clear Retouch] ............................................................................................233
• [Title Edit]......................................................................................................235
• [Text Stamp]..................................................................................................236
• [Video Divide] ...............................................................................................239
• [Time Lapse Video].......................................................................................240
• [Stop Motion Video] ......................................................................................240
• [Resize] ........................................................................................................241
• [Cropping] .....................................................................................................243
• [Rotate]/[Rotate Disp.] ..................................................................................244
• [Favorite] ......................................................................................................245
• [Print Set]......................................................................................................246
• [Protect] ........................................................................................................248
• [Face Rec Edit] .............................................................................................249
• [Picture Sort].................................................................................................249
• [Delete Confirmation]....................................................................................250
11. Using the Wi-Fi function
Wi-FiR function ......................................................................................................251
What you can do with the Wi-Fi function...............................................................254
Controlling with a Smartphone/Tablet ...................................................................255
• Installing the smartphone/tablet app “Image App” .......................................255
• Connecting to a smartphone/tablet...............................................................256
• Taking images via a smartphone/tablet (remote recording)..........................261
• Playing back images in the camera..............................................................262
• Saving images stored in the camera ............................................................262
• Sending images in the camera to an SNS ...................................................263
• Adding location information to images stored in the camera from a
smartphone/tablet ........................................................................................263
• Combining motion pictures recorded with Snap Movie according to your
preference on a smartphone/tablet ..............................................................265
• Sending images to a smartphone/tablet by controlling the camera..............266
Displaying pictures on a TV ..................................................................................269

9
 Printing Wirelessly.................................................................................................270
When sending images to AV device......................................................................271
When sending images to PC ................................................................................273
Using Web services ..............................................................................................277
• When sending images to web service ..........................................................278
• When sending images to [Cloud Sync. Service] ..........................................282
Registering to the “LUMIX CLUB” .........................................................................284
• About the [LUMIX CLUB] .............................................................................284
About Connections................................................................................................289
• Connecting from your house (via the network).............................................290
• Connecting from a location away from your house (direct connection)........292
• Connecting quickly with the same settings as the previous ones
([Select a destination from History]/[Select a destination from Favorite]) ....293
• About settings for sending images ...............................................................295
[Wi-Fi Setup] Menu ...............................................................................................298

12. Connecting to other equipment

Enjoying 3D pictures .............................................................................................300
Playing Back Pictures on a TV Screen .................................................................303
• Using VIERA Link (HDMI) ............................................................................305
Saving still pictures and motion pictures on your PC ............................................307
• Downloading software ..................................................................................308
• Transferring images to a PC.........................................................................310
Saving still pictures and motion pictures on a Recorder .......................................312
Printing the Pictures ..............................................................................................313

13. Others
Optional accessories.............................................................................................319
Monitor Display .....................................................................................................320
Message Display...................................................................................................324
Menu list................................................................................................................328
• [Rec] .............................................................................................................328
• [Motion Picture] ............................................................................................331
• [Custom] .......................................................................................................332
• [Setup] ..........................................................................................................334
• [Playback] .....................................................................................................336
Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................337
Cautions for Use ...................................................................................................351

10
 1. Before Use

Care of the camera

Do not subject to strong vibration, shock, or pressure.
• The lens, monitor, or external case may be damaged if used in the
following conditions.
It may also malfunction or image may not be recorded if you:
– Drop or hit the camera.
– Press hard on the lens or the monitor.

This camera is not dust/drip/water proof.

Avoid using the camera in places with a lot of dust, water, sand,
etc.
• Liquid, sand and other foreign material may get into the space around
the lens, buttons, etc. Be particularly careful since it may not just cause
malfunctions, but it may also become irreparable.
– Places with a lot of sand or dust.
– Places where water can come into contact with this unit, such as when
using it on a rainy day or at the beach.

Do not place your hands inside the mount of the digital camera
body. Since the sensor unit is a precision apparatus, it may cause a malfunction or
damage.

∫ About Condensation (When the lens or monitor is fogged up)

• Condensation occurs when the ambient temperature or humidity
changes. Be careful of condensation since it causes lens and
monitor stains, fungus and camera malfunction.
• If condensation occurs, turn the camera off and leave it for about
2 hours. The fog will disappear naturally when the temperature of
the camera becomes close to the ambient temperature.

11
1. Before Use

Standard Accessories
Check that all the accessories are supplied before using the camera.

• The accessories and their shape will differ depending on the country or area where the camera
was purchased.
For details on the accessories, refer to “Basic Operating Instructions”.
• Battery Pack is indicated as battery pack or battery in the text.
• Battery Charger is indicated as battery charger or charger in the text.
• SD Memory Card, SDHC Memory Card and SDXC Memory Card are indicated as card in the
text.
• The card is optional.

12
1. Before Use

Names and Functions of Components

∫ Camera body

1 2345 6 7 6 8 9 10

11

12 13 14 15 16 17 18

1 Mode dial (P40) Status indicator (P33)/

Wi-Fi® connection lamp (P252)
2 Shutter button (P38) 11 • The lamp lights green when the camera is
turned on, and lights blue when it is
3 Camera ON/OFF switch (P33)
connected to Wi-Fi.
Self-timer indicator (P170)/
4 AF Assist Lamp (P146) 12 Intelligent Auto lamp (P71)
5 Intelligent Auto button (P71) 13 Lens fitting mark (P31)
Stereo microphone (P216) 14 Sensor
• Be careful not to cover the microphone with 15 Mount
6 your finger. Doing so may make sound
difficult to record. 16 Lens lock pin
7 Flash (P198) 17 Lens release button (P30)
8 Focus distance reference mark (P151) Speaker
• Be careful not to cover the speaker with your
9 [Wi-Fi] button (P252)/[Fn1] button (P59) 18 finger. Doing so may make sound difficult to
10 Shoulder strap eyelet (P19) hear.

13
1. Before Use

19 20 21 22

23

24

25

28 26
29 27

30 31 32 33 34

19 Touch screen (P48)/monitor (P37) [ ] (Delete) button (P225)/

29 [ ] (Quick Menu/Return) button
Flash open lever (P198) (P56)
20 • The flash opens, and recording with the flash
[REC. SETTING RESET] button (P52)
becomes possible.
30 • Use this button to restore the default
21 Motion picture button (P205) recording settings.

22 [(] (Playback) button (P217) Tripod mount (P358)

• It may not be possible to attach and securely
23 [HDMI] socket (P303) 31 fasten a tripod with a screw length of 5.5 mm
[AV OUT/DIGITAL] socket (P304, 310, 312, (0.22 inch) or more to the camera. Doing so
24 313) may also damage the camera.

Cursor buttons (P42) DC coupler cover (P319)

3/[È] (Exposure Compensation) (P77, 89,
• When using an AC adaptor, ensure that the
32 Panasonic DC coupler (optional) and AC
110, 156)
adaptor (optional) are used.
1/[ ] (White Balance) (P123)
25 33 Release lever (P25)
2/[ ] (Auto Focus Mode) (P137)
4/[ ] (Drive mode) (P163) 34 Card/Battery door (P25)
– Single (P163)/Burst (P164)/Auto bracket
(P167)/Self-timer (P170)
26 Control dial (P41)
27 [MENU/SET] button (P42, 53)
[DISP.] button (P43, 46)
28 • Each time this is pressed, the display on the
monitor is switched.

14
1. Before Use

∫ Lens
H-FS12032 1 Lens surface
2 Tele
3 Zoom ring (P192)
4 Wide
5 Contact point
6 Lens fitting mark (P31)
7 Focus ring (P148)
8 Zoom lever (P192)
5 6
9 Focus lever (P148)
1 2 3 4

H-FS35100

5 6
1 2 7 3 4

H-PS14042

1 2 8 94 5 6

• The interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) does not have a focus ring, but you can use manual
focus by operating the camera. Refer to P148 for details.

15
1. Before Use

About the Lens

This unit can use the dedicated lenses compatible with
the Micro Four ThirdsTM System lens mount specification
(Micro Four Thirds mount).
You can also use a lens of any of the following
standards by attaching a mount adaptor.

Lens Mount adaptor

Four Thirds™ mount specification Mount Adaptor (DMW-MA1: optional)
lens
Leica M Mount interchangeable lens M Mount Adaptor (DMW-MA2M: optional)
Leica R Mount interchangeable lens R Mount Adaptor (DMW-MA3R: optional)
• For certain lenses, the actual distance at which the subject is in focus may differ slightly from
the rated distance.
• When using a Leica lens mount adaptor, set [Shoot w/o Lens] (P30) to [ON].

About the lens and functions

There are functions that cannot be used, or the operation may be different depending on
the lens used.

Auto Focus/Auto aperture setting/Defocus control function (P76)/[Shading Comp.] (P131)/

[Pull Focus] ([Snap Movie]) (P214)/[Quick AF] (P145)/[Shutter Type] (P161)/[Stabilizer]
(P190)/[Power Zoom Lens] (P196)/Touch zoom (P197)

For details on the lens used, refer to the website.

Refer to catalogues/Web pages for most current information regarding compatible

lenses.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(This Site is English only.)

• The available flash range etc. differs depending on the aperture value of the lens you are using.
• The focal length noted on the lens in use is equivalent to double when converted to the 35 mm
film camera.
(It will be equivalent to 100 mm lens when a 50 mm lens is used.)
Refer to the website for details about the 3D interchangeable lens.

16
1. Before Use

About the firmware of your interchangeable lens

For smoother recording, we recommend updating the firmware of the interchangeable lens
to the latest version.
• To view the latest information on the firmware or to download the firmware, visit the
support site below:
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(This Site is English only.)
• To check the firmware version of the interchangeable lens, attach it to the camera body and
select [Version Disp.] in the [Setup] menu.

17
1. Before Use

Cards Compatible with this unit

The following cards which conform to the SD standard can be used with this unit.
(These cards are indicated as card in the text.)

• SDHC Memory Cards and SDXC Memory Cards can be

SD Memory Card
used only with their compatible devices.
(512 MB to 2 GB)
• Check that the PC and other equipment are compatible when
using the SDXC Memory Cards.
SDHC Memory Card http://panasonic.net/avc/sdcard/information/SDXC.html
(4 GB to 32 GB) • This unit is compatible with UHS-I standard SDHC/SDXC
memory cards.
SDXC Memory Card • Operation of the cards on the left has been confirmed with
(48 GB, 64 GB) Panasonic’s cards.

∫ About the motion picture recording and SD speed class

Confirm the SD Speed Class (the speed standard regarding continuous writing) on a card
label etc. when you record a motion picture.
Use a card with SD Speed Class with “Class 4” or more for [AVCHD]/[MP4] motion picture
recording.
e.g.:

• Please confirm the latest information on the following website.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(This Site is English only.)

18
 2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Attaching the Shoulder Strap

• We recommend attaching the shoulder strap when using the camera to prevent it from
dropping.

1 Pass the shoulder strap through the

shoulder strap eyelet on the camera body.
A: Shoulder strap eyelet
A

2 Pass the end of the shoulder strap through

the ring in the direction of the arrow and then
pass it through the stopper.

3 Pass the end of the shoulder strap through

the hole on the other side of the stopper.

4 Pull the other side of the

shoulder strap and then
check that it will not come
out.
• Perform steps 1 to 4 and then
attach the other side of the
shoulder strap.

• Use the shoulder strap around your shoulder.

– Do not wrap the strap around your neck.
It may result in injury or accident.
• Do not leave the shoulder strap where an infant can reach it.
– It may result in an accident by mistakenly wrapping around the neck.

19
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Charging the Battery

∫ About batteries that you can use with this unit

It has been found that counterfeit battery packs which look very similar to the
genuine product are made available for purchase in some markets. Some of
these battery packs are not adequately protected with internal protection to meet
the requirements of appropriate safety standards. There is a possibility that
these battery packs may lead to fire or explosion. Please be advised that we are
not liable for any accident or failure occurring as a result of use of a counterfeit
battery pack. To ensure that safe products are used, we recommend that a
genuine Panasonic battery pack is used.
• Use the dedicated charger and battery.

Charging
• The battery is not charged when the camera is shipped. Charge the battery before use.
• Charge the battery with the charger indoors.

1 Attach the battery paying

attention to the direction of
the battery.

plug-in type inlet type

2 Connect the charger to the
electrical outlet.
• The [CHARGE] indicator A lights
up and charging begins.

20
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

∫ About the [CHARGE] indicator

On: Charging.
Off: Charging has completed.
(Disconnect the charger from the electrical socket and detach the
battery after charging is completed.)

• When the [CHARGE] indicator flashes

– The battery temperature is too high or too low. It is recommended to charge the battery again
in an ambient temperature of between 10 oC and 30 oC (50 oF and 86 oF).
– The terminals of the charger or the battery are dirty. In this case, wipe them with a dry cloth.

∫ Charging time
Charging time Approx. 130 min
• The indicated charging time is for when the battery has been discharged completely.
The charging time may vary depending on how the battery has been used.
The charging time for the battery in hot/cold environments or a battery that has not been
used for a long time may be longer than normal.

∫ Battery indication

4:3
L AFS

• The indication turns red and blinks if the remaining battery power is exhausted.
98
(The status indicator also blinks)
Recharge the battery or replace it with a fully charged battery.

• Do not leave any metal items (such as clips) near the contact areas of the power plug.
Otherwise, a fire and/or electric shocks may be caused by short-circuiting or the
resulting heat generated.
• The battery can be recharged even when it still has some charge left, but it is not
recommended that the battery charge be frequently topped up while the battery is fully
charged.
(Since characteristic swelling may occur.)

21
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Approximate operating time and number of recordable pictures

∫ Recording still pictures (By CIPA standard in Programme AE Mode)
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) is used
Number of recordable pictures Approx. 230 pictures
Recording time Approx. 115 min

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS35100) is used

Number of recordable pictures Approx. 230 pictures
Recording time Approx. 115 min

When the interchangeable lens (H-PS14042) is used

Number of recordable pictures Approx. 210 pictures
Recording time Approx. 105 min

Recording conditions by CIPA standard

• CIPA is an abbreviation of [Camera & Imaging Products Association].
• Temperature: 23 oC (73.4 oF)/Humidity: 50%RH when monitor is on.
• When using a Panasonic SDHC Memory Card.
• Using the supplied battery.
• Starting recording 30 seconds after the camera is turned on.
(When attaching an interchangeable lens compatible with the Optical Image Stabiliser function,
set the Optical Image Stabiliser to [ ])
• Recording once every 30 seconds using full flash every second recording.
• When an interchangeable lens compatible with power zoom (electrically operated zoom) is
attached, the zoom moves from Tele to Wide or from Wide to Tele on each recording.
• Turning the camera off every 10 recordings and leaving it until the temperature of the battery
decreases.

The number of recordable pictures varies depending on the recording interval time.
If the recording interval time becomes longer, the number of recordable pictures
decreases.
[For example, if you were to take one picture every two minutes, then the number of
pictures would be reduced to approximately one-quarter of the number of pictures
given above (based upon one picture taken every 30 seconds).]

22
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

∫ Recording motion pictures

[AVCHD] (Recording with picture quality set to [FHD/17M/50i])
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) is used
Recordable time Approx. 80 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 40 min

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS35100) is used

Recordable time Approx. 80 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 40 min

When the interchangeable lens (H-PS14042) is used

Recordable time Approx. 80 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 40 min

[MP4] (Recording with picture quality set to [FHD/20M/25p])

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) is used
Recordable time Approx. 80 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 40 min

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS35100) is used

Recordable time Approx. 90 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 45 min

When the interchangeable lens (H-PS14042) is used

Recordable time Approx. 80 min
Actual recordable time Approx. 40 min

• These times are for an ambient temperature of 23 oC (73.4 oF) and a humidity of 50%RH.
Please be aware that these times are approximate.
• Actual recordable time is the time available for recording when repeating actions such as
turning this unit on and off, starting/stopping recording, etc.
• Maximum time to record motion pictures continuously with [MP4] is 29 minutes 59 seconds or
up to 4 GB.
(For [FHD/28M/50p]/[FHD/20M/25p] in [MP4] format, the file size is large and so the recordable
time will drop below 29 minutes 59 seconds.)

23
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

∫ Playback
When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) is used
Playback time Approx. 160 min

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS35100) is used

Playback time Approx. 160 min

When the interchangeable lens (H-PS14042) is used

Playback time Approx. 150 min

• The operating times and number of recordable pictures will differ according to the
environment and the operating conditions.
For example, in the following cases, the operating times shorten and the number of recordable
pictures is reduced.
– In low-temperature environments, such as on ski slopes.
– When flash is used repeatedly.
• When the operating time of the camera becomes extremely short even after properly charging
the battery, the life of the battery may have expired. Buy a new battery.

24
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Inserting and Removing the Card (optional)/

the Battery
• Check that this unit is turned off.
• We recommend using a Panasonic card.

1 1: Slide the release lever in the

direction of the arrow.

2: Open the card/battery door.

• Always use genuine Panasonic
batteries.
• If you use other batteries, we cannot
guarantee the quality of this product.

2 Battery: Being careful about the

battery orientation, insert all the
way until you hear a locking
sound and then check that it is
locked by lever A.
Pull the lever A in the direction of
the arrow to remove the battery.
Card: Push it securely all the way
until you hear a “click” while
being careful about the direction
in which you insert it.
To remove the card, push the card until it clicks, then pull the card
out upright.
B: Do not touch the connection terminals of the card.

25
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

3 1: Close the card/battery door.

2: Slide the release lever in the

direction of the arrow.

• Remove the battery after use.

(The battery will be exhausted if left for a long period of time after being charged.)
• The battery becomes warm after using it and during and after charging. The camera also
becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction.
• Before removing the card or battery, turn the camera off, and wait until the status indicator has
gone off completely.
(Otherwise, this unit may no longer operate normally and the card itself may be damaged or the
recorded pictures may be lost.)

26
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

About the Card

Access to the card
The access indication displays red when pictures are being 50 i
4:3
L AFS
recorded on the card.
• During access (image writing, reading and deleting,
formatting etc.), do not turn this unit off, remove the battery,
card or disconnect the AC adaptor (optional). Furthermore, do not subject the camera to
vibration, impact or static electricity.
The card or the data on the card may be damaged, and this unit may no longer operate
normally.
If operation fails due to vibration, impact or static electricity, perform the operation
again.

• If you set the Write-Protect switch A to “LOCK”, you may not be able to write, 
delete or format the data or display it by recording date. These operations
become available again when you unlock the switch.
• The data on the card may be damaged or lost due to electromagnetic waves,
static electricity or breakdown of the camera or the card. We recommend storing
important data on a PC etc.
• Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.

Formatting the card (initialisation)

Format the card before recording a picture with this unit.
Since data cannot be recovered after formatting, make sure to back up necessary
data in advance.
Select the menu. (P53)
MENU > [Setup] > [Format]
• Confirmation screen is displayed. It is executed when [Yes] is selected.

• Use a battery with sufficient battery power or the AC adaptor (optional) (P319) when formatting.
Do not turn the camera off during formatting.
• If the card has been formatted on a PC or other equipment, format it on the camera again.
• If the card cannot be formatted, please try another card before contacting Panasonic.

27
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Approximate number of recordable pictures and available recording

time

∫ Number of recordable pictures

• Aspect ratio [4:3], Quality [A]
[Picture Size] 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB 64 GB
L (16M) 900 1810 3640 7260
M (8M) 1650 3340 6690 13000
S (4M) 2800 5670 11360 21480

• Aspect ratio [4:3], Quality [ ]

[Picture Size] 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB 64 GB
L (16M) 270 550 1110 2230
M (8M) 320 640 1300 2580
S (4M) 340 700 1410 2800

∫ Available recording time (when recording motion pictures)

• “h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for minute and “s” for second.
• The recordable time is the total time of all the motion pictures which have been recorded.

• [AVCHD]
[Rec Quality] 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB 64 GB
[FHD/28M/50p] 37m00s 1h15m 2h30m 5h00m

[FHD/17M/50i] 1h00m 2h00m 4h5m 8h15m

[FHD/24M/25p]/
43m00s 1h25m 2h55m 5h50m
[FHD/24M/24p]

• [MP4]
[Rec Quality] 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB 64 GB
[FHD/28M/50p] 37m00s 1h15m 2h30m 5h00m

[FHD/20M/25p] 49m00s 1h40m 3h20m 6h40m

[HD/10M/25p] 1h30m 3h10m 6h25m 12h50m

[VGA/4M/25p] 3h25m 7h00m 14h10m 28h15m

28
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

• When a high ambient temperature, continuous recording or other conditions cause the camera
to overheat, the following restrictions will occur to protect the camera. Wait until the camera
cools down.
– Continuous recording, motion picture recording, and the Wi-Fi connection will be temporarily
disabled.
– If you continue recording even when [ ] is flashing on the screen, a message will be
displayed and the camera will turn off automatically.
• Depending on the recording conditions and the type of card, the number of recordable pictures
and available recording time vary.
• Maximum time to record motion pictures continuously with [MP4] is 29 minutes 59 seconds or
up to 4 GB.
(For [FHD/28M/50p]/[FHD/20M/25p] in [MP4] format, the file size is large and so the recordable
time will drop below 29 minutes 59 seconds.)
• The maximum available continuous recording time is displayed on the screen.

Switching the display between the number of recordable pictures and the
available recording time

MENU > [Custom] > [Remaining Disp.]

[ ] ([Remaining Shots]):
This will display the number of recordable pictures for
still pictures.
[ ] ([Remaining Time]):
0 98 0 R5m04s
This will display the available recording time for motion
pictures. A B
• [9999i] is displayed if there are more than 10000 pictures
remaining.
A Number of recordable pictures
B Available recording time

29
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Changing the Lens

By changing the lens, you will increase your picture taking-options and further your
enjoyment of the camera. Change the lens using the following procedure.
• Check that the camera is turned off.
• When attaching or detaching the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032/H-FS35100), retract the
lens barrel.
• Change lenses where there is not a lot of dirt or dust. Refer to P352 when dirt or dust gets on
the lens.

Detaching the lens

• Attach the lens cap.

While pressing on the lens release button A,

rotate the lens toward the arrow until it stops
and then remove.

• Hold and rotate the base area of the lens B.

• When the lens is removed from the camera body, make sure to attach the body cap to the
camera body and attach the lens rear cap to the lens.

To enable/disable the shutter release without lens.

MENU > [Custom] > [Shoot w/o Lens]

[ON]: Shutter will operate regardless of the lens on the unit.

[OFF]: Shutter will not operate when a lens is not attached to the camera body or is
not attached correctly.

• When using a Leica lens mount adaptor (DMW-MA2M, DMW-MA3R: optional), set it to [ON].

30
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Attaching the lens

• Remove the lens rear cap from the lens.
• If the body cap is fitted to the camera, remove it.

Align the lens fitting marks A and then rotate the lens in the direction of
the arrow until it clicks.

• Do not press the lens release button B when you attach a lens.
• Do not try to attach the lens when holding it at an angle to the camera body as the lens mount
may get scratched.

• Do not insert your fingers into the mount when the lens and body cap
are removed from the camera body.
• It is recommended to attach the lens cap or attach the MC Protector
(optional) to protect the lens surface when carrying. (P319)

Zoom operations

When using the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032/H-FS35100)

Rotate the zoom ring of the lens.

When using the interchangeable lens (H-PS14042)

Move the zoom lever of the lens.

C Tele
D Wide
• If you operate the zoom after bringing the subject into focus, the
subject may go out of focus slightly. Operate the zoom first.
• You can enhance the telescopic effect by setting [Ex. Tele Conv.]
(Photo), [Ex. Tele Conv.] (Motion Picture), and [Digital Zoom]. (P193)

31
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Attaching the Lens Hood

When recording into strong backlight, irregular reflection may occur within the lens. The
lens hood reduces the inclusion of unwanted light in the recorded images and lowers the
drop in contrast. The lens hood cuts off excess lighting and improves the picture quality.
• The interchangeable lens (H-FS12032/H-PS14042) does not have a lens hood.

To attach the lens hood (flower shape) that came with the interchangeable lenses
(H-FS35100)
Hold the lens hood by placing your fingers as
shown in the figure.
• Do not hold the lens hood in such a way that it will be
bent.

1 Align the fitting mark A on the short side of

the lens hood with the mark on the tip of the
lens.

2 Turn the lens hood in the direction of the arrow

until it clicks, and align the stop mark B on the
long side of the lens hood with the mark on the
tip of the lens.

Temporarily Storing the Lens Hood

1 Turn the lens hood in the direction of the arrow to detach it.
2 Align the fitting mark on the long side of the lens hood with the mark on the tip of the
lens.
3 Turn the lens hood in the direction of the arrow until it clicks into place.

32
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Setting Date/Time (Clock Set)

• The clock is not set when the camera is shipped.

1 Turn the camera on.

• When the camera is turned on, the status indicator 1
lights up green.
• If the language select screen is not displayed, proceed to step 4.

2 Press [MENU/SET].

3 Press 3/4 to select the language, and press

[MENU/SET].

4 Press [MENU/SET].

5 Press 2/1 to select the items (year, month, :

:
day, hour, minute), and press 3/4 to set.
A: Time at the home area
B: Time at the travel destination
• You can cancel without setting the clock by pressing
[ ].

To set the display order and the time display

format.
• To display the setting screen of the order/time, select
[Style] and then press [MENU/SET].

6 Press [MENU/SET] to set.

7 When [The clock setting has been

completed.] is displayed, press [MENU/SET].

8 When [Please set the home area] is displayed, press [MENU/SET].

9 Press 2/1 to select the home area, and then

press [MENU/SET].
• When an interchangeable lens (H-FS12032/H-FS35100)
is used and the lens barrel is retracted, recording is not
possible (a message will be displayed). Rotate the zoom
ring to extend the lens. (P36)

33
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Changing the Clock Setting

Select [Clock Set] in the [Setup] menu. (P53)
• The clock can be reset as shown in steps 5 and 6 on P33.
• The clock setting is maintained for 3 months using the built-in clock battery even
without the battery.
(Leave the charged battery in the unit for 24 hours to charge the built-in battery.)

• If the clock is not set, the correct date cannot be printed when you stamp the date on the
pictures with [Text Stamp] or order a photo studio to print the pictures.

34
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Basic Operations

Tips for taking good pictures

Hold the camera gently with both hands, keep your arms still at your side
and stand with your feet slightly apart.
• Do not cover the flash, AF Assist lamp A, microphone B, or speaker C with your
fingers or other objects.
• Be careful not to move the camera when you press the shutter button.
• Be sure to remove the lens cap when recording.

∫ Detects orientation of camera (Direction Detection Function)

This function detects the vertical orientation when you record
with the camera vertically orientated.
When you play back the recording, the recording is
automatically displayed in vertical orientation.
(Only available when [Rotate Disp.] (P244) is set to [ON].)

• When recording with this unit, Direction Detection can be performed even if you are using a
lens that is not compatible with the Direction Detection Function.
• When the camera is held vertically and tilted significantly up or down to record, the Direction
Detection Function may not work correctly.
• Motion pictures taken with the camera held vertically are not displayed vertically.

35
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Extending/retracting the lens [when the interchangeable lens

(H-FS12032/H-FS35100) is attached]

∫ How to Extend the Lens Example: H-FS12032

Rotate the zoom ring in the direction of arrow 1 from position

A (the lens is retracted) to position B [12 mm to 32 mm
(H-FS12032), 35 mm to 100 mm (H-FS35100)] to extend the
lens.
• When the lens barrel is retracted, images cannot be recorded.
C The lens is retracted

∫ How to Retract the Lens

Rotate the zoom ring in the direction of arrow 2 from position 
B [12 mm to 32 mm (H-FS12032), 35 mm to 100 mm
(H-FS35100)] to position A to retract the lens.
• The zoom ring will seem to click into the 12 mm position
(H-FS12032) or 35 mm position (H-FS35100), but continue to
rotate the lens until it reaches position A.
• When you are not recording images, we recommend that you
retract the lens.
D The lens is extended

36
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Monitor
You can adjust the angle of the monitor.
• Be careful not to catch your finger, etc. in the monitor.
• When rotating the monitor, be careful not to apply too much force.
This may cause scratches and malfunctions.
• When not using this unit, close the monitor completely back to the
original position.
∫ Recording from a variety of angles
The monitor can be rotated to suit your needs. This is convenient as
it allows you to take pictures from various angles by adjusting the monitor.
• Do not cover the AF Assist Lamp with your fingers or other objects.
Self shot Taking pictures at a low angle

• If the monitor is rotated as shown in the illustration,

the Self Shot Mode starts. (P80)

37
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Shutter button (Taking pictures)

The shutter button works in two steps. To take a picture, press it.

Press the shutter button halfway to focus.

A Aperture value
B Shutter speed
C Focus indication

• Aperture value and shutter speed are displayed. C

(It will flash in red if the correct exposure is not achieved, except
when set to flash.)
• Once the subject is in focus, the focus indication is displayed.
(When the subject is not in focus, the indication flashes)

3.5 60
AB

Press the shutter button fully (push it in further),

and take the picture.

• When the image is correctly focused, the picture will be taken, since the [Focus/Release
Priority] (P147) is set initially to [FOCUS].
• The focus range is different depending on the lens used.
0.2 m (0.66 feet) to ¶ (from the focus distance
reference line)
When the interchangeable lens (focal length 12 mm to 20 mm)
(H-FS12032) is used 0.3 m (0.98 feet) to ¶ (from the focus distance
reference line)
(focal length 21 mm to 32 mm)
When the interchangeable lens 0.9 m (3.0 feet) to ¶ (from the focus distance
(H-FS35100) is used reference line)
0.2 m (0.66 feet) to ¶ (from the focus distance
reference line)
When the interchangeable lens (focal length 14 mm to 20 mm)
(H-PS14042) is used 0.3 m (0.98 feet) to ¶ (from the focus distance
reference line)
(focal length 21 mm to 42 mm)
• Even during menu operation or image playback, if you press the shutter button halfway, you
can instantly set the camera ready for recording.

38
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Displaying a picture right after it is taken

MENU > [Custom] > [Auto Review]

Set the length of time that the picture is displayed after taking the
still picture.
[Duration Time] [HOLD]:
The pictures are displayed until shutter button is pressed halfway.
[5SEC]/[4SEC]/[3SEC]/[2SEC]/[1SEC]/[OFF]
[ON] Switching the display of the playback screen, deleting
[Playback Operation pictures, etc. are possible during [Auto Review].
Priority] [OFF] Button operations during [Auto Review] become the
same as those for recording.
• When [Duration Time] is set to [HOLD], [Playback Operation Priority] is fixed to [ON].

Motion picture button (Recording motion pictures)

Press the motion picture button to start and stop recording a motion picture.

Start recording by pressing the motion picture

button.
• Release the motion picture button right after you press it.

Stop the recording by pressing the motion picture

button again.

39
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Mode dial (Selecting a Recording Mode)

Select the mode by rotating the mode dial.

• Rotate the mode dial slowly to select the desired mode.

Programme AE Mode (P84)

Records at the aperture value and shutter speed set by the camera.
Aperture-Priority AE Mode (P87)
The shutter speed is automatically determined by the aperture value you set.
Shutter-Priority AE Mode (P88)
The aperture value is automatically determined by the shutter speed you set.
Manual Exposure Mode (P89)
The exposure is adjusted by the aperture value and the shutter speed which
are manually adjusted.
Panorama Shot Mode (P94)
This mode allows you to take panorama pictures.
Scene Guide Mode (P97)
This mode allows you to take pictures that match the scene being recorded.
Scenery Mode (P106)
This mode allows you to take pictures of scenery.
Child Mode (P106)
This mode allows you to take pictures of children.
Portrait Mode (P107)
This mode allows you to take portrait pictures.
Creative Control Mode (P108)
Record while checking the image effect.

40
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Control Dial
Rotating the control dial:
Selection of items or setting of values etc., is performed.

In these operating instructions, turning the control dial is indicated as follows.

Displaying/not displaying the operation guide

MENU > [Custom] > [Dial Guide] > [ON]/[OFF]

• When [ON] is set, the operation guide for dials, buttons, etc. is
displayed on the recording screen.
3.5 60 0 98

41
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Cursor buttons/[MENU/SET] button

Pressing the cursor button:
Selection of items or setting of values etc., is performed.
Pressing [MENU/SET]:
Confirmation of setting contents, etc., is performed.

• These operating instructions expresses the up, down, left, and

right of the cursor button as 3/4/2/1.

Even when the camera is operated using the touch screen, it

is possible to operate with the cursor button and [MENU/SET]
button if a guide like the one shown on the right is displayed.
Even on menu screens etc. on which the guide is not
displayed, you can make settings and selections by operating
the buttons.
• By assigning [Cursor Button Lock] to a function button, you can
disable the cursor buttons, the [MENU/SET] button, and the control dial. (P59)

42
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

[DISP.] button (Switching the displayed information)

Press [DISP.] to switch the information displayed on the
screen.
ュリヴヱハ

In Recording Mode
• Screen will switch as follows:
With information Without
Without
With information¢ (tilt sensor information (tilt
information
display)¢ sensor display)
4:3 4:3
50 i L AFS 50 i L AFS

0 98 0 98

¢ Histograms are displayed when the [Histogram] of the [Custom] menu is set to [ON].
It is also possible to display the Exposure meter by setting the [Expo.Meter] of the [Custom]
menu to [ON]. (P85)

• If approximately 1 minute elapses without an operation being performed, part of the display will
disappear.
Press [DISP.] or touch the monitor to make the display reappear.

43
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Displaying/not displaying the histogram

MENU > [Custom] > [Histogram] > [ON]/[OFF]

You can set the position by pressing 3/4/2/1.

• Direct touch operation is also possible from the recording screen.

• A histogram is a graph that displays brightness along the

horizontal axis (black to white) and the number of pixels at each
brightness level on the vertical axis.
It allows you to easily check a picture’s exposure.
A dark
B bright
• When the recorded picture and the histogram do not match each other under the
following conditions, the histogram is displayed in orange.
– When adjusting the exposure or when the Manual Exposure Assistance value in Manual
Exposure Mode is other than “0”
– When the flash is activated
– When suitable exposure is not achieved
– When the brightness of the screen is not correctly displayed in dark places
• The histogram is an approximation in the Recording Mode.
• The histogram displayed in this camera does not match histograms displayed by picture editing
software used in PCs etc.

Displaying/not displaying the guide lines

MENU > [Custom] > [Guide Line] > [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[OFF]

• The guideline is not displayed in the Panorama Shot Mode.

When [ ] is set, guideline positions can be set by pressing 3/4/2/
1.
• You can also set the position directly by touching [ ] on the guideline
of the recording screen.

44
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

∫ About the tilt sensor display

With the tilt sensor displayed, it is easy to correct the tilt of the camera etc.

1 Press [DISP.] to display the tilt sensor.

2 Check the tilt of the camera.

 

A Horizontal direction:
Correcting tilt to the left
B Vertical direction:
Correcting downward tilt
• When the tilt of the camera is little, the indicator changes to green.
• When recording with a vertical orientation, the display automatically switches to a
vertically orientated display.

• Even after correcting the tilt, there may still be an error of approximately n1°.
• When a function button is set to [Level Gauge], the tilt sensor display can be switched on/off by
pressing the function button.

Not available in these cases:

• Tilt sensor display may not be displayed correctly when this unit is in motion.
• When tilted significantly upwards or downwards to record, the tilt sensor display may not be
displayed correctly, and the Direction Detection Function (P35) may not work correctly.

45
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

In Playback Mode

• Screen will switch as follows:

Without
Detailed
With Histogram information
information
information¢1 display¢2 (Highlight
display¢2
display)¢1, 2, 3, 4
4:3
L
F3.5 60
1/98
98 0
WB AWB
ISO 200 AFS
P STD.
F3.5 60
10:00 1.DEC.2016 0 ISO200

F3.5 60 0 200 AWB 4:3 s 100-0001 1/98 100-0001

L RGB

Without
information¢4

¢1 If approximately 1 minute elapses without an operation being performed, part of the display
will disappear.
Press [DISP.] or touch the monitor to make the display reappear.
¢2 Not displayed while using the playback zoom or during motion picture playback, sequential
playback, panorama playback or a slide show.
¢3 This is displayed if [Highlight] in the [Custom] menu is set to [ON].
¢4 If no operation is performed for a number of seconds, [ ] and other touch icons will
disappear.

• Histogram is displayed in R (red), G (green), B (blue), and Y (luminance) during the playback.

46
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Displaying/not displaying white saturated areas

MENU > [Custom] > [Highlight] > [ON]/[OFF]

When the Auto Review function is activated or when playing back, white saturated areas
appear blinking in black and white.
This does not affect the recorded image.
• If there are any white saturated areas, we [ON] [OFF]
recommend compensating the exposure towards
negative (P156) referring to the histogram (P44) and
then taking the picture again. It may result in a better
quality picture.
• This does not work while in Multi Playback, Calendar
Playback, or Playback Zoom.

47
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Touch screen (Touch operations)

Touch screen of this unit is capacitive. Touch the panel directly with your bare finger.

∫ Touch
To touch and release the touch screen. Fn2

• When selecting features using the touch screen, be sure to Fn3

touch the centre of the desired icon.

Fn4

Fn5
SNAP

Fn6

∫ Drag
A movement without releasing the touch screen.
This can also be used to move to the next image during
playback, etc.

∫ Pinch (enlarge/reduce)
Pinch the touch screen apart (enlarge) or together 2.0X
(reduce) with two fingers.

• Touch the screen with the clean and dry finger.

• If you use a commercially available monitor protection sheet, please follow the instructions that
accompany the sheet.
(Some monitor protection sheets may impair visibility or operability.)
• Do not press on the monitor with hard pointed tips, such as ball point pens.
• Do not operate with your fingernails.
• Wipe the monitor with dry soft cloth when it gets dirty with finger prints and others.
• Do not scratch or press the monitor too hard.
• For information about the icons displayed on the touch screen, refer to “Monitor Display” on P320.
Not available in these cases:
• The touch screen may not function normally in the following cases.
– When touched by a gloved hand
– When touched by a wet hand (water or hand cream, etc.)
– When the touch screen is wet
– When you use a commercially available monitor protect sheet
– When touched by multiple hands or fingers at the same time

48
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Enabling/disabling the touch operation

MENU > [Custom] > [Touch Settings]
• When set to [OFF], no corresponding touch tab or touch icon is displayed on the screen.

All touch operations.

[Touch Screen] When set to [OFF], only button and dial operations can be used.
[ON]/[OFF]

Operation to display the touch icons by touching tabs such as [ ] displayed

[Touch Tab] on the right of the screen.
[ON]/[OFF]

Operation to optimise the focus or both the focus and brightness for a
[Touch AF] touched subject.
[AF] (P141)/[AF+AE] (P144)/[OFF]

49
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Taking Pictures Using the Touch Function

Taking pictures using the Touch Shutter function

Applicable modes:

Just by touching the subject you want as your point of focus, the camera will focus on the
subject and take the picture automatically.

1 Touch [ ].

2 Touch [ ].
• Icon will change to [ ], and taking a picture with the
Touch Shutter function becomes possible.
AE

3 Touch the subject you wish to focus on, and

then take a picture.
• The picture is taken when the focus is achieved. AE

∫ To cancel the Touch Shutter function

Touch [ ].

• If shooting with the touch shutter fails, the AF area turns red and disappears. In that case, try
again.
• Measurement of brightness is performed on the spot touched when the [Metering Mode] (P160)
is set to [ ].
At the edge of the screen, the metering may be affected by the brightness around the touched
location.

50
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Easily Optimising the Brightness for a Specified Area (Touch AE)

Applicable modes:

You can easily optimise the brightness for a touched position. When the face of the subject
appears dark, you can brighten the screen according to the brightness of the face.

1 Touch [ ].

2 Touch [ AE ].
• The setting screen for the brightness optimisation position
is displayed.
• [Metering Mode] is set to [ AE ], which is used exclusively AE

for the Touch AE.

3 Touch the subject you want to optimise the

brightness for.
• Touching [Reset] will bring the brightness optimisation
position back to the centre.
ュリヴヱハ 5HVHW 6HW

4 Touch [Set].

∫ Cancelling the Touch AE function

Touch [ ].
• [Metering Mode] returns to the original setting, and the brightness optimisation position is
cancelled.

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:
– In Self Shot Mode
– When using the Digital Zoom.
– When [Touch AF] in [Touch Settings] of the [Custom] menu has been set to [AF+AE]. (P144)

51
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

[REC. SETTING RESET] button (Resetting the recording settings)

You can restore the default recording settings by pressing this button.
Try pressing this button when the function in use stops working or is not working as it
should.

While the recording screen is displayed:

Press [REC. SETTING RESET]. ンユヤハチヴユヵヵリワヨチンユヴユヵ

• Confirmation screen is displayed. It is executed when

[Yes] is selected.
• When the recording settings are reset, the following
setting is also reset.
– Drive mode
• The [Face Recog.] and [Profile Setup] settings are not reset.
• To reset the setup/custom settings and other settings as well as the recording settings, use
[Reset] in the [Setup] menu. (P67)

52
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Setting menu items

You can set menu items in two ways: with button operation, which involves pressing the
cursor button and rotating the control dial, or with touch operation, which involves touching
the screen.

In these operating instructions, steps for setting a menu item are described as follows.
Example: In the [Rec] menu, change [Quality] from [A] to [›]

MENU > [Rec] > [Quality] > [›]

1 Press [MENU/SET].

This menu lets you set the aspect ratio, number of pixels
[Rec] (P328)
and other aspects of the pictures you are recording.
[Motion Picture] This menu lets you set the [Rec Format], [Rec Quality], and
(P331) other aspects for motion picture recording.
Operation of the unit, such as displaying of the screen and
[Custom] (P332) button operations, can be set up according to your
preferences.
This menu lets you perform the clock settings, select the
operating beep tone settings and set other settings which
[Setup] (P61) make it easier for you to operate the camera.
You can also configure the settings of Wi-Fi related
functions.
This menu lets you set the Protection, Cropping or Print
[Playback] (P336)
Settings, etc. of recorded pictures.
• The [Setup] menu contains some important settings relating to the camera’s clock and
power.
Check the settings of this menu before proceeding to use the camera.

53
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

∫ Switching to other menus

e.g.: Switching to the [Setup] menu from [Rec] menu.
1 Press 2.
2 Press 3/4 to select a menu selector icon, such as
[ ].
• The menu toggle icon can also be selected by rotating
the control dial.
3 Press [MENU/SET].
• Select a menu item next and set it.
(In touch operation)

Touch a menu selector icon, such as [ ].

2 Press 3/4 of the cursor button to select

the menu item and press [MENU/SET].
• The menu item can also be selected by rotating the
control dial.
• You can also move to the next screen by pressing
[DISP.].

(In touch operation)

Touch the menu item.
• The page can be changed by touching [ ]/[ ].

3 Press 3/4 of the cursor button to select

the setting and press [MENU/SET].
• The setting can also be selected by rotating the
control dial.
• Depending on the menu item, its setting may not
appear or it may be displayed in a different way.

(In touch operation)

Touch the Setting to set.

• There are functions that cannot be set or used depending on the modes or menu settings being
used on the camera due to the specifications.

54
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

∫ Close the menu

Press [ ] or press the shutter button halfway.

(In touch operation)

Touch [ ].

• When [Menu Information] (P66) in the [Setup] menu is set to [ON], explanations of the
menu items and settings are displayed on the menu screen.
• If you set [Menu Resume] (P66) in the [Setup] menu to [ON], the screen shows the last
selected menu item.
It is set to [ON] at the time of purchase.

55
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Calling frequently-used menus instantly

(Quick Menu)

By using the Quick Menu, some of the menu settings can be easily found.
• The features that can be adjusted using Quick Menu are determined by the mode or a display
style the camera is in.

1 Press [ ] to display the Quick Menu.

2 Rotate the control dial to select the menu 50 i

4:3
L AFS

item, and press 4 or 3.

• The menu item can also be selected by pressing 2/1.

3.5 60 0 AUTO AWB

3 AFS
4:3

Rotate the control dial to select the setting. 50 i L

• The setting can also be selected with 2/1.

4 Press [ ] to exit the menu once the

setting is complete. 3.5 60 0 AUTO AWB

• You can close the menu by pressing the shutter button

halfway.

Switching the method for setting Quick Menu items

MENU > [Custom] > [Q.MENU]

[PRESET]:
The default items can be set.
[CUSTOM]:
The Quick Menu will consist of desired items. (P57)

56
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Change the Quick Menu to your preferred item

When [Q.MENU] (P56) in the [Custom] menu is set to [CUSTOM], the Quick Menu can be
changed as desired.
Up to 15 items can be set to the Quick Menu.

1 Press 4 to select [ ] and then press [MENU/SET].

4:3
L
AUTO

2 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the menu item in the top A

row and then press [MENU/SET].
3 Press 2/1 to select the empty space in the bottom SNAP 1 2 34

row and then press [MENU/SET].

OFF OFF

A Items that can be setup as Quick Menus.

ON OFF OFF OFF

B Items that can be displayed in the Quick Menu screen. 4:3

L
AUTO

• You can also set the menu item by dragging it from the top
row to the bottom row. B
• If there is no empty space in the bottom row, you can
replace an existing item with a new select item by selecting the existing item.
• To cancel the setting, move to the bottom row by pressing 4 and select an item to cancel,
and then press [MENU/SET].
• Items that can be set are as follows:
[Rec] menu
– [Photo Style] (P119) – [HDR] (P130)
– [Filter Select] (P121) – [Shutter Type] (P161)
– [Picture Setting] – [Flash Mode] (P201)
([Aspect Ratio] (P127)/[Picture Size] – [Flash Adjust.] (P204)
(P127)) – [Ex. Tele Conv.]
– [Quality] (P128) (still pictures/motion pictures) (P193)
– [Sensitivity] (P157) – [Digital Zoom] (P195)
– [Metering Mode] (P160) – [Stabilizer] (P190)
– [Focus Mode] (P135)
– [i.Dynamic] (P129)
– [i.Resolution] (P129)

57
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

[Motion Picture] menu

– [Snap Movie] (P212) – [Picture Mode] (P211)
– [Motion Pic. Set]
([Rec Format] (P208)/[Rec Quality]
(P208))
[Custom] menu
– [Silent Mode] (P181) – [Monochrome Live View] (P189)
– [Peaking] (P153) – [Rec Area] (P206)
– [Histogram] (P44) – [Step Zoom] (P196)
– [Guide Line] (P44) – [Zoom Speed] (P196)
– [Zebra Pattern] (P188) – [Touch Screen] (P49)
4 Press [ ].
• It will return to screen of step 1.
Press [MENU/SET] to switch to the recording screen.

58
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Assigning frequently used functions to the

buttons (function buttons)
You can assign recording functions, etc. to specific buttons and icons.

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Custom] > [Fn Button Set]
2 Press 3/4 to select the function button you want to
assign a function to and then press [MENU/SET].
3 Press 3/4 to select the function you want to assign
and then press [MENU/SET].
• Some functions cannot be assigned depending on the
function button.

[Rec] menu/Recording functions

– [Wi-Fi] (P252): [Fn1]¢ – [Sensitivity] (P157)
– [AF/AE LOCK] (P154) – [Metering Mode] (P160)
– [AF-ON] (P151, 154) – [Focus Mode] (P135)
– [Preview] (P92): [Fn2]¢ – [i.Dynamic] (P129)
– [One Push AE] (P93) – [i.Resolution] (P129)
– [Touch AE] (P51) – [HDR] (P130)
– [Level Gauge] (P45): [Fn3]¢ – [Shutter Type] (P161)
– [Zoom Control] (P192) – [Flash Mode] (P201)
– [Cursor Button Lock] (P60) – [Flash Adjust.] (P204)
– [Photo Style] (P119) – [Ex. Tele Conv.]
– [Filter Select] (P108, 121) (still pictures/motion pictures) (P193):
– [Aspect Ratio] (P127) [Fn6]¢
– [Picture Size] (P127) – [Digital Zoom] (P195)
– [Quality] (P128) – [Stabilizer] (P190)
– [Restore to Default] (P60)
[Motion Picture] menu
– [Snap Movie] (P212): [Fn5]¢ – [Picture Mode] (P211)
– [Motion Pic. Set]
([Rec Format] (P208)/[Rec Quality]
(P208))

59
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

[Custom] menu
– [Silent Mode] (P181) – [Monochrome Live View] (P189)
– [Peaking] (P153) – [Rec Area] (P206)
– [Histogram] (P44): [Fn4]¢ – [Step Zoom] (P196)
– [Guide Line] (P44) – [Zoom Speed] (P196)
– [Zebra Pattern] (P188) – [Touch Screen] (P49)
¢ Function button settings at the time of purchase.
• Exit the menu after it is set.

∫ Using function buttons with touch operations

[Fn2], [Fn3], [Fn4], [Fn5] and [Fn6] are used by touching function buttons.

1 Touch [ ].
2 Touch [Fn2], [Fn3], [Fn4], [Fn5] or [Fn6]. Fn2

• The assigned function will operate. Fn3

Fn4

Fn5
SNAP

Fn6

• Some functions cannot be used depending on the mode or displayed screen.

• When using [Ex. Tele Conv.] (still pictures), check that [Picture Size] is set to [M] or [S].
• Operations of the cursor button, [MENU/SET], and the control dial are disabled when [Cursor
Button Lock] is set. Press the function button again to enable them.
• When [Restore to Default] is set, function button settings return to the default configuration.

Not available in these cases:

• The function buttons are not available in Self Shot Mode.
• In the following case, [Fn1] does not work:
– [Miniature Effect]/[One Point Color]/[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)
– When using [Multi Exp.]
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]

60
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Configuring basic settings of this unit

(Setup Menu)

For details on how to select the [Setup] menu settings, refer to P53.

[Clock Set] and [Economy] are important items.

Check their settings before using them.

[Clock Set] —
• Refer to P33 for details.

Set the time in your home area and travel destination.

You can display the local times at the travel destinations and
record them on the pictures you take.
• Set [Home] first thing after purchasing.
[Destination] can be set after setting up [Home].
After selecting [Destination] or [Home], press 2/1 to select
an area, and press [MENU/SET] to set.
“ [Destination]: A
Travel destination area
[World Time] A Current time of the
destination area
B Time difference from home B
area

– [Home]: C
Your home area
C Current time
D Time difference from GMT
(Greenwich Mean Time) D

• Press 3 if you are using Daylight Savings [ ]. (The time will move forward by 1 hour.)
Press 3 once more to return to the normal time.
• If you cannot find the travel destination in the areas displayed on the screen, set by the time
difference from the home area.

61
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Departure date and return date of the trip as well as the name of
the travel destination can be set.
You can display the number of days that have passed when
playing back the pictures and stamp it on the recorded pictures
with [Text Stamp] (P236).
[Travel Setup]:
[SET]: Departure date and return date are set. Elapsed days
(how many days after) of the trip are recorded.
[OFF]
[Travel Date] • The travel date is automatically cancelled if the current date is
after the return date.
If the [Travel Setup] is set to [OFF], [Location] will also be set to
[OFF].
[Location]:
[SET]: Travel destination is recorded at the time of
recording.
[OFF]
• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” on
P69.
• The number of days that have passed since the departure date can be printed out using the
software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (P308).
• The travel date is calculated using the date in the clock setting and the departure date you set.
If you set [World Time] to the travel destination, the travel date is calculated using the date in
the clock setting and the travel destination setting.
• The [Travel Date] feature is disabled when recording [AVCHD] motion pictures.
• While recording motion pictures, the [Location] feature is disabled.

[Wi-Fi] [Wi-Fi Function]/[Wi-Fi Setup]

• Refer to P254, 298 for details.

62
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

This allows you to set the volume for electronic sound and the
electronic shutter sound.
[Beep Volume]: [Shutter Vol.]:
[Beep] [u] (High) [ ] (High)
[t] (Low) [ ] (Low)
[s] (OFF) [ ] (OFF)
[Shutter Tone]:
[ 1 ]/[ 2 ]/[ 3 ]
• When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON], [Beep Volume] and [Shutter Vol.] is set to [OFF].

Set the frame rate of the recording screen (Live View screen).
[30fps]: Reduces the power consumption, extending the
[Live View Mode]
operating time.
[60fps]: Displays movements smoother.
• When [Live View Mode] is set to [30fps] the image quality on the recording screen may be
worse than when it is set to [60fps], but this does not affect the recorded image.
• In a dark environment, the frame rate may become slower.
• When using the AC adaptor (optional), [Live View Mode] is fixed to [60fps].

Brightness, colour, or red or blue tint of the Monitor is adjusted.

[ ] ([Brightness]):
Adjust the brightness.
[ ] ([Contrast]):
Adjust the contrast.
[ ] ([Saturation]):
Adjust the clarity of colours.
[Monitor Display] [ ] ([Red Tint]):
Adjust the red tint.
[ ] ([Blue Tint]):
Adjust the blue tint.
1 Select the settings by pressing 3/4, and adjust with
2/1.
• Adjusting can also be performed by rotating the control dial.
2 Press [MENU/SET] to set.
• Some subjects may appear differently from actuality on the monitor. However, this does not
affect the recorded pictures.

63
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Sets the monitor brightness according to the ambient light level.

„ [AUTO]:
The brightness is adjusted automatically depending on how bright
it is around the camera.
[Monitor Luminance] …
1 [MODE1]:
Make the monitor brighter.
…
2 [MODE2]:
Set the monitor to the standard brightness.
3 [MODE3]:
…
Make the monitor darker.
• The brightness of pictures displayed on the monitor is enhanced, so some subjects on the
monitor may appear different from the actual subjects. However, this enhancement does not
affect recorded pictures.
• The monitor automatically returns to standard brightness if no operations are performed for
30 seconds when recording in [MODE1]. It will light up brightly again with button or touch
operation.
• When [AUTO] or [MODE1] is set, the usage time is reduced.
• [AUTO] is only available in the Recording Mode.
• The initial setting when using the AC adaptor (optional) is [MODE2].

The unit can be set up to prevent unnecessary battery

consumption.
[Sleep Mode]:
The camera is automatically turned off if the camera has not been
used for the time selected on the setting.
[Economy]
[10MIN.]/[5MIN.]/[2MIN.]/[1MIN.]/[OFF]
[Auto Monitor Off]:
The monitor is automatically turned off if the camera has not been
used for the time selected on the setting.
[5MIN.]/[2MIN.]/[1MIN.]
• Press the shutter button halfway or turn the camera off and on to cancel [Sleep Mode].
• To turn the monitor on again, press any button or touch the monitor.
• [Economy] does not work in the following cases.
– When connecting to a PC or a printer
– When recording or playing back motion pictures
– During a slide show
– When using [Multi Exp.]
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When [Auto Shooting] in [Stop Motion Animation] is set to [ON].
• When using the AC adaptor (optional), [Sleep Mode] is disabled.
• When using the AC adaptor (optional), [Auto Monitor Off] is fixed to [5MIN.].

64
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Select the USB communication system when connecting the

camera to your PC or your printer with the USB connection cable
(supplied).
y [Select on connection]:
[USB Mode] Select either [PC] or [PictBridge(PTP)] if you connected the
camera to a PC or a printer supporting PictBridge.
{ [PictBridge(PTP)]:
Set when connecting to a printer supporting PictBridge.
z [PC]:
Set when connecting to a PC.

This sets how the unit connects to a television etc.

[Video Out]:
Set to match the colour television system in each country.
[NTSC]:
Video output is set to NTSC system.
[PAL]:
Video output is set to PAL system.
• This will operate when the AV cable (optional) or HDMI micro cable is
connected.
[TV Aspect]:
Set to match the type of TV.
[16:9]:
When connecting to a 16:9 screen TV.
[4:3]:
When connecting to a 4:3 screen TV.
[TV Connection] • This will work when the AV cable (optional) is connected.
[HDMI Mode]:
Set the format for the HDMI output when playing back on the
HDMI compatible high-definition TV connected with this unit using
the HDMI micro cable.
(i: Interlace method, p: Progressive method)
[AUTO]:
The output resolution is automatically set based on the
information from the connected TV.
[1080p]/[1080i]/[720p]/[576p]¢1([480p]¢2)
¢1 When [Video Out] is set to [PAL]
¢2 When [Video Out] is set to [NTSC]
• This will work when the HDMI micro cable is connected.
• If no image appears on the TV with [AUTO], switch the setting to a
constant setting other than [AUTO] to set a format supported by your
TV.
(Please read the operating instructions for the TV.)

65
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

[3D Playback]:
Set the output method for 3D pictures.
[ ]: Set when connecting to a 3D compatible television.
[ ]: Set when connecting to a television not compatible with
3D.
Set this when you would like to view pictures in 2D
(conventional image) on a 3D compatible television.
• This will work when the HDMI micro cable is connected.
• Refer to P301 for the method to play back 3D pictures in 3D.

[TV Connection] [VIERA Link]:

Settings that allow this unit to be controlled by the remote control
of the VIERA equipment by automatically coupling this unit with
the VIERA Link compatible equipment using HDMI micro cable.
[ON]: Remote control operation of the VIERA Link compatible
equipment is enabled.
(Not all operations are possible)
Button operation of the main unit will be limited.
[OFF]: Operation is performed with the buttons on this unit.
• This will work when the HDMI micro cable is connected.
• Refer to P305 for details.

Stores the location of the last-used menu item for each menu.
[Menu Resume]
[ON]/[OFF]

[Menu Background] —
• Set the background colour for the menu screen.

Explanations of the menu items and settings are displayed on the

[Menu Information] menu screen.
[ON]/[OFF]

66
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

[Language] Set the language displayed on the screen.

• If you set a different language by mistake, select [~] from the menu icons to set the desired
language.

[Version Disp.] —
• This enables the firmware versions of the camera and lens to be checked.
• Press [MENU/SET] on the version display screen to display information about the software on
the unit.

An exposure value can be reset when the Recording Mode is

[Exposure Comp. changed or the camera is turned off.
Reset]
[ON]/[OFF]

Set whether to cancel the self-timer when the unit is turned off.
[Self Timer Auto Off]
[ON]/[OFF]

[No.Reset] Reset the file number of the next recording to 0001.

• The folder number is updated and the file number starts from 0001.
• A folder number between 100 and 999 can be assigned.
The folder number should be reset before it reaches 999. We recommend formatting the card
(P27) after saving the data on a PC or elsewhere.
• To reset the folder number to 100, format the card first and then use this function to reset the
file number.
A reset screen for the folder number will then appear. Select [Yes] to reset the folder number.

The recording or setup/custom settings are reset to the default.

The following settings are reset to the default:

[Reset] – Recording settings and drive mode
– Recording settings ([Face Recog.] and [Profile Setup] settings)
– Setup/custom settings
• When the setup/custom settings are reset, the following settings are also reset.
– The [World Time] setting
– The settings of [Travel Date] (departure date, return date, location)
– The settings of [Rotate Disp.], [Picture Sort] and [Delete Confirmation] in the [Playback] menu
• The folder number and the clock setting are not changed.

67
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Reset all settings in the [Wi-Fi] menu to factory default settings.

[Reset Wi-Fi Settings]
(Excluding [LUMIX CLUB] (P288))
• Always reset the camera when disposing or selling it to prevent personal information saved
within the camera from being misused.
• Always reset the camera after making a copy of personal information when sending the camera
in to be repaired.

It will perform optimisation of imaging device and image

[Pixel Refresh]
processing.
• Imaging device and image processing is optimised when the camera is purchased. Use this
function when bright spots that do not exist in the subject get recorded.
• Turn the camera off and on after the pixels are corrected.

Dust reduction to blow off the debris and dust that have affixed to
[Sensor Cleaning]
the front of the imaging device is performed.
• Dust Reduction Function will operate automatically when the camera is turned on, but you can
use this function when you see dust. (P352)

[Format] —
• Refer to P27 for details.

68
2. Getting Started/Basic Operations

Entering Text
It is possible to enter babies’ and pets’ names and the
locations when recording.
When a screen that looks like the one on the right is
displayed, you can enter characters.
(Only alphabetical characters and symbols can be entered.)
• Example of operation for displaying a screen:
MENU > [Rec] > [Profile Setup] > [SET] >
[Baby1] > [Name] > [SET]

1 Press 3/4/2/1 to select text and then press [MENU/SET] to

register.
• Move the cursor to [ ] and then press [MENU/SET] to switch text between [A]
(capitals), [a] (lower case), [1] (numbers) and [&] (special characters).
• To enter the same character again, rotate the control dial right to move the cursor.
• The following operations can be performed by moving the cursor to the item and
pressing [MENU/SET]:
– []]: Enter a blank
– [Delete]: Delete a character
– [ ]: Move the entry position cursor to the left
– [ ]: Move the entry position cursor to the right
• A maximum of 30 characters can be entered.
(Maximum of 9 characters when setting names in [Face Recog.])
• A maximum of 15 characters can be entered for [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ] and [ ].
(Maximum of 6 characters when setting names in [Face Recog.])

2 Press 3/4/2/1 to move the cursor to [Set] and then press

[MENU/SET] to end text input.

• Text can be scrolled if all of the entered text does not fit on the screen.

69
 3. Recording Modes

Taking Pictures using the Automatic Function

(Intelligent Auto Mode)

Recording Mode:

In this mode, the camera makes the optimal settings for the subject and scene, so we
recommend it when you wish to leave the settings to the camera and record without
thinking about them.
The camera detects scenes automatically (Scene Detection)
( : When taking pictures, : When recording motion pictures)

[i-Portrait] [i-Scenery] [i-Macro] [i-Night Portrait]¢1 [i-Night Scenery]

[iHandheld Night
[i-Food] [i-Baby]¢3 [i-Sunset] [i-Low Light]
Shot]¢2
¢1 Only displayed when the built-in flash is open.
¢2 Only displayed when [iHandheld Night Shot] is set to [ON]. (P74)
¢3 When [Face Recog.] is set to [ON], [ ] will be displayed for
birthdays of registered faces already set only when the Face/Eye of
a person 3 years old or younger is detected.
¦ • [¦] is set if none of the scenes are applicable, and the standard
settings are set.
The Intelligent Auto Mode adjusts the settings of the main functions automatically, allowing
you to record images without having to make advanced settings. When you want to record
images easily, use Intelligent Auto Mode.
(±: possible, —: not possible)

Intelligent Auto Plus Mode Intelligent Auto Mode

Setting the brightness ± —
Setting the colour tone ± —
Defocus Control ± ±
Menus that can be set Refer to P79 for details.

70
3. Recording Modes

1 Press [¦].
• The camera will switch to either the most recently used of
Intelligent Auto Mode or Intelligent Auto Plus Mode.
At the time of purchase, the mode is set to Intelligent Auto
Plus Mode. (P78)
• The Intelligent Auto lamp lights up when you set the
camera to Intelligent Auto Mode.
• If you press the button again, the Intelligent Auto lamp will go off, and the camera will be
set to the Recording Mode selected with the mode dial.

2 Align the screen with the subject.

• When the camera identifies the optimum scene, the
icon of the scene concerned is displayed in blue for 4
50
50ii
2 seconds, after which its colour changes to the usual
red. (Automatic scene detection)

Switching the operation method of the [¦] button

MENU > [Custom] > [iA Button Switch]

[Single Press]:
It will switch to Intelligent Auto ( or ) Mode by pressing [¦].
[Press and hold]:
It will switch to Intelligent Auto ( or ) Mode by pressing [¦] for a while.

71
3. Recording Modes

∫ Functions that work automatically

• The following functions are performed automatically to allow the camera to make the optimal
settings.
– Scene Detection
– Backlight Compensation
– [Face/Eye Detection]
– Auto White Balance
– Intelligent ISO sensitivity control
– [Red-Eye Removal]
– [i.Resolution]
– [i.Dynamic]
– [Long Shtr NR]
– [Shading Comp.]
– [Quick AF]
– [AF Assist Lamp]

∫ Auto Focus, Face/Eye Detection , and Face Recognition

The Auto Focus Mode is automatically set to [š]. If you touch the subject, the AF tracking
function will work. The AF tracking function will also work if you press 2 and then press
the shutter button halfway.
(About tracking AF, refer to P140 for details.)
• When [ ], [ ], or [ ] is set, an eye closer to the camera will be in focus,
while the exposure will be optimised for the face.
In Intelligent Auto Plus Mode or Intelligent Auto Mode, you cannot change
the eye in focus. ([Face/Eye Detection])
• During AF Tracking, Scene Detection does not work until the subject is
locked.
• When [Face Recog.] is set to [ON], and the face similar to the registered face is detected, [R] is
displayed in the top right of [ ], [ ] and [ ].

∫ About the flash

Flash mode is set to [Œ] when the flash is closed, and [ ] (AUTO) when it is open.
When the flash is open, the camera automatically sets [ ], [ ] (AUTO/Red-Eye
Reduction), [ ] or [ ] to match the type of subject and brightness.

• Open the flash when the flash is to be used. (P198)

• When [ ] or [ ] is set, Red-Eye Removal is enabled.
• Shutter speed will be slower during [ ] or [ ].

72
3. Recording Modes

∫ Scene Detection
• If a tripod is used, for instance, and the camera has judged that camera shake is minimal when
the scene detection has been identified as [ ], the shutter speed will be slower than normal.
Take care not to move the camera while taking pictures.

• Due to conditions such as the ones below, a different scene may be identified for the same
subject.
– Subject conditions: When the face is bright or dark, the size, colour and shape of the
subject, the distance to the subject, the contrast of the subject, when the subject is moving
– Recording conditions: Sunset, sunrise, under low brightness conditions, when the camera
is shaken, when zoom is used

The Backlight Compensation

• When there is a backlight, the subject appears darker and the camera will automatically
attempt to correct it by increasing the brightness of the picture.
In Intelligent Auto Plus Mode or Intelligent Auto Mode, backlight compensation works
automatically.

73
3. Recording Modes

Recording night scenes ([iHandheld Night Shot])

Recording Mode:

When [iHandheld Night Shot] is set to [ON] and [ ] is detected while taking handheld
night shots, pictures of the night scenery will be taken at a high burst speed and composed
into a single picture.
This mode is useful if you want to take stunning night shots with minimal jitter and noise,
without using a tripod.
MENU > [Rec] > [iHandheld Night Shot] > [ON]/[OFF]

• The angle of view will be slightly narrower.

• A message notifying that multiple pictures will be taken is displayed. Do not move the camera
during the continuous shooting after pressing the shutter button.
• If the camera is mounted on a tripod or other type of stand, [ ] will not be detected.
• Flash is fixed to [Œ] (forced flash off).

Not available in these cases:

• [iHandheld Night Shot] does not work for the pictures taken during a motion picture recording.
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]
– When [Ex. Tele Conv.] in the [Rec] menu is set
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only when [Auto Shooting] is set)

74
3. Recording Modes

Combining pictures into a single picture with rich gradation ([iHDR])

Recording Mode:

When [iHDR] is set to [ON] and there is, for example, strong contrast between the
background and the subject, multiple still pictures are recorded with differing exposures
and combined to create a single still picture rich in gradation.
[iHDR] works automatically as needed. When it does, [ ] is displayed on the screen.
MENU > [Rec] > [iHDR] > [ON]/[OFF]

• The angle of view will be slightly narrower.

• A message notifying that multiple pictures will be taken is displayed. Do not move the camera
during the continuous shooting after pressing the shutter button.
• You cannot take the next picture until the combination of pictures is complete.
• A moving subject may be recorded with unnatural blurs.

Not available in these cases:

• [iHDR] does not work for the pictures taken during a motion picture recording.
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When recording using the flash
– When recording in Burst Mode
– When recording with Auto Bracket
– When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]
– When [Ex. Tele Conv.] in the [Rec] menu is set
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only when [Auto Shooting] is set)

75
3. Recording Modes

Taking a picture with a blurred background (Defocus Control)

Recording Mode:

You can easily set the blurriness of the background while checking the screen.

1 Press 3 to display the setting screen.

• Each time 3 is pressed in Intelligent Auto Plus Mode, the camera switches between
brightness setting operation (P77), Defocus Control operation, and normal operation.
• Each time 3 is pressed in Intelligent Auto Mode, the camera switches between Defocus
Control operation and normal operation.
2 Rotate the control dial to set the blurriness.

4.0 125

Strong defocus Weak defocus

∫ When operating the touch screen

1 Touch [ ].

2 Touch [ ] to display the setting screen.

3 Drag the slide bar to set.
• Press [MENU/SET] to end the Defocus Control operation.

AE

• Pressing [ ] on the blurriness setting screen will cancel the setting.

• In Intelligent Auto Mode ( or ), Auto Focus Mode is set to [Ø].
The position of the AF area can be set by touching the screen. (Its size cannot be changed)
• Depending on the lens used, you may hear a sound from the lens when the Defocus Control is
used, but this is due to operation of the aperture of the lens and it is not a malfunction.
• Depending on the lens used, operational sound of the Defocus Control may be recorded during
the recording of a motion picture when the function is used.

Not available in these cases:

• Depending on the lens used, Defocus Control function may not operate.
Refer to the website for compatible lenses.

76
3. Recording Modes

Recording images by changing the brightness or colour tone

Recording Mode:

This mode enables you to change the brightness and colour tone to your preferred
settings from the ones set by the camera.

Setting brightness

1 Press 3 to display the setting screen.

• Each press of 3 switches among brightness setting, Defocus Control (P76) and end
operation.
2 Rotate the control dial to adjust brightness.

+1
-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
0 +5

Setting colour

1 Press 1 to display the setting screen.

2 Rotate the control dial to adjust colour.
• This will adjust the colour of the image from a reddish
colour to a bluish colour.
• Press [MENU/SET] to return to the recording screen.

A B
∫ Change the settings by using the touch screen
1 Touch [ ].
2 Touch the item you want to set.
[ ]: Colour tone
[ ]: Brightness
3 Drag the slide bar to set.
• Press [MENU/SET] to return to the recording screen.

• If the [Exposure Comp. Reset] is set to [ON], the brightness setting will return to the default
level (centre point) when this unit is turned off or the camera is switched to another Recording
Mode.
• The colour setting will return to the default level (centre point) when this unit is turned off or the
camera is switched to another Recording Mode.

77
3. Recording Modes

About Intelligent Auto Plus Mode and Intelligent Auto Mode

∫ Switching between Intelligent Auto Plus Mode and Intelligent Auto Mode
1 Press [MENU/SET].

2 Press 2.
3 Press 3/4 to select the [ ] or [ ] tab.
4 Press 1 to select [ ] or [ ] and then press
[MENU/SET].
• If [DISP.] is pressed, the description of the selected mode
will be displayed.

It is also possible to display the

selection screen by touching the
Recording Mode icon in recording
screen.

78
3. Recording Modes

∫ Menus that can be set

Only the following menus can be set.
Intelligent Auto Plus Mode
Menu Item
[Photo Style]/[Aspect Ratio]/[Picture Size]/[Quality]/[Focus Mode]/[Burst Rate]/
[Auto Bracket]/[Self Timer]/[iHandheld Night Shot]/[iHDR]/[Time Lapse Shot]/
[Rec]
[Stop Motion Animation]/[Shutter Type]/[Ex. Tele Conv.]/[Color Space]/
[Stabilizer]/[Face Recog.]/[Profile Setup]
[Motion [Photo Style]/[Snap Movie]/[Rec Format]/[Rec Quality]/[Focus Mode]/
Picture] [Continuous AF]/[Ex. Tele Conv.]/[Mic Level Disp.]/[Mic Level Adj.]/[Wind Cut]

[Silent Mode]/[Half Press Release]/[Pinpoint AF Time]/[Pinpoint AF Display]/

[Focus/Release Priority]/[AF+MF]/[MF Assist]/[MF Assist Display]/[MF Guide]/
[Peaking]/[Histogram]/[Guide Line]/[Highlight]/[Zebra Pattern]/[Monochrome
[Custom] Live View]/[Constant Preview]/[Dial Guide]/[Rec Area]/[Remaining Disp.]/
[Auto Review]/[Fn Button Set]/[Q.MENU]/[iA Button Switch]/[Video Button]/
[Power Zoom Lens]/[Lens w/o Focus Ring]/[Self Shot]/[Touch Settings]/[Touch
Scroll]/[Menu Guide]/[Shoot w/o Lens]
[Setup] All menu items can be set. (P61)

Intelligent Auto Mode

Menu Item
[Aspect Ratio]/[Picture Size]/[Focus Mode]/[Burst Rate]/[Self Timer]/
[Rec] [iHandheld Night Shot]/[iHDR]/[Time Lapse Shot]/[Stop Motion Animation]/
[Face Recog.]
[Motion
[Snap Movie]/[Rec Format]/[Rec Quality]/[Focus Mode]
Picture]
[Custom] [Silent Mode]/[Guide Line]/[Remaining Disp.]
[Setup] All menu items can be set. (P61)

79
3. Recording Modes

Taking Pictures of Yourself ([Self Shot])

Applicable modes:

If you rotate the monitor, Self Shot Mode is activated.

You can easily take pictures of yourself while looking at the screen.

In Self Shot Mode...

• Deciding on a composition is easier because recording is
performed while looking at the screen.
• Pictures with different poses and facial expressions can
be taken at once by increasing the number of pictures to
be recorded.
• Automatically enables the touch operation.
• Settings for the respective Recording Modes are
maintained, except for the recording settings for Self
Shot Mode (P80).
• In Playback Mode, the camera can be set to display only the pictures taken in Self Shot
Mode. ([Category Play]) (P229)

1 Rotate the monitor as shown in the figure.

• When you rotate the monitor, a mirror image will be
displayed on the monitor.

2 Touch the item. OFF

No
Effect

OFF

OFF

80
3. Recording Modes

OFF ([Soft Skin]) Makes people’s faces look brighter and their skin tones look softer.
No
Effect ([Filter Select]) Adds an image effect (filter) suited for Self Shot Mode.
Blurs the background of detected faces. (Note that the faces further
([Defocusing])
OFF
back in the image will be blurred with the background.)
([Slimming
Makes people look slimmer.
OFF
Mode])
([Shutter]) Sets the way the shutter is released. (P83)
([Countdown], Sets the countdown setting ([Countdown]) and the number of
[Shots]) pictures to be taken in succession ([Shots]).

3 Touch the slide bar.

OFF

• You can select [OFF] or a value between [1] and [10]. No

Effect

Selecting the left end A allows you to set the item to OFF

[OFF]. OFF

• If you have selected [Filter Select], [Defocusing],

[Shutter] or [Shots], select the desired icon.

[ No
Effect ] ([No Effect])/[ OFF ] ([Expressive])/[ OFF ] ([Retro])/
EXPS RETR
[Filter Select]
[ HKEY
OFF
] ([High Key])/[ TOY
OFF
] ([Toy Effect])/[ SOFT
OFF
] ([Soft Focus])

[Defocusing] [ OFF ] (Off)/[ ON ] (On)

[ ] (Shutter button only)/[ ] (Touch)/

[Shutter]
[ ] (Buddy)/[ ] (Face)

[Shots] [ 1 ] (1 picture)/[ 2 ] (2 pictures)/[ 3 ] (3 pictures)/[ 4 ] (4 pictures)

RKE RKE RKE RKE

4 Touch [Exit]

5 Decide on your poses while looking at the monitor.

• The AF area is displayed around the subject’s face by the Face/Eye Detection function.
(If [š] in AF Mode is not available with the current Recording Mode, an available focus
setting for each Recording Mode will be used.)

6 Press the shutter button halfway to focus and

2
then press it fully to take the picture.
• Look at the lens when recording.
• Countdown starts, and recording takes place when it ends.
If multiple pictures are set to be recorded, the recording
continues until the set number is reached.
• For information on how to start taking a picture using [Shutter], refer to P83.

81
3. Recording Modes

Taking pictures with the [Fn1] button

The [Fn1] button works as a shutter button in Self Shot
Mode. (It can only be pressed fully.) The button allows you
to take pictures of yourself while holding the camera with
your right hand.

Enabling/disabling the Self Shot Mode

MENU > [Custom] > [Self Shot] > [ON]/[OFF]

• When [OFF] is set, the Self Shot Mode is not set even if the monitor is rotated.

• Be careful not to look at the light from the flash and the AF Assist Lamp directly.
• When the [Soft Skin] is set
– If you set the effect level to [2] or higher, display of the recording screen will be delayed more
than usual and the screen will look as if frames are dropping.
– Since recording with this effect requires extra image processing, if you take a picture with the
effect level set to [2] or higher, it takes some time until you can take the next picture.
– The smoothing effect is applied to the part that has a similar tone to the complexion of a
subject, as well.
– This mode may not be effective under insufficient lighting.
• If you set [Defocusing] to [
ON ] (On), display of the recording screen will be delayed more than

usual and the screen will look as if frames are dropping. In addition, since recording with
[Defocusing] requires extra image-processing time, it takes some time until you can take the
next picture.

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When recording motion pictures
– When using [Multi Exp.]
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation]
• [Soft Skin] and [Defocusing] are not available in the following cases:
– [Glistening Water]/[Clear Nightscape]/[Cool Night Sky]/[Warm Glowing Nightscape]/[Artistic
Nightscape]/[Glittering Illuminations]/[Handheld Night Shot]/[Soft Image of a Flower]/
[Appetizing Food]/[Cute Dessert] (Scene Guide Mode)
– Creative Control Mode
– In Manual Focus
• If the distance to the subject is too close, the lens may fail to focus depending on the lens you
are using, such as a telephoto lens.

82
3. Recording Modes

Changing the way the shutter is released

In [Shutter], you can select the way you start recording without pressing the shutter button.
We recommend that you avoid using the shutter button when, for example, jitter occurs
during shutter operation.

• You can start recording with the shutter button regardless of the [Shutter] setting.
When using [ ] (Shutter button only), only the shutter button can be used.
• For information on [ ] (Touch), refer to P50.

Not available in these cases:

•[ ] (Face) and [ ] (Buddy) are not available in the following cases:
– Recording Modes which do not allow setting to [š] of AF Mode (P138)
– In Manual Focus

Face Shutter
The shutter is released when a face detected by the Face/Eye Detection function is
covered with a hand or other object and then detected again.

1 Display the yellow frame of Face/Eye Detection.

2 Cover your face with your hand or other object so that the yellow frame disappears for
a moment.
3 When you move your hand away and the yellow frame appears, the shutter is released.

Buddy Shutter

The shutter is released when two faces detected by the Face/Eye Detection function move
closer to each other.

1 Display two Face/Eye Detection frames.

• When [ ] (Buddy) is selected, even if several subjects are present, Face/Eye Detection
detects only a maximum of two faces.
2 The shutter is released when the two frames come within a certain distance of each
other.

83
3. Recording Modes

Taking Pictures with Your Favourite Settings

(Programme AE Mode)

Recording Mode:

The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and the aperture value according to the
brightness of the subject.
You can take pictures with greater freedom by changing various settings in the [Rec]
menu.

1 Set the mode dial to [ ].

2 Press the shutter button halfway and display

the aperture value and shutter speed value 3.5 60 0 200 98
on the screen.
A B
A Aperture value
B Shutter speed
• If the exposure is not adequate when the shutter button is pressed halfway, the aperture
value and shutter speed turn red and blink.

84
3. Recording Modes

Programme Shift
In Programme AE Mode, you can change the preset aperture value and shutter speed
without changing the exposure. This is called Programme Shift.
You can make the background more blurred by decreasing the aperture value or record a
moving subject more dynamically by slowing the shutter speed when taking a picture in
Programme AE Mode.

1 Press the shutter button halfway and display the aperture value and shutter
speed value on the screen.
2 While the values are displayed (about
SS 250 125 60 30 15
10 seconds), perform the Programme Shift by F 4.0 5.6 8.0

rotating the control dial. 4.0 60 0 200 98

A Programme Shift indication
A
• During display of the numerical values, each press of the
cursor button 3 switches between Programme Shift and Exposure Compensation.
(P156)
• To cancel Programme Shift, turn the camera off or rotate the control dial until the
Programme Shift indication disappears.
Programme Shift is easily cancelled by setting [Fn Button Set] on the [Custom] menu to
[One Push AE]. (P93)

Displaying/not displaying the exposure meter

MENU > [Custom] > [Expo.Meter] > [ON]/[OFF]

B Exposure meter
• Set to [ON] to display the Exposure meter when correcting SS 250 125 60 30 15
F 4.0 5.6 8.0
exposure, performing Programme Shift, setting aperture, and 4.0 60 0 200 98
setting shutter speed.
B
• Unsuitable areas of the range are displayed in red.
• When the Exposure meter is not displayed, switch the display information for screen by
pressing [DISP.]. (P43)
• The Exposure meter disappears after approximately 4 seconds if no operation is performed.

85
3. Recording Modes

Example of Programme Shift

[When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) is used]

㸫1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 㸦(Y㸧

2 17
2.8 18
4 19
(A) 5.6 20
8 21
11 22
16 23
22

4 2 1 1/2 1/4 1/8 1/15 1/30 1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000 1/8000 1/16000

(B)
(A): Aperture value
(B): Shutter speed
1 Programme Shift line chart
Represents the aperture and shutter speed set automatically by the camera at each
exposure value.
2 Programme Shift amount
Represents the range of the aperture and shutter speed combination you can change with
Programme Shift at each exposure value.
3 Programme Shift limit
Represents the range of the aperture and shutter speed you can select when you use
Programme Shift with the camera.

• “EV” is an abbreviation of “Exposure Value”.

The EV changes with the aperture value or the shutter speed.

Not available in these cases:

• Programme Shift is available in all [Sensitivity] settings except [ ].

86
3. Recording Modes

Taking Pictures by Specifying the Aperture/

Shutter Speed
Recording Mode:

• The effects of the set aperture value and shutter speed will not be visible on the recording
screen. To check on the recording screen, please use [Preview]. (P92)
• The brightness of the screen and the recorded pictures may differ. Check the pictures on the
playback screen.

Aperture-Priority AE Mode
When you set the aperture value, the camera automatically optimises the shutter speed
for the brightness of the subject.
Set the aperture value to a higher number when you want a sharp focus background. Set
the aperture value to a lower number when you want a soft focus background.

1 Set the mode dial to [ ].

2 Rotate the control dial to set the aperture

value.
A Aperture value SS 60 30 15 8 4
B Exposure meter F 4.0 5.6 8.0 11 16

• Each press of the cursor button 3 switches between 8.0

Aperture Setting and Exposure Compensation. A B

Aperture value: Aperture value:

Reduces Increases
It becomes easier to defocus the It becomes easier to maintain focus
background. as far as the background.

• Rotate the control dial to display the Exposure Meter. Unsuitable areas of the range are
displayed in red.
• If the exposure is not adequate, the aperture value and the shutter speed turn red and blink
when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
• When using a lens having an aperture ring, set the position of the aperture ring to [A] to activate
the control dial setting. At positions other than [A], the ring setting will take priority.

87
3. Recording Modes

Shutter-Priority AE Mode
When you set the shutter speed, the camera automatically optimises the aperture value
for the brightness of the subject.
When you want to take a sharp picture of a fast moving subject, set with a faster shutter
speed. When you want to create a trail effect, set to a slower shutter speed.

1 Set the mode dial to [ ].

2 Rotate the control dial to set the shutter

speed.
A Shutter speed SS 60 125 250 500 1000
B Exposure meter F 8.0 5.6 4.0

250
• Each press of the cursor button 3 switches between
A B
Shutter Speed Setting and Exposure Compensation.

Shutter speed: Shutter speed:

Slow Fast
It becomes easier to express It becomes easier to freeze
movement. movement.

• Rotate the control dial to display the Exposure Meter. Unsuitable areas of the range are
displayed in red.
• If the exposure is not adequate, the aperture value and the shutter speed turn red and blink
when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
• We recommend using a tripod when the shutter speed is slow.

Not available in these cases:

• When the flash is activated, the fastest shutter speed that can be selected is 1/50th of a
second. (P203)
• When the electronic front curtain shutter is used, shutter speeds faster than 1/500th of a
second cannot be set.
• When the electronic shutter is used, shutter speeds slower than 1 second cannot be set.

88
3. Recording Modes

Manual Exposure Mode

Determine the exposure by manually setting the aperture value and the shutter speed.
The Manual Exposure Assistance appears on the lower portion of the screen to indicate
the exposure.

1 Set the mode dial to [ ].

2 Rotate the control dial to set the aperture A

value and shutter speed.

A Exposure meter
B Aperture value
SS 8 15 30 60 125
C Shutter speed F 4.0 5.6 8.0 11
D Manual Exposure Assistance 5.6 30
0 +3

• Each press of the cursor button 3 switches between B C D

Aperture Setting and Shutter Speed Setting.

Aperture value

Reduces Increases
It becomes easier to defocus the It becomes easier to maintain
background. focus as far as the background.

Shutter speed

Slow Fast
It becomes easier to express It becomes easier to freeze
movement. movement.

89
3. Recording Modes

Optimising the ISO sensitivity for the shutter speed and aperture value
When the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO], the camera sets the ISO sensitivity
automatically so that the exposure will be appropriate for the shutter speed and aperture
value.
• Depending on recording conditions, an appropriate exposure may not be set or the ISO
sensitivity may become higher.

Manual Exposure Assistance

0 The exposure is adequate.

0 3 Set to faster shutter speed or larger aperture value.

3 0 Set to slower shutter speed or smaller aperture value.

• The Manual Exposure Assistance is an approximation. We recommend checking the pictures

on the playback screen.

∫ About [T] (Time)

If you set the shutter speed to [T] (Time) and fully press the shutter button, an exposure
starts. (Continues up to approximately 60 seconds.)
If you press the shutter button again, the exposure will end.
Since this function allows you to adjust the exposure time to the desired value, it is
convenient for taking pictures of fireworks, night scenes, etc.
• If you set the shutter speed to [T], [T] is displayed on the screen.
• When you take pictures with the shutter speed set to [T], use a sufficiently charged battery.
(P20)
• The Manual Exposure Assistance does not appear.
• This function is not available when using the electronic shutter.
• It can only be used with Manual Exposure Mode.

• When taking pictures with the shutter speed set to [T], we recommend using a tripod
and taking pictures remotely by connecting the camera to a smartphone to prevent
camera shake. (P261)
• When you take pictures with the shutter speed set to [T], noise may become visible. To
avoid picture noise, we recommend setting [Long Shtr NR] in the [Rec] menu to [ON]
before taking pictures. (P131)

90
3. Recording Modes

Checking/not checking the effects of aperture and shutter speed on the

recording screen

MENU > [Custom] > [Constant Preview] > [ON]/[OFF]

• This function does not work when using the flash. Close the flash.
• It can only be used with Manual Exposure Mode.

• Rotate the control dial to display the Exposure Meter. Unsuitable areas of the range are
displayed in red.
• If the exposure is not adequate, the aperture value and the shutter speed turn red and blink
when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
• We recommend using a tripod when the shutter speed is slow.
• When you use a lens with an aperture ring, the aperture ring setting takes priority.

Not available in these cases:

• When the flash is activated, the fastest shutter speed that can be selected is 1/50th of a
second. (P203)
• When the electronic front curtain shutter is used, shutter speeds faster than 1/500th of a
second cannot be set.
• When the electronic shutter is used, shutter speeds slower than 1 second cannot be set.

91
3. Recording Modes

Confirm the Effects of Aperture and Shutter Speed (Preview Mode)

Applicable modes:

The effects of aperture and shutter speed can be checked by using the Preview Mode.
• Confirm the effects of aperture: You can check the depth of field (effective focus range)
before taking a picture by closing the leaf shutter to the aperture value you set.
• Confirm the effects of shutter speed: Movement can be confirmed by displaying the actual
picture that will be taken with that shutter speed.
When the shutter speed is set for high speed, display in the shutter speed preview will be
displayed like a time-release film. It is used in cases such as stopping the movement of running
water.

1 Set a function button to [Preview]. (P59)

• The following step is an example in which [Preview] is assigned to [Fn2].
2 Touch [ ].
3 Switch the confirmation screen by touching [Fn2].
• The screen switches each time [Fn2] is touched.
Aperture effect preview Shutter speed effect
screen preview screen
Normal recording screen
Aperture effect: ± Aperture effect: ±
Shutter speed effect: — Shutter speed effect: ±
Fn2 Fn2 Fn2

Fn3 Fn3 Fn3

Fn4 Fn4 Fn4

Fn5 Fn5 Fn5

SNAP SNAP SNAP

Fn6 6KWU6SHHG(IIHFW2Q Fn2 Fn6 6KWU6SHHG(IIHFW2II Fn2 Fn6

Depth of field properties

Aperture value Small Large
¢1 Focus length of the lens Tele Wide
Distance to the subject Near Distant
Depth of field (effective focus range) Shallow (Narrow)¢2 Deep (Wide)¢3
¢1 Recording conditions
¢2 Example: When you want to take a picture with a blurred background etc.
¢3 Example: When you want to take a picture with everything in focus including the background
etc.

• It is possible to record while in Preview Mode.

• Range for shutter speed effect check is 8 seconds to 1/16000th of a second.

92
3. Recording Modes

Easily set aperture/shutter speed for suitable exposure (One Push AE)
Applicable modes:

When the exposure setting is too bright or too dark, you can use one push AE to achieve a
suitable exposure setting.

How to tell if the exposure is not adequate

• If the aperture values and shutter speed blink red A when
the shutter button is pressed halfway.
• If the Manual Exposure Assistance is anything other than 3.5 16000
-3 0
200 98
when in Manual Exposure mode.
A
For more details on Manual Exposure Assistance, refer to
P90.

1 Set a function button to [One Push AE]. (P59)

• The following step is an example in which [One Push AE] is assigned to [Fn1].
2 (When exposure is not adequate)
Press [Fn1].

SS 15 30 60 125 250

F 4.0 5.6 8.0

-3 0
3.5 16000 200 98 3.5 60 0 200

• The exposure meter is displayed, and the aperture and shutter speed are changed to give
a suitable exposure.
• In the following cases, suitable exposure cannot be set.
– When the subject is extremely dark and it is not possible to achieve adequate exposure
by changing the aperture value or shutter speed
– When recording using the flash
– In Preview Mode (P92)
– When using a lens that includes an aperture ring

93
3. Recording Modes

Taking panorama pictures (Panorama Shot Mode)

Recording Mode:

Consecutive photos taken while the camera is moved are combined to form a panorama.

1 Set the mode dial to [ ].

• After the screen that asks you to check the recording direction is displayed, the
horizontal/vertical guidelines will be displayed.

Changing the recording direction

1 Select the menu.

MENU > [Rec] > [Panorama Direction]

2 Press 3/4 to select the recording direction, and then press [MENU/SET].
[ ] (left > right)/[ ] (right > left)/[ ] (bottom > top)/[ ] (top > bottom)

2 Press the shutter button halfway to focus.

3 Press the shutter button fully and move the camera in a small circle
in the direction of the arrow on the screen.

Recording from left to right

A
• Move the camera at a constant speed. A Recording direction and panning
Pictures may not be able to be recorded (Guide)
properly if the camera is moved too fast or slow.

94
3. Recording Modes

4 Press the shutter button once again to end the picture recording.
• Recording can also be ended by keeping the camera still while recording.
• Recording can also be ended by moving the camera to the end of the guide.
∫ Technique for Panorama Shot Mode
A Move the camera in the recording direction
without shaking it.
If the camera shakes too much, pictures
may not be able to be recorded, or the
recorded panorama picture may become
narrower (smaller).
B Move the camera towards the edge of the
range you wish to record.
(The edge of the range will not be
recorded in the last frame)

95
3. Recording Modes

∫ About playback
Pressing 3 will start scrolling playback automatically in the
same direction as the recording. 1/98
• The following operations can be performed during scrolling
playback.

3 Start panorama playback/Pause¢

4 Stop

¢ When the playback is paused, you can scroll forwards and backwards by dragging the
screen.
When the scroll bar is touched, the playback position jumps to the touched position.

• The optimal speed for moving the camera varies depending on the lens being used.
• When the focal length is long, such as when a telephoto lens is attached, move the camera
slowly.
• Pictures are taken with the electronic shutter in Panorama Shot Mode.
• The focus, White Balance, and exposure are fixed at the optimum values for the first picture. As
a result, if the focus or brightness changes substantially during recording, the entire panorama
picture may not be recorded at the suitable focus or brightness.
• When multiple pictures are combined to create a single panorama picture, the subject may
appear distorted or the connection points may be noticeable in some cases.
• The number of recording pixels in the horizontal and vertical directions of the panorama picture
varies depending on the recording direction and the number of combined pictures.
The maximum number of pixels is shown below.

Recording direction Horizontal Resolution Vertical Resolution

Horizontal 8176 pixels 1920 pixels
Vertical 2560 pixels 8176 pixels

Not available in these cases:

• A panorama picture may not be able to be created, or the pictures may not be combined
properly when recording the following subjects or under the recording conditions below.
– Subjects with a single, uniform colour or repetitive pattern (such as the sky or a beach)
– Moving subjects (person, pet, car, waves, flowers blowing in the breeze, etc.)
– Subjects where the colour or patterns change in a short time (such as an image appearing on
a display)
– Dark places
– Locations with flickering light sources such as fluorescent lights or candles
• This cannot be used when [Silent Mode] is set to [ON].

96
3. Recording Modes

Taking Pictures that match the Scene being

recorded (Scene Guide Mode)
Recording Mode:

If you select a scene to suit the subject and recording conditions with reference to the
example images, the camera will set optimal exposure, colour, and focus, allowing you to
record in a manner appropriate to the scene.

1 Set the mode dial to [ ].

2 Press 2/1 to select the scene.

• The scene can also be selected by dragging an example
image or the slide bar.

3 Press [MENU/SET] to set.

• It is also possible to display the selection screen by touching the

Recording Mode icon in recording screen.
4

97
3. Recording Modes

∫ Switching the scene selection screen display

Press [DISP.] to switch the monitor screen.
• When it is set to the guide display, tips for creating picture effects suitable for each scene, etc.
is displayed.
Normal display Guide display List display

Displaying/not displaying the selection screen when the mode dial is

switched to / .

MENU > [Custom] > [Menu Guide]

[ON]:
Displays the selection screen for the Scene Guide or the Creative Control Mode.
[OFF]:
Displays the recording screen of the currently selected mode of the Scene Guide or the
Creative Control Mode.

• To change the Scene Guide Mode, select the [ ] tab on the menu screen, select [Scene
Switch], and then press [MENU/SET]. You can return to step 2 on P97.
• The following items cannot be set in Scene Guide Mode because the camera automatically
adjusts them to the optimal setting.
– Items other than the picture quality adjustment in [Photo Style]
– [Sensitivity]
– [Metering Mode]
– [HDR]
– [Multi Exp.]
– [Digital Zoom]
• Although White Balance is fixed to [AWB] for certain types of scene, you can fine tune the
White Balance or use White Balance bracketing by pressing the cursor button 1 on the
recording screen.
For further details, please read P125, 126.

98
3. Recording Modes

For details on “Scene Guide Mode” settings, refer to P97.

[Silky Skin]

Brighter face and softer skin colour creates a healthy

younger look.

Tips
• If you are using a lens with the zoom function, you can enhance
the effect by zooming in as much as possible and closing the
distance between the camera and the subject.

• The smoothing effect is applied to the part that has a similar

tone to the complexion of a subject, as well.
• This mode may not be effective under insufficient lighting.

[Backlit Softness]

When backlighted, the overall screen brightness is

increased. Portraits are softened and infused with light.

99
3. Recording Modes

[Relaxing Tone]

The warm colour tone creates an image with a relaxing

mood.

[Bright Blue Sky]

On a sunny day, the overall screen brightness is increased to

create a vibrant image of the blue sky.

100
3. Recording Modes

[Romantic Sunset Glow]

The enhanced purple tone creates a romantic image of the

sky just after sunset.

[Vivid Sunset Glow]

Red is enhanced to create a vivid image of the sunset.

[Glistening Water]

The glisten of the water is enhanced to look brighter and

slightly bluish.

• Display of the recording screen will be delayed more than usual

and the screen will look as if frames are dropping.
• Star filter used in this mode may cause glistening effects on the
objects other than water surface.

[Clear Nightscape]

Colour saturation of the night light is increased to accentuate

the nightscape.

Tips
• We recommend using a tripod and the self-timer.

• The shutter may remain closed after taking the picture. This is
due to signal processing and is not a malfunction.
• Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark
places.

101
3. Recording Modes

[Cool Night Sky]

Blue tones are enhanced to create a cool and sophisticated

image of the night sky after sunset.

Tips
• We recommend using a tripod and the self-timer.

• The shutter may remain closed after taking the picture. This is
due to signal processing and is not a malfunction.
• Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark
places.

[Warm Glowing Nightscape]

The warm colour tone creates a warm image of the

nightscape.

Tips
• We recommend using a tripod and the self-timer.

• The shutter may remain closed after taking the picture. This is
due to signal processing and is not a malfunction.
• Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark
places.

[Artistic Nightscape]

A slow shutter speed captures light trails that can creates an

artistic nightscape.

Tips
• We recommend using a tripod and the self-timer.

• The shutter may remain closed after taking the picture. This is
due to signal processing and is not a malfunction.
• Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark
places.

102
3. Recording Modes

[Glittering Illuminations]

The star filter enhances pinpoints of light.

Tips
• We recommend using a tripod and the self-timer.

• Display of the recording screen will be delayed more than usual

and the screen will look as if frames are dropping.
• The shutter may remain closed after taking the picture. This is
due to signal processing and is not a malfunction.
• Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark
places.

[Handheld Night Shot]

Capture multiple images and combine the data to minimise

blur and noise for hand-held shooting with night scenery.

Tips
• Do not move the unit during the continuous shooting after
pressing the shutter button.

• The angle of view will be slightly narrower.

[Clear Night Portrait]

Fill flash and a longer exposure capture better portraits

against the nightscape.

Tips
• Open the flash. (You can set to [ ].)
• We recommend using a tripod and the self-timer.
• When [Clear Night Portrait] is selected, keep the subject still for
about 1 second after taking the picture.

• When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON], the flash is not activated.

• The shutter may remain closed after taking the picture. This is
due to signal processing and is not a malfunction.
• Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark
places.

103
3. Recording Modes

[Soft Image of a Flower]

The soft focus creates a diffused image.

Tips
• We recommend using a tripod and the self-timer.
• For close-up recording, we recommend that you close the flash
and avoid using it.

• Display of the recording screen will be delayed more than usual

and the screen will look as if frames are dropping.
• The focus range is different depending on lens used. Refer to
“About the focus distance reference mark” on P151 for the focus
range.
• When a subject is close to the camera, the effective focus range
is significantly narrowed. Therefore, if the distance between the
camera and the subject is changed after focusing on the
subject, it may become difficult to focus on it again.
• Close-up regions are prioritised when taking pictures, and so
time is required to focus if you take a picture of a distant subject.
• When you take pictures at close range, the resolution of the
periphery of the picture may decrease slightly. This is not a
malfunction.
• If the lens becomes dirty with fingerprints or dust, the lens may
not be able to focus on the subject correctly.

[Appetizing Food]

The overall screen brightness is increased to make the food

look appealing.

Tips
• If you are using a lens with the zoom function, you can enhance
the effect by zooming in as much as possible and closing the
distance between the camera and the subject.
• We recommend using a tripod and the self-timer.
• For close-up recording, we recommend that you close the flash
and avoid using it.

104
3. Recording Modes

[Cute Dessert]

The overall screen brightness is set higher to enhance the

cuteness of the dessert.

Tips
• If you are using a lens with the zoom function, you can enhance
the effect by zooming in as much as possible and closing the
distance between the camera and the subject.
• We recommend using a tripod and the self-timer.
• For close-up recording, we recommend that you close the flash
and avoid using it.

[Freeze Animal Motion]

The faster shutter speed prevents blur and captures a clear

image of the fast moving animal.

• The initial setting for the AF assist lamp is [OFF].

[Clear Sports Shot]

The faster shutter speed prevents blur, for example at

sporting events.

[Monochrome]

A monochrome image captures the mood of the moment.

105
3. Recording Modes

Taking pictures of scenery, children or portraits

with optimal settings
Recording Mode:

The camera optimises the exposure, colour tone, focus, and other settings for subjects.

• The following items cannot be set because the camera automatically adjusts them to the
optimal setting.
– Items other than the picture quality adjustment in [Photo Style]
– [Sensitivity]
– [Metering Mode]
– [HDR]
– [Multi Exp.]
– [Digital Zoom]

Scenery Mode
Saturation of sky and trees creates more distinct scenery.

Set the mode dial to [ ].

• Although White Balance is fixed to [AWB], you can fine tune the
White Balance or use White Balance bracketing.
For further details, please read P125, 126.

Child Mode
This mode lets you take clear pictures of moving children or
other similar subjects by minimising jitter with a faster shutter
speed.

Set the mode dial to [ ].

• Child Mode uses the following settings:
– Drive mode: Burst ([M])
– Touch shutter function: Enabled
– Focus mode： [AFF]

106
3. Recording Modes

Portrait Mode
The brightness of the face is adjusted and the background is
defocused to create a clear portrait.

Set the mode dial to [ ].

• If you are using a lens with the zoom function, you

can enhance the effect by zooming in as much as
possible and closing the distance between the
camera and the subject.

107
3. Recording Modes

Taking Pictures with different image effects

(Creative Control Mode)

Recording Mode:

This mode records with additional image effects.

You can set the effects to add by selecting example images and checking them on the
screen.

1 Set the mode dial to [ ].

2 Press 3/4 to select the image effects

A

(filters).
• The image effect of the selected example image will
be applied in a preview display A.
• You can also select the image effects (filters) by
touching the example images.

• It is also possible to display the

EXPS

selection screen by touching the

Recording Mode icon in recording
screen.

3 Press [MENU/SET] to set.

108
3. Recording Modes

∫ Switching the image effect (filter) selection screen display

Press [DISP.] to switch the monitor screen.
• When the image effect selection screen display is set to the guide display, description of the
selected image effect is displayed.
Normal display Guide display List display

• If you select the [ ] tab on the menu screen, you can select
the following menu items:
– [Filter Select]: Displays the image effect (filter) selection
screen.
– [Simultaneous record w/o filter]: Allows you to set the camera
to take a picture with and without an image effect
simultaneously. (P122)
• White Balance will be fixed to [AWB], and [Sensitivity] will be fixed to [AUTO].
• Depending on the [Menu Guide] setting in the [Custom] menu, either the selection screen or
the recording screen is displayed when the Mode Dial is switched. (P98)

Adjust the effect to fit your preferences

The strength and colours of the effects can be easily adjusted to fit your preferences.

1 Press 1 to display the setting screen.

2 Rotate the control dial to set.
• The items that can be set differ depending on which
Creative Control Mode is currently set.
For information on each image effect, refer to “Items that
can be set”.
• Press [MENU/SET] to return to the recording screen.
• When making the effect setting, [ ] is displayed on the
screen.
• If you do not change the settings, select the centre (standard).

109
3. Recording Modes

Taking a picture with a blurred background (Defocus Control)

You can easily set the blurriness of the background while checking the screen.

1 Press 3 to display the setting screen.

• Each press of 3 switches among brightness setting,
Defocus Control and end operation.
2 Rotate the control dial to set.
• Pressing [ ] on the blurriness setting screen will
cancel the setting.
4.0 125

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following case:
– [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)

Setting brightness
1 Press 3 to display the setting screen.
• Each press of 3 switches among brightness setting,
Defocus Control and end operation.
2 Rotate the control dial to set.
+1
-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
0 +5

∫ Change the settings by using the touch screen

1 Touch [ ].
2 Touch the item you want to set.
EXPS

[ ]: Adjusts an image effect

[ ]: Defocus level
[ ]: Brightness
3 Drag the slide bar to set.
• Press [MENU/SET] to return to the recording screen.

110
3. Recording Modes

For details on “Creative Control Mode” settings, refer to P108.

[Expressive]
This effect emphasises the colour to make a pop art picture.

Items that can be set

Freshness Understated colours Pop colours

[Retro]
This effect gives a faded image.

Items that can be set

Colour Yellow emphasised Red emphasised

[Old Days]
This effect adds a bright, soft and nostalgic feel to the overall
image.

Items that can be set

Contrast Low contrast High contrast

[High Key]
This effect adds a bright, airy and soft feel to the overall image.

Items that can be set

Aquamarine
Colour Pink emphasised
emphasised

111
3. Recording Modes

[Low Key]
This effect adds a dark and relaxing feel to the overall image and
enhances bright parts.

Items that can be set

Colour Red emphasised Blue emphasised

[Sepia]
This effect creates a sepia image.

Items that can be set

Contrast Low contrast High contrast

[Monochrome]
This effect creates a black and white picture.

Items that can be set

Yellow Blue
Colour
emphasised emphasised

[Dynamic Monochrome]
This effect gives a higher contrast to create an impressive black
and white picture.

Items that can be set

Contrast Low contrast High contrast

112
3. Recording Modes

[Rough Monochrome]
This effect creates a black and white picture with granular noise.

Items that can be set

Grittiness Less gritty Grittier

• Display of the recording screen will be delayed more than usual and
the screen will look as if frames are dropping.

[Silky Monochrome]
This effect blurs the overall image to add a soft feel to a black and
white picture.

Items that can be set

Extent of defocus Weak defocus Strong defocus

• Display of the recording screen will be delayed more than usual and
the screen will look as if frames are dropping.

[Impressive Art]
This effect gives your photo a dramatic contrast look.

Items that can be set

Freshness Black and white Pop colours

[High Dynamic]
This effect produces the optimum brightness for both dark and
bright parts.

Items that can be set

Freshness Black and white Pop colours

113
3. Recording Modes

[Cross Process]
This effect gives your photo a dramatic colour look.

Items that can be set

Colour Green tone/Blue tone/Yellow tone/Red tone
• Select the desired colour tone by
rotating the control dial, and then
press [MENU/SET].

[Toy Effect]
This effect reduces peripheral brightness to give the impression of
a toy camera.

Items that can be set

Orange
Colour Blue emphasised
emphasised

[Toy Pop]
This effect creates a vivid and bright image with the look of a toy
camera.

Items that can be set

Area with reduced
peripheral Small Large
brightness

[Bleach Bypass]
This effect gives a higher contrast and a lower saturation to create
a sober and tranquil picture.

Items that can be set

Contrast Low contrast High contrast

114
3. Recording Modes

[Miniature Effect]
This effect blurs peripheral areas to give the impression of a
diorama.

Items that can be set

Freshness Understated colours Pop colours

∫ Setting the type of defocus

With [Miniature Effect] you can make the subject stand out by intentionally creating
defocused and in-focus portions.
You can set the recording orientation (defocus orientation) and the position and size of the
in-focus portion.

1 Press [Fn1] to display the setting screen.

• Setting screen can also be displayed by touching in order of [ ] then [ ].
2 Press 3/4 or 2/1 to move the in-focus portion.
• You can also move the in-focus portion by touching the
screen on the recording screen.
• Touching [ ] allows you to set the recording orientation
(defocus orientation).
3 Rotate the control dial to change the size of in-focus
portion.
• It can be changed to 3 different sizes.
• The portion can also be enlarged/reduced by pinching out/pinching in (P48) the screen.
• Pressing [DISP.] will return the in-focus portion setting back to the default setting.
4 Press [MENU/SET] to set.

• Display of the recording screen will be delayed more than usual and the screen will look as if
frames are dropping.
• No sound is recorded in motion pictures.
• Approximately 1/8 of the time period is recorded.
(If you record for 8 minutes, the resulting motion picture recording will be approximately
1 minute long.)
The displayed available recording time is approximately 8 times. When switching to Recording
Mode, please check the available recording time.
• If you end motion picture recording after a short time, the camera may go on recording for a
certain period. Please continue to hold the camera until the recording finishes.
• When the Focus Mode is set to [MF], move the focused location to the in-focus portion.

115
3. Recording Modes

[Soft Focus]
This effect blurs the overall image to produce a soft feel.

Items that can be set

Extent of defocus Weak defocus Strong defocus

• Display of the recording screen will be delayed more than usual and
the screen will look as if frames are dropping.

[Fantasy]
This effect creates a fantastical image in a pale colour tone.

Items that can be set

Freshness Understated colours Pop colours

[Star Filter]
This effect transforms pin-points of light into a star effect.

Items that can be set

Length of shine Short Long

• Display of the recording screen will be delayed more than usual and
the screen will look as if frames are dropping.

116
3. Recording Modes

[One Point Color]

This effect leaves one selected colour to emphasise
impressiveness.

Items that can be set

Amount of colour Small amount of Large amount of
left colour colour

∫ Set the colour to leave in

Set the colour to leave in by selecting a location on the screen.

1 Press [Fn1] to display the setting screen.

• Setting screen can also be displayed by touching in order of [ ] then [ ].
2 Select the colour you want to leave by moving the
frame with 3/4/2/1.
• You can also select the colour you want to leave by
touching the screen.
• Pressing [DISP.] will return the frame back to the centre.
3 Press [MENU/SET] to set.

• Depending on the subject, the set colour may not be left in.

117
3. Recording Modes

[Sunshine]
This effect adds a cast of light to the scene.

Items that can be set

Colour Yellow tone/Red tone/Blue tone/White tone
• Select the colour tone by rotating the
control dial, and then press [MENU/
SET].

∫ Setting the light source

You can change the position and size of the light source.

1 Press [Fn1] to display the setting screen.

• Setting screen can also be displayed by touching in order of [ ] then [ ].
2 Press 3/4/2/1 to move the centre position of the light source.
• The position of the light source can also be moved by touching the screen.
• The centre of the light source can be moved to the edge of the screen.

Point for when placing the centre of the light

source
A more natural appearance can be created by
placing the centre of the light source outside the
image.

3 Rotate the control dial to adjust the size of the light

source.
• It can be changed to 4 different sizes.
• The display can also be enlarged/reduced by pinching out/pinching in.
• Pressing [DISP.] will return the light source setting back to the default setting.
4 Press [MENU/SET] to set.

• Display of the recording screen will be delayed more than usual and the screen will look as if
frames are dropping.

118
 4. Picture Quality and Colour Tone
Settings

Adjusting the Picture Quality by Adding an

Effect ([Photo Style])
Applicable modes:

You can select effects to match the type of image you wish to record.
It is possible to adjust the items such as colour or picture quality of the effect to your
desire.
MENU > [Rec] > [Photo Style]

[Standard] This is the standard setting.

¢
[Vivid] Brilliant effect with high saturation and contrast.
[Natural]¢ Soft effect with low contrast.
[Monochrome] Monochrome effect with no colour shades.

¢ An effect appropriate for sceneries with vivid blue skies and

[Scenery]
greens.
An effect appropriate for portraits with a healthy and beautiful
[Portrait]¢
skin tone.
[Custom]¢ Use the setting registered in advance.
¢ This is disabled when Intelligent Auto Plus Mode is selected.

• In Intelligent Auto Plus Mode, the setting will be reset to [Standard] when the camera is
switched to another Recording Mode or this unit is turned on and off.
• In Scene Guide Mode/Scenery Mode/Child Mode/Portrait Mode, a photo style which matches
each scene is fixed.
• Those menu items are shared by the [Rec] menu and the [Motion Picture] menu. When the
setting for either of the two is changed, the setting for the other is also changed.

119
4. Picture Quality and Colour Tone Settings

∫ Adjusting the picture quality

• Picture quality cannot be adjusted in the Intelligent Auto Plus Mode.
1 Press 2/1 to select the type of Photo Style.
2 Press 3/4 to select the items, and then press 2/1 6WDQGDUG
to adjust. -5 0 +5
±0
S ±0
±0
±0

DISP.࢝ࢫࢱ࣒Ⓩ㘓

Increases the difference between the brightness and

[r]
the darkness in the picture.
[Contrast]
Decreases the difference between the brightness
[s]
and the darkness in the picture.
[r] The picture is sharply defined.
S [Sharpness]
[s] The picture is softly focused.
The noise reduction effect is enhanced.
[r]
Picture resolution may deteriorate slightly.
[Noise Reduction]
The noise reduction effect is reduced. You can obtain
[s]
pictures with higher resolution.
[r] The colours in the picture become vivid.
[Saturation]¢1
[s] The colours in the picture become natural.
[r] Adds a bluish tone.
[Color Tone]¢1
[s] Adds a yellowish tone.
Enhances the contrast of an subject. (Effect: Weak)
[Yellow]
The blue sky can be recorded clearly.
Enhances the contrast of an subject. (Effect:
[Orange] Medium)
The blue sky can be recorded in darker blue.
[Filter Effect]¢2
Enhances the contrast of an subject. (Effect: Strong)
[Red]
The blue sky can be recorded in much darker blue.
The skin and lips of people appear in natural tones.
[Green]
Green leaves appear brighter and more enhanced.
[Off] —
¢1 [Color Tone] is displayed only when [Monochrome] is selected. In other cases,
[Saturation] will be displayed.
¢2 Displayed only when [Monochrome] is selected.
• If you adjust the picture quality, [_] is displayed beside the Photo Style icon on the screen.
3 Press [MENU/SET].

∫ Registering settings to [Custom]

Adjust the picture quality following step 2 of “Adjusting the picture quality”, and
then press [DISP.].
• Confirmation screen is displayed. It is executed when [Yes] is selected.
120
4. Picture Quality and Colour Tone Settings

Recording Images with Image Effects

([Filter Settings])

Applicable modes:

You can apply image effects (filters) that are available for Creative Control Mode to images
in other modes, such as Aperture-Priority AE Mode or Panorama Shot Mode.
MENU > [Rec] > [Filter Settings] > [Filter Select]
• You can apply image effects that are available for Creative No
Control Mode by performing the same operations as those for Effect

Creative Control Mode. For information on each image effect, its

adjustable settings, and other details, refer to P108.

[No Effect] [High Dynamic]

[Expressive] [Cross Process]
[Retro] [Toy Effect]
[Old Days] [Toy Pop]
[High Key] [Bleach Bypass]
[Low Key] [Miniature Effect]
[Sepia] [Soft Focus]
[Monochrome] [Fantasy]
[Dynamic Monochrome] [Star Filter]
[Rough Monochrome] [One Point Color]
[Silky Monochrome] [Sunshine]
[Impressive Art]

• If no image effect is to be added, select [No Effect].

Change the settings by using the touch screen

1 Touch [ ].
EXPS

2 Touch the item you want to set. EXPS

[ ]: Selects an image effect (filter)

[ ]: Adjusts an image effect

121
4. Picture Quality and Colour Tone Settings

• [Toy Effect]/[Toy Pop]/[Miniature Effect]/[Sunshine] are not available in Panorama Shot Mode.
• The image effects of [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter] are not
visible on the screen when taking panorama pictures.
• Using [High Key] in Panorama Shot Mode may not be effective in dimly-lit conditions.
• Using [Impressive Art] in Panorama Shot Mode may cause seams between pictures to become
noticeable.
• In Self Shot Mode, only the following filters will be applied:
– [Expressive]/[Retro]/[High Key]/[Toy Effect]/[Soft Focus]
• The available ISO sensitivity settings will be limited up to [ISO3200]. The ISO sensitivity for
[High Dynamic] will be fixed to [AUTO].
• When using [Filter Select], you cannot use menus or recording functions not available in
Creative Control Mode.
For example, White Balance will be fixed to [AWB] and the flash will be set to [Œ] (forced flash
off).
• The settings will be stored even if you change recording mode or turn off the camera.
• Those menu items are shared by the [Rec] menu and the [Motion Picture] menu. When the
setting for either of the two is changed, the setting for the other is also changed.

Taking a picture with and without an image effect simultaneously

([Simultaneous record w/o filter])
You can press the shutter button once and take two pictures simultaneously, one with an
image effect and the other one without it.
MENU > [Rec] > [Filter Settings] > [Simultaneous record w/o filter]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

• When this item is set to [ON], a picture with an image effect will be taken first, followed by a
picture without it.
• Only an image with an image effect is displayed for Auto Review.
• If the drive mode is set to [Burst] or [Auto Bracket], it is switched to [Single].

Not available in these cases:

• In the following case, [Simultaneous record w/o filter] does not work:
– Panorama Shot Mode
– When recording motion pictures
– Recording still pictures while recording a motion picture [only when set to [ ] (motion
picture priorities)]
– When [Filter Select] is set to [No Effect]
– When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation]

122
4. Picture Quality and Colour Tone Settings

Adjusting the White Balance

Applicable modes:

In sunlight, under incandescent lights or in other such conditions where the colour of white
takes on a reddish or bluish tinge, this item adjusts to the colour of white which is closest
to what is seen by the eye in accordance with the light source.

1 Press 1 ( ).

2 Select the White Balance by rotating the

control dial.

WB AWB

[AWB] Automatic adjustment

[V] When taking pictures outdoors under a clear sky
[Ð] When taking pictures outdoors under a cloudy sky
[î] When taking pictures outdoors in the shade
[Ñ] When taking pictures under incandescent lights
[ ]¢ When taking pictures with the flash only

Set the White Balance value. Use to match the

condition when taking photographs.
1 Press 3
2 Aim the camera at a sheet of white paper
etc. so that the frame in the centre is filled by
[ 1
]/[ 2
] the white object only and then press [MENU/SET].
• This will set the White Balance and return you to the recording
screen.
• The same operation can be performed by pressing the shutter button.
• White Balance may not be set when the subject is too bright or too
dark. Set the White Balance again after adjusting to appropriate
brightness.

123
4. Picture Quality and Colour Tone Settings

You can set the colour temperature manually for

taking natural pictures in different lighting 6500K

conditions.
The colour of light is measured as a number in
degrees Kelvin. As the colour temperature
[ ] increases, the picture becomes more bluish. As the colour
temperature decreases, the picture becomes more reddish.
1 Press 3
2 Press 3/4 to select the colour temperature and then press
[MENU/SET].
• You can set a colour temperature from [2500K] to [10000K].
¢ It will operate as [AWB] during motion picture recording.

3 Press [MENU/SET] to set.

Under fluorescent lighting, LED lighting fixture etc., the appropriate White Balance
will vary depending on the lighting type, so use [AWB] or [ 1 ], [ 2 ].

• The White Balance is only calculated for subjects within the range of the camera’s flash. (P200)
• In Scene Guide Mode/Child Mode/Portrait Mode, changing the scene or Recording Mode will
return White Balance settings (including the White Balance fine adjustment setting) back to
[AWB].
• The setting is fixed to [AWB] in the following cases.
– [Backlit Softness]/[Relaxing Tone]/[Bright Blue Sky]/[Romantic Sunset Glow]/[Vivid Sunset
Glow]/[Glistening Water]/[Clear Nightscape]/[Cool Night Sky]/[Warm Glowing Nightscape]/
[Artistic Nightscape]/[Glittering Illuminations]/[Handheld Night Shot]/[Clear Night Portrait]/
[Appetizing Food]/[Cute Dessert] (Scene Guide Mode)
– Scenery Mode

124
4. Picture Quality and Colour Tone Settings

∫ Auto White Balance

Depending on the conditions prevailing when pictures are taken, the pictures may take on
a reddish or bluish tinge. Furthermore, when a multiple number of light sources are being
used or there is nothing with a colour close to white, Auto White Balance may not function
properly. In a case like this, set the White Balance to a mode other than [AWB].
1 Auto White Balance will work within this range.
2 Blue sky
3 Cloudy sky (Rain)
4 Shade
5 Sunlight
6 White fluorescent light
7 Incandescent light bulb
8 Sunrise and sunset
9 Candlelight
KlKelvin Colour Temperature

Finely adjusting the White Balance

You can finely adjust the White Balance when you cannot acquire the desired hue by
setting the White Balance.

1 Select the White Balance and then press 4.

2 Press 3/4/2/1 to fine-adjust the White Balance. G

2 : A (AMBER: ORANGE)
1 : B (BLUE: BLUISH) A B

3 : G (GREEN: GREENISH)
4 : M (MAGENTA: REDDISH) M
• You can also make fine adjustments by touching the White
Balance graph.
• Pressing [DISP.] resets the position back to the centre.
3 Press [MENU/SET].

• If you finely adjust the White Balance to [A] (amber), the White Balance icon on the screen will
change to orange.
If you finely adjust the White Balance to [B] (blue), the White Balance icon on the screen will
change to blue.
• If you finely adjust the White Balance to [G] (green) or [M] (magenta), [_] (green) or [`]
(magenta) appears beside the White Balance icon on the screen.
• The White Balance fine adjustment setting is reflected in the picture when using the flash.
• The White Balance fine adjustment level returns to the standard setting (centre point) in the
following cases.
– When you reset the White Balance in [ 1 ] or [ 2 ]
– When you reset the colour temperature manually in [ ]

125
4. Picture Quality and Colour Tone Settings

White Balance Bracket

Bracket setting is performed based on the adjustment values for the White Balance fine
adjustment, and 3 pictures with different colours are automatically recorded when the
shutter button is pressed once.

1 Fine-adjust the White Balance in step 2 of “Finely G

adjusting the White Balance” and then perform the

bracket setting by rotating the control dial. A B
Rotating the control dial to the right:
Horizontal ([A] to [B]) M
Rotating the control dial to the left:
Vertical ([G] to [M])
• You can also set the bracket by touching [ ]/[ ].
2 Press [MENU/SET].

•[ ] is displayed in White Balance icon in the screen when the White Balance Bracket is set.
• The White Balance Bracket setting is released when this unit has been turned off (including
Sleep Mode).
• You will only hear the shutter sound once.

Not available in these cases:

• The White Balance Bracket does not work in the following cases:
– Panorama Shot Mode
– [Glistening Water]/[Glittering Illuminations]/[Handheld Night Shot]/[Soft Image of a Flower]
(Scene Guide Mode)
– When recording motion pictures
– When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]
– When [HDR] is set to [ON]
– When using [Multi Exp.]
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]

126
4. Picture Quality and Colour Tone Settings

Setting the Picture Quality and Size

Setting the aspect ratio of pictures

Applicable modes:

This allows you to select the aspect ratio of the pictures to suit printing or the playback
method.
MENU > [Rec] > [Aspect Ratio]

[4:3] [Aspect Ratio] of a 4:3 TV

[3:2] [Aspect Ratio] of a 35 mm film camera
[16:9] [Aspect Ratio] of a high-definition TV, etc.
[1:1] Square aspect ratio

• The ends of the recorded pictures may be cut at printing so check before printing. (P349)

Setting the number of pixels

Applicable modes:

Set the number of pixels.

The higher the numbers of pixels, the finer the detail of the pictures will appear even when
they are printed onto large sheets.
MENU > [Rec] > [Picture Size]

When the aspect ratio is [4:3]. When the aspect ratio is [3:2].
Settings Image size Settings Image size
[L] (16M) 4592k3448 [L] (14M) 4592k3064
[ M] (8M) 3232k2424 [ M] (7M) 3232k2160
[ S] (4M) 2272k1704 [ S] (3.5M) 2272k1520

When the aspect ratio is [16:9]. When the aspect ratio is [1:1].
Settings Image size Settings Image size
[L] (12M) 4592k2584 [L] (11.5M) 3424k3424
[ M] (8M) 3840k2160 [ M] (6M) 2416k2416
[ S] (2M) 1920k1080 [ S] (3M) 1712k1712

• When [Ex. Tele Conv.] (P193) is set, [ ] is displayed on the picture sizes of each aspect ratio
except for [L].
• The picture size will be fixed to [S] when [Burst Rate] is set to [SH].

127
4. Picture Quality and Colour Tone Settings

Setting the compression rate of pictures ([Quality])

Applicable modes:

Set the compression rate at which the pictures are to be stored.

MENU > [Rec] > [Quality]

Settings File format Description of settings

[A] A JPEG image in which image quality was given priority.
A standard image quality JPEG image.
JPEG
[›] This is useful for increasing the number of shots without
changing the number of pixels.
[ ] You can record a RAW image and a JPEG image ([A] or
RAWiJPEG
[ ] [›]) simultaneously.¢1
You can only record RAW images.¢2
[ ] RAW [ ] images are recorded with a smaller data volume than
[ ] or [ ].
¢1 If you delete a RAW file from the camera, the corresponding JPEG image will also be
deleted.
¢2 It is fixed to maximum recordable pixels ([L]) for each image aspect ratio.

About RAW
RAW format refers to the original format of data that is not image-processed on the
camera. Playback and Editing of RAW images require dedicated software.
Using the dedicated software, you can perform advanced editing, such as adjusting the
White Balance after taking a picture. The software also allows you to save pictures in
file formats that can display them on a PC (JPEG, TIFF, etc.). Pictures taken in RAW
format will have higher image quality than those taken in JPEG format, but the data size
will be larger.
• Use software (“SILKYPIX Developer Studio” by Ichikawa Soft Laboratory) to process and
edit RAW files on a PC. Download it from a website (P309) to install it on your PC.

Not available in these cases:

• The following effects are not reflected in RAW images:
– Intelligent Auto Plus Mode
– Scene Guide Mode
– Scenery Mode/Child Mode/Portrait Mode
– Creative Control Mode
– [Soft Skin]/[Defocusing]/[Slimming Mode] (In Self Shot Mode)
– White Balance
– [Photo Style]/[i.Dynamic]/[Red-Eye Removal]/[i.Resolution]/[Color Space] ([Rec] menu)
• In the following cases, [ ], [ ], and [ ] cannot be set.
– Panorama Shot Mode
– [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

128
4. Picture Quality and Colour Tone Settings

Using Image Correction Functions

Compensating the contrast and exposure ([i.Dynamic])

Applicable modes:

Contrast and exposure are compensated when the brightness difference between the
background and subject is great, etc.
MENU > [Rec] > [i.Dynamic]
Settings: [AUTO]/[HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[OFF]

• [AUTO] automatically sets the intensity of the effect according to the recording conditions.
• Those menu items are shared by the [Rec] menu and the [Motion Picture] menu. When the
setting for either of the two is changed, the setting for the other is also changed.

Not available in these cases:

• This feature may be automatically disabled, depending on the recording conditions.
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When [HDR] is set to [ON]

Raising the resolution ([i.Resolution])

Applicable modes:

Pictures with sharp profile and resolution can be taken by using the Intelligent Resolution
Technology.
MENU > [Rec] > [i.Resolution]
Settings: [HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[EXTENDED]/[OFF]

• [EXTENDED] allows you to take natural pictures with a higher resolution.

• When recording a motion picture, [EXTENDED] changes to [LOW].
• Those menu items are shared by the [Rec] menu and the [Motion Picture] menu. When the
setting for either of the two is changed, the setting for the other is also changed.

129
4. Picture Quality and Colour Tone Settings

Combining pictures with different exposures ([HDR])

Applicable modes:

You can combine 3 pictures with different levels of exposure into a single picture with rich
gradation.
You can minimise the loss of gradations in bright areas and dark areas when, for example,
the contrast between the background and the subject is large.
An image combined by HDR is recorded in JPEG.
MENU > [Rec] > [HDR]

[ON] Records HDR pictures.

[OFF] Does not record HDR pictures.
[Dynamic Range]
[AUTO]: Automatically adjusts the exposure range according to the differences
between the bright and dark areas.
[n1 EV]/[n2 EV]/[n3 EV]:
Adjusts the exposure within the selected exposure parameters.
[SET] [Auto Align]
[ON]: Automatically corrects camera shake (jitter) and other problems that
can cause the images to misalign.
Recommended for use during hand-held shooting.
[OFF]: Image misalignment not adjusted.
Recommended when a tripod is used.

∫ What is HDR?
HDR stands for High Dynamic Range and refers to a technique for expressing a wide
contrast range.

• Do not move the unit during the continuous shooting after pressing the shutter button.
• You cannot take the next picture until the combination of pictures is complete.
• A moving subject may be recorded with unnatural blurs.
• The angle of view becomes narrow slightly when [Auto Align] is set to [ON].
• Flash is fixed to [Œ] (forced flash off).

Not available in these cases:

• [HDR] does not work for the pictures taken during a motion picture recording.
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– In Self Shot Mode
– When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only when [Auto Shooting] is set)

130
4. Picture Quality and Colour Tone Settings

Reducing the long shutter noise ([Long Shtr NR])

Applicable modes:

The camera automatically removes noise that appears when the shutter speed becomes
slower to take pictures of night scenery etc. so you can take beautiful pictures.
MENU > [Rec] > [Long Shtr NR]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

• [Long shutter noise reduction ongoing] is displayed for the same time as the shutter speed for
signal processing.
• We recommend using a tripod when the shutter speed is slowed to take pictures.

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When recording motion pictures
– When [Burst Rate] is set to [SH]
– When using the electronic shutter

Correcting the brightness on the screen periphery ([Shading Comp.])

Applicable modes:

When the screen periphery darkens as a result of the lens characteristics, you can record
pictures with the brightness of the screen periphery corrected.
MENU > [Rec] > [Shading Comp.]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

• This feature may be automatically disabled, depending on the recording conditions.

• Noise in the periphery of the picture may stand out with higher ISO sensitivity.

Not available in these cases:

• Correction is not possible in the following cases:
– When recording motion pictures
– Recording still pictures while recording a motion picture [only when set to [ ] (motion
picture priorities)]
– When [Burst Rate] is set to [SH]
• Depending on the lens used, [Shading Comp.] may not operate.
Refer to the website for compatible lenses.

131
4. Picture Quality and Colour Tone Settings

Setting the colour space ([Color Space])

Applicable modes:

Set this when you want to correct the colour reproduction of the recorded pictures on a
PC, printer etc.
MENU > [Rec] > [Color Space]

Colour space is set to sRGB colour space.

[sRGB]
This is widely used in computer related equipment.
Colour space is set to AdobeRGB colour space.
[AdobeRGB] AdobeRGB is mainly used for business purposes such as professional
printing because it has a greater range of reproducible colours than sRGB.

• Set to [sRGB] if you are not very familiar with AdobeRGB.

• The setting is fixed to [sRGB] in the following case.
– When recording motion pictures

132
 5. Focus and Brightness (Exposure)
Settings

Taking Pictures with Auto Focus

By setting the optimum Focus Mode or Auto Focus Mode for the subject or recording
condition, you can let the camera automatically adjust focus in various scenes.

1 Set the [Focus Mode] to [AFS], [AFF] or [AFC].

• The Focus Mode will be set. (P135)

2 Press 2 ( ).

3 Press 2/1 to select AF Mode and then

press [MENU/SET].
• The Auto Focus Mode will be set. (P137)

4 Press the shutter button halfway.

A

• Auto Focus will be activated.

3.5 60
B

When the subject is When the subject is not

Focus
focused focused
Focus indication A On Blinks
AF area B Green —
Sound Beeps 2 times —
• The focus indication is displayed as [ LOW ] in a dark environment, and focusing may take
longer than usual.

133
5. Focus and Brightness (Exposure) Settings

• If you zoom in/out after focusing on a subject, the focus may lose its accuracy. In that case,
re-adjust the focus.
• When the Focus Mode is set to [AFF] or [AFC].
– A beep will be emitted when focus is first achieved during the pressing halfway.
– When AF Mode is set to [ ], the first AF area at which focus is achieved may be displayed
momentarily while pressing halfway.

Subjects and recording conditions which are difficult to focus

• Fast-moving subjects, extremely bright subjects or subjects without contrast.
• When recording subjects through windows or near shiny objects.
• When it is dark or when jitter occurs.
• When the camera is too close to the subject or when taking a picture of both distant and near
subjects.

134
5. Focus and Brightness (Exposure) Settings

Selecting the Focus Mode (AFS/AFF/AFC)

Applicable modes:

The method for achieving focus when the shutter button is pressed halfway is set.
MENU > [Rec] > [Focus Mode]

The movement of the

Item subject and the scene Description of settings
(recommended)
“AFS” is an abbreviation of
“Auto Focus Single”.
[AFS] Subject is still
Focus is set automatically
(Auto Focus (Scenery, anniversary
when the shutter button is
Single) photograph, etc.)
pressed halfway. Focus will be
fixed while it is pressed halfway.
“AFF” is an abbreviation of
“Auto Focus Flexible”.
In this mode, focusing is
[AFF] Movement cannot be performed automatically when
(Auto Focus predicted the shutter button is pressed
Flexible) (Children, pets, etc.) halfway.
If the subject moves while the shutter button is
pressed halfway, the focus is corrected to match
the movement automatically.
“AFC” is an abbreviation of
“Auto Focus Continuous”.
In this mode, while the shutter
[AFC] button is pressed halfway,
Subject is moving
(Auto Focus focusing is constantly
(Sport, trains, etc.)
Continuous) performed to match the movement of the subject.
When the subject is moving, the focusing is
performed by predicting the subject position at the
time of recording. (Movement prediction)
[MF] Set the focus manually. (P148)

135
5. Focus and Brightness (Exposure) Settings

When recording using [AFF], [AFC]

• It may take time to focus on the subject when you operate the zoom from Wide to Tele or
suddenly change the subject from a distant one to a nearby one.
• Press the shutter button halfway again when it is difficult to focus on the subject.
• While the shutter button is pressed halfway, shake may be seen on the screen.

• When the brightness is insufficient for [AFF] or [AFC], the camera will operate as if [AFS] has
been set. In this case, the display will change to the yellow [AFS].
• Those menu items are shared by the [Rec] menu and the [Motion Picture] menu. When the
setting for either of the two is changed, the setting for the other is also changed.
Not available in these cases:
• In Panorama Shot Mode, [AFF] and [AFC] cannot be set.
• Depending on the lens used, [AFF] and [AFC] may not operate.
Refer to the website for compatible lenses.

136
5. Focus and Brightness (Exposure) Settings

Selecting the Auto Focus Mode

Applicable modes:

This allows the focusing method that suits the positions and number of the subjects to be
selected.

1 Press 2 ( ).

2 Press 2/1 to select AF Mode and then press

[MENU/SET].

The camera automatically detects the person’s face

and eyes.
An eye closer to the camera will be in focus, while
the exposure will be optimised for the face.
([Face/Eye (When [Metering Mode] is set to [ ])
Detection]) • Up to 15 faces can be detected. Eyes that can be
detected are only those of the face that is in focus.
• You can change the eye to be in focus. (P139)
• Position and size of the AF area can be changed. (P142)
The camera focuses on the subject you specify.
The exposure will be optimised for the subject.
(When [Metering Mode] is set to [ ].)
([Tracking])
Focus and exposure will keep on following the
subject even if it moves. (Dynamic tracking) (P140)
Up to 23 AF areas can be focused.
[ ] This is effective when a subject is not in the centre
([23-Area]) of the screen.
• You can select areas to be in focus. (P142)

137
5. Focus and Brightness (Exposure) Settings

The camera focuses on the subject in the AF area

on the centre of the screen.
([1-Area]) • Position and size of the AF area can be changed.
(P142)

You can achieve a more precise focus on a point

that is smaller than [Ø].
If you press the shutter button halfway, the screen
([Pinpoint]) that lets you check the focus will be enlarged.
• The focus position can be set on an enlarged
screen. (P143)

Pressing the shutter button halfway to adjust the composition

When the subject is not in the centre of the composition in [Ø], you can bring the
subject into the AF area, fix the focus and exposure by pressing the shutter button
halfway, move the camera to the composition you want with the shutter button pressed
halfway, and then take the picture.
(Only when the focus mode is set to [AFS].)

∫ Restrictions on Auto Focus Mode

• The AF Mode is fixed to [š] in the following cases.
– In Self Shot Mode
(If [š] is not available with the current Recording Mode, an available focus setting for each
Recording Mode will be used.)
• The AF Mode is fixed to [Ø] in the following cases.
– When using the Digital Zoom
– [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)
([Face/Eye Detection])
• It cannot be set to [š] in the following cases.
– [Clear Nightscape]/[Cool Night Sky]/[Warm Glowing Nightscape]/[Artistic Nightscape]/
[Glittering Illuminations]/[Handheld Night Shot]/[Appetizing Food]/[Cute Dessert] (Scene
Guide Mode)
• Under certain picture-taking conditions including the following cases, the Face/Eye Detection
Function may fail to work, making it impossible to detect faces. The AF Mode operates as [ ].
– When the face is not facing the camera
– When the face is at an angle
– When the face is extremely bright or dark
– When the facial features are hidden behind sunglasses, etc.
– When the face appears small on the screen
– When there is little contrast on the faces
– When there is rapid movement
– When the subject is other than a human being
– When the camera is shaking

138
5. Focus and Brightness (Exposure) Settings

([Tracking])
•[ ] cannot be used with [Time Lapse Shot].
• In the following cases, [ ] operates as [Ø].
– [Glistening Water]/[Glittering Illuminations]/[Soft Image of a Flower]/[Monochrome] (Scene
Guide Mode)
– [Sepia]/[Monochrome]/[Dynamic Monochrome]/[Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/
[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)
– [Monochrome] ([Photo Style])
• Dynamic Tracking function may not work in the following cases:
– When the subject is too small
– When the recording location is too dark or bright
– When the subject is moving too fast
– When the background has the same or similar colour to the subject
– When jitter is occurring
– When zoom is operated
([Pinpoint])
• In the following case, [ ] operates as [Ø].
– When recording motion pictures
• It cannot be set to [ ] in the following cases.
– [AFF]/[AFC] (focus mode)

About [š] ([Face/Eye Detection])

When the camera detects a face, the AF area and the mark
indicating the eye to be in focus are displayed.
A The eye to be in focus
Yellow:
When the shutter button is pressed halfway, the frame turns
green when the camera is focused.
White: A
Displayed when more than one face is detected. Other faces
that are the same distance away as faces within the yellow AF areas are also focused.

∫ Changing the eye to be in focus

Touch the eye to be in focus.

• Touch the eye in the yellow frame. If you touch any other
location, the AF area setting screen will be displayed. (P142)
• If you touch [ ] or press [MENU/SET], the eye focus setting
will be cancelled.
• If the yellow frame moves to another face or the frame
disappears after you change the composition or do something similar, the eye focus setting will
be cancelled.

139
5. Focus and Brightness (Exposure) Settings

Locking the subject to be tracked ( [Tracking])

Button operation
Aim the AF tracking frame over the subject, and press
the shutter button halfway.
A AF tracking frame
• AF area will turn green when the camera detects the subject.
• The AF area turns yellow when the shutter button is released.
• Lock is cancelled when [MENU/SET] is pressed.
A

Touch operation
Touch the subject.
• Perform the operation after cancelling the touch shutter function.
• The AF area turns yellow while the subject is locked.
• Lock is cancelled when [ ] is touched.

• If it fails to lock, AF area will flash in red, and disappear. Try to lock again.
• When AF tracking fails, [Ø] is set.

140
5. Focus and Brightness (Exposure) Settings

Setting up position of the AF area/changing size of the AF area

Applicable modes:

When [š], [ ], [Ø], or [ ] in Auto Focus Mode is selected, you can change the
position and size of the AF area.
• Perform the operation after cancelling the touch shutter function.
• When setting with touch operation, set [Touch AF] in [Touch Settings] of the [Custom] menu to
[AF].

• The spot metering target can also be moved to match the AF area when the [Metering Mode]
(P160) is set to [ ].
At the edge of the screen, the metering may be affected by the brightness around the AF area.

Not available in these cases:

• When using digital zoom, the position and size of the AF area cannot be changed.

141
5. Focus and Brightness (Exposure) Settings

When selecting [š], [Ø]

Position and size of the AF area can be changed.
1 Press 2 ( ).
2 Select [š] or [Ø] and press 4.
• AF area setting screen is displayed.
• You can also display the AF area setting screen by
touching the screen.

3 Change the position and size of the AF area.

Button Touch
Description of operation
operation operation
3/4/2/1 Touching Moves the AF area.
s Pinching out/in Enlarges/reduces the AF area in small steps.
s Enlarges/reduces the AF area in large steps.
Resets the AF area back to the centre.
[DISP.] [Reset] • If you press the button again, the frame size will
be reset to the default setting.
• If you set the AF area over an eye in the yellow frame when [š] is selected, the eye to be
in focus will be changed. (P139)
4 Press [MENU/SET] to set.
• AF area with the same function as [Ø] is displayed in the touched position, when the [š]
is selected.
Setting of the AF area is cleared when [MENU/SET] is pressed or [ ] is touched.

When selecting [ ]
The 23 AF areas can be divided into 9 areas and the area to be focused can be set.
1 Press 2 ( ).
2 Select [ ] and press 4.
• AF area setting screen is displayed.
3 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the AF area frame as
shown in the figure on the right.
• AF area frame can also be selected by touching the
screen.
4 Press [MENU/SET] to set.
• Only [i] display (centre point of selected AF area frame) will remain on the screen.
• Setting of the AF area frame is cleared when [MENU/SET] is pressed or [ ] is touched.

142
5. Focus and Brightness (Exposure) Settings

When selecting [ ]
You can set the focus position precisely by enlarging the screen.
• The focus position cannot be set at the edge of the screen.
1 Press 2 ( ).
2 Select [ ] and press 4.
3 Press 3/4/2/1 to set the focus position and then
press [MENU/SET].
• The assist screen for setting the focus position is displayed
in an enlarged size.
• The assist screen can also be displayed by touching the
subject.
4 Move [+] to the position to be in focus.
Button Touch
Description of operation
operation operation
3/4/2/1 Touching Moves [+].
s Pinching out/in Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.

s Enlarges/reduces the screen in large steps.

Switches the enlarged display (windowed/full screen)

[DISP.] [Reset] Resets [+] back to the centre.

• When the picture is displayed in windowed mode, you can enlarge/reduce the picture by
approximately 3 to 6k; when the picture is displayed in full screen, you can enlarge/
reduce the picture by approximately 3 to 10k.
• On the assist screen, it is also possible to record a picture by touching [ ].

Setting the duration for which the screen is enlarged

MENU > [Custom] > [Pinpoint AF Time] >
[LONG] (Approx. 1.5 seconds)/[MID] (Approx. 1.0 second)/[SHORT]
(Approx. 0.5 second)

Changing the display of the assist screen

MENU > [Custom] > [Pinpoint AF Display]

[FULL]: Enlarges a picture in full screen.

[PIP]: Enlarges a picture in a window on the screen.

• The display of the assist screen can also be switched by touching [ ].

143
5. Focus and Brightness (Exposure) Settings

Optimising the focus and brightness for a touched position

Applicable modes:

By setting [Touch AF] (P49) in [Touch Settings] of the [Custom] menu to [AF+AE], you can
optimise the focus and brightness for the position you have touched.

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Custom] > [Touch Settings] > [Touch AF]

2 Press 3/4 to select [AF+AE], and press [MENU/SET].

3 Touch the subject you want to optimise the

brightness for.
• AF area setting screen is displayed. (P142)
• The brightness optimisation position is displayed on the
centre of the AF area. The position follows the movement ュリヴヱハ 5HVHW 6HW
of the AF area.
• [Metering Mode] is set to [ AE ], which is used exclusively for the Touch AE.
• Touching [Reset] returns the brightness optimisation position and the AF area to the
centre.

4 Touch [Set].
• The AF area with the same function as [Ø] is displayed on the touched position.
• Touching [ ] returns [Metering Mode] to the original setting and cancels the
brightness optimisation position. The AF area setting is also cancelled.
• Touching [ ] returns [Metering Mode] to the original setting and cancels the
brightness optimisation position.

When the background has become too bright, etc., the

brightness contrast with the background can be
adjusted by compensating the exposure.

144
5. Focus and Brightness (Exposure) Settings

• When recording with the Touch Shutter, the focus and brightness are optimised for the touched
position before recording takes place.
• At the edge of the screen, the metering may be affected by the brightness around the touched
location.
Not available in these cases:
• [AF+AE], which optimises the focus and brightness, does not work in the following cases.
– In Manual Focus
– When using the Digital Zoom
– When the AF area has been set by using the cursor button

Setting the desired focus method

Using the [Custom] menu, you can set the focus method in detail.

Releasing/not releasing the shutter by pressing the shutter button halfway

MENU > [Custom] > [Half Press Release] > [ON]/[OFF]

Focusing/Not focusing in advance

MENU > [Custom] > [Quick AF] > [ON]/[OFF]
As long as the camera is held steady, the camera will automatically adjust the focus and
focus adjustment will then be quicker when the shutter is pressed. This is useful when you
do not want to miss a picture-taking opportunity.
• The battery will be consumed faster than usual.
• Press the shutter button halfway again when it is difficult to focus on the subject.
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– In Preview Mode
– In low light situations
– With lenses that only offer Manual Focus
– With some Four Third lenses that do not support contrast AF

145
5. Focus and Brightness (Exposure) Settings

Turning on/not turning on the AF Assist Lamp

MENU > [Custom] > [AF Assist Lamp] > [ON]/[OFF]

AF assist lamp will illuminate the subject when the shutter button is pressed halfway,
making it easier for the camera to focus when recording in low light conditions.
(Larger AF area is displayed depending on the recording conditions.)
• The effective range of the AF Assist Lamp is different depending on the lens used.
– When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) is attached and at Wide:
Approx. 1.0 m (3.3 feet) to 3.0 m (9.8 feet)
– When the interchangeable lens (H-FS35100) is attached and at Wide:
Approx. 1.0 m (3.3 feet) to 3.0 m (9.8 feet)
– When the interchangeable lens (H-PS14042) is attached:
Approx. 1.0 m (3.3 feet) to 3.0 m (9.8 feet)
• The AF Assist Lamp is valid only for the subject in the centre of the screen. Use it by
positioning the subject in the centre of the screen.
• Remove the lens hood.
• When you do not want to use the AF Assist Lamp (e.g. when taking pictures of animals in dark
places), set the [AF Assist Lamp] to [OFF]. In this case, it will become more difficult to focus on
the subject.
• The AF Assist Lamp gets slightly blocked when the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032/
H-FS35100/H-PS14042) is used, but it does not affect the performance.
• The AF Assist Lamp may be greatly blocked, and it may become harder to focus when a lens
with large diameter is used.
• The setting is fixed to [OFF] in the following cases.
– [Bright Blue Sky]/[Romantic Sunset Glow]/[Vivid Sunset Glow]/[Glistening Water]/[Clear
Nightscape]/[Cool Night Sky]/[Warm Glowing Nightscape]/[Artistic Nightscape]/[Handheld
Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)
– Scenery Mode
– When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON]

146
5. Focus and Brightness (Exposure) Settings

Recording/not recording even when focus is not achieved

MENU > [Custom] > [Focus/Release Priority]

[FOCUS]:
You cannot take a picture until the subject is brought into focus.
[RELEASE]:
This gives priority to the best time to take a picture so you can take a picture when the
shutter button is pressed fully.
• When set to [RELEASE], please be aware that focus may not be achieved even with focus
mode set to [AFS], [AFF] or [AFC].

Adjusting/not adjusting the focus manually after achieving Auto Focus

MENU > [Custom] > [AF+MF] > [ON]/[OFF]

When AF Lock is ON (press the shutter button halfway with the focus mode set to [AFS] or
set AF Lock using [AF/AE LOCK]), you can make fine adjustments to the focus manually.

147
5. Focus and Brightness (Exposure) Settings

Taking Pictures with Manual Focus

Applicable modes:

Use this function when you want to fix the focus or when the distance between the lens
and the subject is determined and you do not want to activate Auto Focus.

The operations used to focus manually differ depending on the lens.

When using an interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) with no focus ring
Press 1: Focuses on close-up subjects +
Press 2: Focuses on distant subjects
A Slide bar
• These operations are possible only on the
focus adjustment screen.
AF
• Pressing and holding 2/1 will increase the
A
focus speed.
• Focus can also be adjusted by dragging the
slide bar.
When using an interchangeable lens When using the interchangeable lens
(H-FS35100) with a focus ring (H-PS14042) having a focus lever
Rotate to A side: A
Move to C side:
Focuses on nearby Focuses on nearby
subject subject C
Rotate to B side: Move to D side:
B
Focuses on Focuses on D
faraway subject faraway subject
• The focusing speed varies depending on how
far you move the focus lever.

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Rec] > [Focus Mode]> [MF]

2 Press 2 ( ).

3 Press 3/4/2/1 to adjust the focus position,

and press [MENU/SET].
• The assist screen is displayed, enlarging the area. (MF
Assist)

148
5. Focus and Brightness (Exposure) Settings

• You can also enlarge the area by rotating the focus ring, moving the focus lever, or
pinching out (P48) the screen or touching the screen twice.
• You can also adjust the focus position by dragging (P48) the screen.
• Pressing [DISP.] resets the focus position back to the centre.

4 Adjust the focus.

B
+
A Indicator for ¶ (infinity)
B MF Assist (enlarged screen)
C Peaking
D MF Guide
• The in-focus portions will be highlighted. (Peaking) AF
• You can check whether the point of focus is to the near
side or to the far side. (MF Guide) A C D
You can perform the following operations:
Button operation Touch operation Description of operation
3/4/2/1¢ Dragging Moves the enlarged area

s Pinching out/in Enlarges/reduces the screen in small steps.

s Enlarges/reduces the screen in large steps.

Switches the enlarged display (windowed/full

screen)

Resets the area to be enlarged back to the

[DISP.]¢ [Reset]¢
centre.
¢ When using an interchangeable lens with no focus ring, you can perform these
operations after pressing 4 to display the screen that lets you set the area to be
enlarged.
• When the picture is displayed in windowed mode, you can enlarge/reduce the picture by
approximately 3 to 6k; when the picture is displayed in full screen, you can enlarge/
reduce the picture by approximately 3 to 10k.

Changing the display of the MF Assist

MENU > [Custom] > [Pinpoint AF Display]

[FULL]: Enlarges the display in full screen.

[PIP]: Enlarges the display in a window on the screen.

• The display of the assist screen can also be switched by touching [ ] on the focus
adjustment screen.

149
5. Focus and Brightness (Exposure) Settings

5 Press the shutter button halfway.

• The assist screen will close. The recording screen will be displayed.
• You can also close the assist screen by pressing [MENU/SET].
• If you have enlarged the picture by rotating the focus ring or moving the focus lever, the
assist screen will close approximately 10 seconds after the operation.

• MF Assist or MF guide may not display depending on the lens used, but you can display MF
Assist by direct operation of the camera, using the touch screen or a button.
• The MF Assist is disabled when using the Digital Zoom or recording motion pictures.

Technique for Manual Focus

1 Press the cursor button or rotate the focus
ring to focus.
2 Press the cursor button a few more times
or rotate the focus ring further in the same
direction.
3 Operate the cursor button or the focus
ring slightly in the opposite direction to
fine tune the focus.
• If you zoom in/out after focusing on a subject, the focus may lose its accuracy. In that case,
re-adjust the focus.
• After cancelling Sleep Mode, focus on the subject again.
• If you are taking close-up pictures:
– We recommend using a tripod and the self-timer (P170).
– The effective focus range (depth of field) is significantly narrowed. Therefore, if the distance
between the camera and the subject is changed after focusing on the subject, it may become
difficult to focus on it again.
– The resolution of the periphery of the picture may decrease slightly. This is not a malfunction.

150
5. Focus and Brightness (Exposure) Settings

∫ About the focus distance reference mark

The focus distance reference mark is a mark used to measure the focus distance.
Use this when taking pictures with Manual Focus or taking close-up pictures.
Focus range

A Focus distance reference mark

B Focus distance reference line
C 0.2 m (0.66 feet) (focal length 12 mm to 20 mm)
[When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) is used]
D 0.3 m (0.98 feet) (focal length 21 mm to 32 mm)
[When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) is used]
E 0.9 m (3.0 feet)
[When the interchangeable lens (H-FS35100) is used]
F 0.2 m (0.66 feet) (focal length 14 mm to 20 mm)
[When the interchangeable lens (H-PS14042) is used]
G 0.3 m (0.98 feet) (focal length 21 mm to 42 mm)
[When the interchangeable lens (H-PS14042) is used]

Achieving focus quickly using Auto Focus

MENU > [Custom] > [AF/AE Lock] > [AF-ON]

In Manual Focus, if the function button to which [AF/AE LOCK] is set is pressed (P59),
Auto Focus will work.
• [AF/AE LOCK] can only be assigned to [Fn1].
• Auto Focus works at the centre of the frame.
• If Auto Focus is used while the MF Assist screen is displayed,
the centre of the MF Assist screen will be focused.
• Auto Focus also works with the following operations.
AF
– Pressing the function button to which [AF-ON] is assinged
– Touching [ AF ]
– Dragging the monitor and releasing your finger at the position you want to focus on

151
5. Focus and Brightness (Exposure) Settings

Setting the display method of the MF Assist (enlarged screen)

MENU > [Custom] > [MF Assist]
• Available settings vary depending on the lens used.
When an interchangeable lens with no focus ring (H-FS12032) is used
Focus can be adjusted when you press 2( ) and the screen that lets you set the
[ON]
area to be enlarged is displayed.
Focus can be adjusted when you press 2( ). The screen that lets you set the area
[OFF]
to be enlarged is not displayed.

When an interchangeable lens having a focus ring (H-FS35100/H-PS14042) is used

The screen is enlarged by operating the focus ring or the focus lever of the lens or by
[ ]
pressing 2( ).
[ ] The screen is enlarged by operating the focus ring or the focus lever of the lens.
[ ] The screen is enlarged by pressing 2( ).
The screen cannot be enlarged by operating the focus ring or the focus lever of the
[OFF]
lens or by pressing 2( ).

Setting the initial magnification level of MF Assist

MENU > [Custom] > [Lens w/o Focus Ring] > [MF Magnification Level]
An initial MF Assist magnification level between 3 and 10 times can be set.
• When [MF Assist Display] is set to [PIP], the display can be enlarged only up to 6 times
regardless of this setting.
• The magnification level from the last MF Assist session is saved as the initial magnification
level.
• These items can be set only when an interchangeable lens with no focus ring (H-FS12032) is
used.

Changing the control dial operation in Manual Focus

MENU > [Custom] > [Lens w/o Focus Ring] > [Control Dial (MF)]

[MAGLEVEL]: Rotating the control dial allows you to adjust the magnification level of
MF Assist

[FOCUS]: Rotating the control dial allows you to adjust the focus.

• These items can be set only when an interchangeable lens with no focus ring (H-FS12032) is
used.

152
5. Focus and Brightness (Exposure) Settings

Displaying/not displaying the MF Guide

MENU > [Custom] > [MF Guide] > [ON]/[OFF]

A Indicator for ¶ (infinity)

When [MF Guide] on the [Custom] menu is set to [ON] and
you focus manually, the MF guide is displayed on the screen.
A
You can check whether the point of focus is to the near side
or the far side.

Highlighting/not highlighting in-focus portions

MENU > [Custom]>[Peaking]

[ON] In-focus portions are highlighted with colour.

[OFF] In-focus portions are not highlighted.
The detection level for in-focus portions is set.
When [HIGH] is set, portions to be highlighted are
[Detect Level] reduced, allowing you to achieve a more precise focus.
[HIGH]/[LOW]
• The detection level setting does not affect the focus range.
Sets the highlighting colour used for [Peaking].
• When [Detect Level] is set to [HIGH]: [ ] (Light blue)/[ ]
[SET] (Yellow)/[ ] (Green)
• When [Detect Level] is set to [LOW]: [ ] (Blue)/[ ]
[Display (Orange)/[ ] (White)
Color] • Changing the [Detect Level] setting also changes the
[Display Color] setting as follows.
–[ ] (Light blue) [ ] (Blue)
–[ ] (Yellow) [ ] (Orange)
–[ ] (Green) [ ] (White)
• When [Peaking] is set, [ ] ([Detect Level]: [HIGH]) or [ ] ([Detect Level]: [LOW]) will
be displayed.
• Each time [ ] in [ ] is touched, the setting is switched in order of [ON] ([Detect Level]:
[LOW]) > [ON] ([Detect Level]: [HIGH]) > [OFF].
• Each time the set function button is pressed when [Peaking] is set to [Fn Button Set] (P59) in
the [Custom] menu, the peaking setting switches in order of [ON] ([Detect Level]: [LOW]) >
[ON] ([Detect Level]: [HIGH]) > [OFF].
• This function works in Manual Focus or when focus is being adjusted manually with [AF+MF].
• Since portions with clear outlines on the screen are highlighted as in-focus portions, portions to
be highlighted vary depending on the recording conditions.
• The colour used for highlighting does not affect recorded images.
• [Peaking] does not work with [Rough Monochrome] in Creative Control Mode.

153
5. Focus and Brightness (Exposure) Settings

Fixing the Focus and the Exposure (AF/AE Lock)

Applicable modes:

This is useful when you want to take a picture of a subject outside the AF area or the
contrast is too strong and you cannot achieve appropriate exposure.

1 Set a function button to [AF/AE LOCK]. (P59)

• [AF/AE LOCK] can only be assigned to [Fn1].

2 Align the screen with the subject.

3 Press [Fn1] to fix the focus or exposure.

• AF/AE Lock is cancelled by pressing [Fn1] again.
• Only the exposure is locked in the default setting.

4 Move the camera as you compose the picture

AEL
and then press shutter button fully. 3.5 60 0 200

A AE Lock indication A
• When [AE LOCK] is set, after pressing the shutter button halfway to focus, press the
shutter button fully.

Setting the functions of [AF/AE LOCK]

MENU > [Custom] > [AF/AE Lock]

Only the exposure is locked.

[AE LOCK] • When the exposure is set, [AEL], the aperture value, and the shutter speed
are displayed.
Only the focus is locked.
[AF LOCK] • When the subject is focused, [AFL], the focus indication, the aperture value,
and the shutter speed are displayed.
Both focus and exposure are locked.
[AF/AE LOCK] • [AFL], [AEL], the focus indication, aperture value and shutter speed are
displayed when the focus and the exposure are optimised.
[AF-ON] Auto Focus is performed.

154
5. Focus and Brightness (Exposure) Settings

• AF Lock only is effective when taking pictures in Manual Exposure Mode.

• AE Lock only is effective when taking pictures with Manual Focus.
• Lock operations are disabled during motion picture recording. If you start recording a motion
picture without cancelling the lock, only AF LOCK will be applied to the motion picture.
• The subject can be focused again by pressing the shutter button halfway even when AE is
locked.
• Programme Shift can be set even when AE is locked.

155
5. Focus and Brightness (Exposure) Settings

Compensating the Exposure

Applicable modes:

Use this function when you cannot achieve appropriate exposure due to the difference in
brightness between the subject and the background.

1 Press 3 (È) to switch to Exposure

Compensation operation.
• Exposure Compensation value turns yellow, indicating
that the exposure can now be compensated.

2 Rotate the control dial to compensate the SS

F
250 125 60
4.0
30
5.6
15
8.0
exposure. 0 5
200 98
A Exposure Compensation value A B
B Exposure meter

Underexposed Properly exposed Overexposed

Compensate the exposure Compensate the exposure

towards positive. towards negative.
• The Exposure Compensation value can be set within a range of j5 EV to i5 EV.
When recording motion pictures, the Exposure Compensation value can be set within a
range of j3 EV to i3 EV.
• Select [0] to return to the original exposure.
• Rotate the control dial to display the [Expo.Meter]. (P85)

• When [Auto Exposure Comp.] in [Flash] in the [Rec] menu is set to [ON], the brightness of the
flash will automatically be set to the level appropriate to the selected Exposure Compensation.
(P204)
• When the exposure value is out of the j3 EV to i3 EV range, the brightness of the recording
screen will no longer change.
It is recommended to record by checking the actual brightness of the recorded image in the
Auto Review or playback screen.
• The set Exposure Compensation value is stored even if the camera is turned off. (When
[Exposure Comp. Reset] (P67) is set to [OFF])

156
5. Focus and Brightness (Exposure) Settings

Setting the Light Sensitivity

Applicable modes:

This allows the sensitivity to light (ISO sensitivity) to be set.

Setting to a higher figure enables pictures to be taken even in dark places without the
resulting pictures coming out dark.

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Rec] > [Sensitivity]

2 Select the ISO sensitivity by rotating the

control dial.

3 Press [MENU/SET] to set.

AUTO

• Exit the menu after it is set. ISO

ISO

AUTO 200 40

The ISO sensitivity is automatically adjusted according to the

AUTO brightness.
• Maximum [ISO3200] (With the flash on [ISO1600])¢1
The camera detects movement of the subject and then
automatically sets the optimum ISO sensitivity and shutter
speed to suit the movement of the subject and brightness of
the scene to minimise the jitter of the subject.
• Maximum [ISO3200] (With the flash on [ISO1600])¢1
(Intelligent)
• The shutter speed is not fixed when the shutter button is
pressed halfway. It is continuously changing to match the
movement of the subject until the shutter button is pressed
fully.
The ISO sensitivity is fixed to various settings.
100¢2/200/400/800/1600/3200/ • When the [ISO Increments] in [Rec] menu (P159) is set to
6400/12800/25600 [1/3 EV], items of ISO sensitivity that can be set will
increase.
¢1 When the [ISO Limit Set] (P158) of [Rec] menu is set to anything except [OFF], it is set
automatically within the value set in [ISO Limit Set].
¢2 Only available when [Extended ISO] is set.

157
5. Focus and Brightness (Exposure) Settings

Characteristics of the ISO sensitivity

200 25600
Recording location
When it is light (outdoors) When it is dark
(recommended)
Shutter speed Slow Fast
Noise Less Increased
Jitter of the subject Increased Less

• For the focus range of flash when [AUTO] is set, refer to P200.
•[ ] is not available in Shutter-Priority AE Mode and Manual Exposure Mode.
• When [Multi Exp.] is set, the maximum setting is [ISO3200].

Setting the upper limit on ISO sensitivity

Applicable modes:

It will select optimal ISO sensitivity with set value as limit depending on the brightness of
the subject.
• It will work when the [Sensitivity] is set to [AUTO] or [ ].
MENU > [Rec] > [ISO Limit Set]
Settings: [400]/[800]/[1600]/[3200]/[6400]/[12800]/[25600]/[OFF]

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:
– [Clear Nightscape]/[Cool Night Sky]/[Warm Glowing Nightscape]/[Handheld Night Shot]
(Scene Guide Mode)
– When recording motion pictures

158
5. Focus and Brightness (Exposure) Settings

Setting the step increment of ISO sensitivity

Applicable modes:

You can adjust the ISO sensitivity settings for every 1/3 EV.
MENU > [Rec] > [ISO Increments]

[L.100]¢/[L.125]¢/[L.160]¢/[200]/[250]/[320]/[400]/[500]/[640]/[800]/[1000]/[1250]/
[1/3 EV] [1600]/[2000]/[2500]/[3200]/[4000]/[5000]/[6400]/[8000]/[10000]/[12800]/[16000]/
[20000]/[25600]
[1 EV] [L.100]¢/[200]/[400]/[800]/[1600]/[3200]/[6400]/[12800]/[25600]
¢ Only available when [Extended ISO] is set.

• When the setting is changed from [1/3 EV] to [1 EV], [Sensitivity] will be set to value closest to
the value set during the [1/3 EV].

Extending ISO sensitivity

Applicable modes:

ISO sensitivity can be set up to minimum [ISO100].

MENU > [Rec] > [Extended ISO]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

159
5. Focus and Brightness (Exposure) Settings

Selecting the Method for Measuring Brightness

([Metering Mode])

Applicable modes:

Type of optical measurement to measure brightness can be changed.

MENU > [Rec] > [Metering Mode]

This is the method in which the camera measures the most suitable
[ ] exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the whole screen
(Multiple) automatically.
Usually, we recommend using this method.
[ ] This is the method used to focus on the subject on the centre of the
(Centre weighted) screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
This is the method to measure the subject in the spot
[ ] metering target A.
(Spot)

• Those menu items are shared by the [Rec] menu and the [Motion Picture] menu. When the
setting for either of the two is changed, the setting for the other is also changed.

160
 6. Shutter and Drive Settings

Setting the Shutter Type

Applicable modes:

You can take pictures using either of the two shutter methods: the Electronic Front Curtain
method or the electronic shutter method.

Electronic Front Curtain Electronic Shutter

The camera starts an exposure

The camera starts and ends an
Description electronically, and ends it with the
exposure electronically.
mechanical shutter.

Flash ± —

Shutter Speed
T (Time)¢1/60 to 1/500th 1¢2 to 1/16000th
(Sec.)

Mechanical shutter sound¢3+

Shutter sound Electronic shutter sound¢4
Electronic shutter sound¢4
¢1 This setting is available only in Manual Exposure Mode. (P90)
¢2 Up to an ISO sensitivity of [ISO3200]. When the setting is higher than [ISO3200], the shutter
speed will be faster than 1 second.
¢3 The mechanical shutter sound cannot be muted.
¢4 Electronic shutter sound settings can be changed in [Shutter Vol.] and [Shutter Tone]. (P63)

Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Rec] > [Shutter Type]

Depending on the recording condition and the shutter speed, the

shutter type is switched automatically.
[AUTO] • The Electronic Front Curtain method takes priority. This method
places less limitations on the functions that can be used, for
example when pictures are taken with the flash.

[EFC] Takes pictures using only the Electronic Front Curtain method.

[ESHTR] Takes pictures using only the electronic shutter method.

161
6. Shutter and Drive Settings

• When [ ] is displayed on the screen, pictures will be taken with the electronic shutter.
• When [Burst Rate] is set to [SH], pictures will be taken with the electronic shutter.
• When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON], pictures will be taken with the electronic shutter.
• When a lens not based on the Micro Four Thirds System standard/Four Thirds System
standard is used, [AUTO] takes pictures with the electronic shutter except when, for example,
the flash is used for taking pictures. Also, [EFC] switches to [AUTO].
Certain lenses based on the Micro Four Thirds System standard/Four Thirds System standard
may also cause the setting to switch to [AUTO].
Refer to the website for compatible lenses.
• When a moving subject is recorded with the electronic shutter, the subject may appear
distorted on the picture.
• When the electronic shutter is used under fluorescent or LED lighting, etc., horizontal
stripes may appear on the picture. In such cases, lowering the shutter speed may
reduce the effect of the horizontal stripes. (P88)
• Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, the likeness rights, etc. of the subject
when you use this function. Use at your own risk.

162
6. Shutter and Drive Settings

Select a Drive Mode

Applicable modes:

You can change what the camera will do when you press the shutter button.

1 Press 4 ( ).

2 Press 2/1 to select the drive mode, and then

1 2 3 4
H 31/3
press [MENU/SET].
A Drive mode

When the shutter button is pressed, only one picture is

1 [Single]
recorded.
Recordings are made in succession while the shutter
2 [Burst] (P164)
button is pressed.
Each time the shutter button is pressed, recordings
3 [Auto Bracket] (P167) are made with different exposure settings according to
the Exposure Compensation range.
When the shutter button is pressed, recording takes
4 [Self Timer] (P170)
place after the set time has elapsed.

• To cancel the drive mode, select [ ]. The setting will switch to [Single].
• Settings for each drive mode can be changed by pressing 3.

163
6. Shutter and Drive Settings

Taking Pictures using Burst Mode

Applicable modes:

Pictures are taken continuously while the shutter button is pressed.

• Pictures taken with a burst speed of [SH] will be recorded as a single burst group (P223).

1 Press 4 ( ).

2 Press 2/1 to select the burst icon ([ ],

H 31/3
etc.), and then press 3.

3 Select the burst speed with 2/1, and then

SH H LV
M LV
L
press [MENU/SET].

[SH] [M]
[H] [L]
(Super high (Middle
(High speed) (Low speed)
speed) speed)
Burst Electronic 5.8 (AFS)
— 4 2
speed Front Curtain 5 (AFC)
(pictures/ Electronic
40 10 4 2
second) Shutter
Live View during Burst
None None Available Available
Mode
¢2, 3
With RAW files — 7
¢1 Without RAW
Max. 39 Depends on the capacity of the card¢3
files
¢1 Number of burst shots
¢2 Depending on the recording conditions, the number of frames in a burst may be
reduced.
(For example, when you set [i.Resolution] of the [Rec] menu, the number of frames in
a burst may be reduced)
¢3 Pictures can be taken until the capacity of the card becomes full. However the burst
speed will become slower halfway. The exact timing of this depends on the aspect
ratio, the picture size, the setting for the quality and the type of card used.

164
6. Shutter and Drive Settings

• The burst speed may become slower depending on the following settings.
– [Picture Size] (P127)/[Quality] (P128)/[Sensitivity] (P157)/Focus Mode (P135)/[Focus/
Release Priority] (P147)
• Burst speed can also be set with [Burst Rate] in the [Rec] menu.
• Refer to P128 for information about RAW files.

4 Focus on the subject and take a picture. 50 i

4:3
L AFS H

• Hold down the shutter button fully to activate the Burst

Mode.

∫ Cancelling the Burst Mode

Select [ ] ([Single]) or [ ] from among the drive modes. (P163)

Focusing in Burst Mode

The focus changes depending on the setting for [Focus/Release Priority] (P147) in the
[Custom] menu and the setting for [Focus Mode] (P135) in the [Rec] menu.

[Focus/Release
Focus mode Focus
Priority]
[FOCUS]
[AFS] At the first picture
[RELEASE]
[FOCUS] Normal focusing¢2
[AFF]/[AFC]¢1
[RELEASE] Predicted focusing¢3
[MF] — Focus set with Manual Focus
¢1 When the subject is dark or the burst speed is set to [SH], the focus is fixed on the first
picture.
¢2 The burst speed may become slower because the camera is continuously focusing on the
subject.
¢3 Burst speed takes priority, and focus is estimated within possible range.

165
6. Shutter and Drive Settings

• When a high ambient temperature, continuous recording or other conditions cause the camera
to overheat, the following restrictions will occur to protect the camera. Wait until the camera
cools down.
– Continuous recording, motion picture recording, and the Wi-Fi connection will be temporarily
disabled.
– If you continue recording even when [ ] is flashing on the screen, a message will be
displayed and the camera will turn off automatically.
• When the burst speed is set to [SH] or [H] (when focus mode is [AFS] or [MF]), the exposure
and White Balance are fixed at the settings used for the first picture for the subsequent pictures
as well.
When the burst speed is set to [H] (when focus mode is [AFF] or [AFC]), [M] or [L], they are
adjusted each time you take a picture.
• Since the shutter speed becomes slower in dark places, the burst speed (pictures/second) may
become slower.
• Depending on the operating conditions, it may take time to take the next picture if you repeat
the recording of pictures.
• It may take time to save pictures taken in Burst Mode on the card. If you take pictures
continuously while saving, the maximum number of recordable pictures decreases. For
continuous shooting, use of a high speed memory card is recommended.

Not available in these cases:

• The Burst Mode is disabled in the following cases.
– [Glistening Water]/[Glittering Illuminations]/[Handheld Night Shot]/[Soft Image of a Flower]
(Scene Guide Mode)
– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Miniature Effect]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/
[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)
– In Self Shot Mode
– When White Balance Bracket is set
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording using the flash
– When recording with the shutter speed set to [T] (Time)
– When recording with [iHandheld Night Shot]
– When [HDR] is set to [ON]
– When using [Multi Exp.]
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only when [Auto Shooting] is set)
– When [Simultaneous record w/o filter] of [Filter Settings] is set to [ON]
• In the following cases, [SH] in Burst Mode cannot be used.
– When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation]

166
6. Shutter and Drive Settings

Taking Pictures using Auto Bracket

Applicable modes:

Maximum of 7 pictures will be recorded with different exposure settings following the
Exposure Compensation range every time the shutter button is pressed.

With Auto Bracket

[Step]: [3•1/3], [Sequence]: [0/s/r]
1st picture 2nd picture 3rd picture

d0 EV j1/3 EV i1/3 EV

1 Press 4 ( ).

2 Press to 2/1 to select the Auto Bracket icon

H 31/3
([ 3 1/3 ], etc.), and then press 3.

3 Press 2/1 to select the compensation range, -3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3

and then press [MENU/SET]. 2 1

31/3 32/3 3 1 51/3 52/3 5 1

3

71/3 72/3 7 1

4 Focus on the subject and take a picture. 50 i

4:3
L AFS

• If you press and hold the shutter button, the number of

pictures that you set is taken.
• The Auto Bracket indication blinks until the number of
pictures that you set is taken.
• The picture count is reset to [0] if you change the Auto Bracket setting or turn the
camera off before all the pictures that you set are taken.

167
6. Shutter and Drive Settings

∫ Cancelling the Auto Bracket

Select [ ] ([Single]) or [ ] from among the drive modes. (P163)

∫ Changing the settings for [Single/Burst Settings], [Step] and [Sequence] in Auto
Bracket
1 Select the menu. (P53)
MENU > [Rec] > [Auto Bracket]
2 Press 3/4 to select [Single/Burst Settings], [Step] or [Sequence] and then
press [MENU/SET].
3 Press 3/4 to select the setting and then press [MENU/SET].
[ ] (single)
[Single/Burst Settings]
[ ] (burst)
[3•1/3] (3 pictures)
[3•2/3] (3 pictures)
[3•1] (3 pictures)
[5•1/3] (5 pictures)
[Step] [5•2/3] (5 pictures)
[5•1] (5 pictures)
[7•1/3] (7 pictures)
[7•2/3] (7 pictures)
[7•1] (7 pictures)
[0/`/_]
[Sequence]
[`/0/_]
• You can take one picture at a time when set to [ ].
• You can continuously take pictures up to set numbers when set to [ ].
• Exit the menu after it is set.

168
6. Shutter and Drive Settings

• When taking pictures using Auto Bracket after setting the Exposure Compensation value, the
pictures taken are based on the selected Exposure Compensation value.

Not available in these cases:

• Auto Bracket is disabled in the following cases.
– [Glistening Water]/[Glittering Illuminations]/[Handheld Night Shot]/[Soft Image of a Flower]
(Scene Guide Mode)
– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Miniature Effect]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/
[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)
– In Self Shot Mode
– When White Balance Bracket is set
– When recording motion pictures
– When recording using the flash
– When recording with the shutter speed set to [T] (Time)
– When recording with [iHandheld Night Shot]
– When [HDR] is set to [ON]
– When using [Multi Exp.]
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only when [Auto Shooting] is set)
– When [Simultaneous record w/o filter] of [Filter Settings] is set to [ON]

169
6. Shutter and Drive Settings

Taking Pictures with the Self-timer

Applicable modes:

1 Press 4 ( ).

2 Press 2/1 to select the self-timer icon

H 31/3
([ 10 ], etc.), and then press 3.

3 Press 2/1 to select the time setting for the 10 10 2

self-timer, and then press [MENU/SET].

Picture is taken 10 seconds after shutter is pressed.

After 10 seconds the camera takes 3 pictures at about 2 seconds intervals.
Picture is taken 2 seconds after shutter is pressed.
• When using a tripod, etc., this setting is a convenient way to avoid the jitter
caused by pressing the shutter button.
• Time setting for the self timer can also be set by [Self Timer] in the [Rec] menu.

170
6. Shutter and Drive Settings

4 Press the shutter button halfway to focus and

then press it fully to take the picture.
• Focus and exposure will be set when the shutter button
is pressed halfway.

• After the self-timer indicator flashes, recording starts.

∫ Cancelling the self-timer

Select [ ] ([Single]) or [ ] from among the drive modes. (P163)
• It is also possible to cancel by turning off this unit.
(When [Self Timer Auto Off] (P67) is set to [ON])

We recommend using a tripod when recording with the self-timer.

• The flash output may vary slightly when the [ ] is selected.

Not available in these cases:
• It cannot be set to [ ] in the following cases.
– When White Balance Bracket is set
– When recording with the shutter speed set to [T] (Time)
– When using [Multi Exp.]
• Self-timer is disabled in the following cases.
– In Self Shot Mode
(When taking pictures in Self Shot Mode, you can set the Self-timer in [Countdown]. (P81))
– When recording motion pictures
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation] (only when [Auto Shooting] is set)

171
 7. Functions Customised for Various
Subjects and Purposes

Taking Pictures Automatically at Set Intervals

([Time Lapse Shot])

Applicable modes:

If you set the start time of recording, the recording interval and the number of pictures, the
camera can automatically take pictures of subjects such as animals or plants as time
elapses and create a motion picture.
• Set the date and time settings in advance. (P33)
• Pictures taken with Time Lapse Shot are displayed as a set of group pictures. (P223)

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Rec] > [Time Lapse Shot]
2 Press 3/4 to select the item and then press [MENU/
SET].

[Now] Starts the recording by fully-pressing the shutter button.

You can set the time to start recording.
Any time up to 23 hours 59 minutes ahead can be set.
[Start Time] [Start Time
Select the item (hour or minute) by pressing 2/1, set
Set]
the start time by pressing 3/4, and then press
[MENU/SET].
The recording interval and the number of pictures can be set.
2/1: Select the item (minute/second/number of pictures)
[Shooting
3/4: Setting
Interval]/
[MENU/SET]: Set
[Image
• A recording interval ranging from 1 second to 99 minutes and 59 seconds
Count]
can be set at 1 second interval.
• The number of pictures ranging from 1 to 9999 can be set.

172
7. Functions Customised for Various Subjects and Purposes

• Set the recording interval D so that it will be longer than the exposure time (shutter speed)
E. (The figure below)
Recording may be skipped when the recording interval D is shorter than the exposure
time (shutter speed) E, for example during night-time recording.
A:First
B:Second
C:Third

3 Press 3/4 to select [Start] and then press [MENU/SET].

4 Press the shutter button fully.
• The recording starts automatically.
• During recording standby, the power will turn off automatically if no operation is performed
for a certain period. The Time Lapse Shot is continued even with the power turned off.
When the recording start time arrives, the power turns on automatically.
To turn on the power manually, press the shutter button halfway.
• If [Fn1] is pressed or [ ] is touched while this unit is turned on, a selection screen
asking you to pause or end will be displayed. Operate in accordance with the screen.
Also, if [Fn1] is pressed or [ ] is touched during the pause, a selection screen asking
you to resume or end will be displayed. Pressing the shutter button fully will also enable
you to resume from the pause.
• Confirmation screen for creating a motion picture is displayed next, so select [Yes].
5 Select the methods for creating a motion picture.
• The recording format is set to [MP4].
Sets the quality of a motion picture.
[Rec Quality] [FHD/50p]/[FHD/25p]/[HD/25p]/[VGA/25p]

Sets the number of frames per second.

The larger the number is, the smoother the motion picture will be.
[Frame Rate] [50fps]¢/[25fps]/[12.5fps]/[8.3fps]/[6.25fps]/[5fps]/[2.5fps]/[1fps]
¢ Only when set to [FHD/50p]

[NORMAL]:
Splices pictures together in recording order.
[Sequence]
[REVERSE]:
Splices pictures together in reverse recording order.
6 Select [OK] with 3/4, and then press [MENU/SET].
• Confirmation screen is displayed. It is executed when [Yes]
is selected.
• Motion pictures can also be created from [Time Lapse
Video] in the [Playback] menu. (P240)

173
7. Functions Customised for Various Subjects and Purposes

• This function is not for use in a security camera.

• If you leave the unit somewhere to perform [Time Lapse Shot], please be careful of theft.
• Recording for long periods in cold places such as ski resorts or places at high altitude,
or in warm, wet environments may cause a malfunction, so please be careful.
• Recording may not be consistent with the set recording interval or the set number of pictures
depending on recording conditions.
• We recommend that you use a sufficiently charged battery or an AC adaptor (optional) and a
DC coupler (optional).
• [Time Lapse Shot] is paused in the following cases.
– When the charge on the battery runs out
– Turning the camera off
During [Time Lapse Shot], you can replace the battery and the card, and then restart by turning
on this unit. (Note that pictures taken after the restart will be saved as a separate set of group
pictures) Turn off this unit when replacing the battery or the card.
• Do not connect the AV cable (optional), the HDMI micro cable, or the USB connection cable
(supplied) during Time Lapse Shooting.
• When a picture quality different from the aspect ratio of the original pictures is selected, black
strips will be displayed on the top and bottom or the left and right of the motion picture.
• If while recording motion pictures using the AC adaptor (optional) the power supply is cut off
due to a power cut or if the AC adaptor (optional) is disconnected etc., the motion picture will
not be recorded.
• A motion picture that exceeds the recording time of 29 minutes and 59 seconds and a motion
picture that exceeds the file size of 4 GB cannot be created.
• A motion picture shorter than 1 second is displayed as “0s” on the motion picture recording time
(P219).
• When only one picture is taken, it will not be saved as a group picture.

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:
– In Self Shot Mode
– [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)
– When using [Multi Exp.]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation]

174
7. Functions Customised for Various Subjects and Purposes

Creating Stop Motion Pictures ([Stop Motion

Animation])

Applicable modes:

A stop motion picture is created by splicing pictures together.

• Set the date and time settings in advance. (P33)
• Pictures taken with [Stop Motion Animation] are displayed as a set of group pictures. (P223)

Before creating a motion picture with [Stop Motion Animation]

With [Stop Motion Animation], you can make a motion picture in which objects appear to
be moving by making a recording each time you move a doll, etc., in small increments,
and then splicing the recordings together.

• With this unit, pictures of 1 to 50 frames have to be taken per second of a motion picture.
• For smoother motion, record movement in as small increments as possible, and set the frame
rate per second (frame rate) to a large value.

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Rec] > [Stop Motion Animation]

175
7. Functions Customised for Various Subjects and Purposes

2 Press 3/4 to select the recording method, and then

press [MENU/SET].

[ON] Takes pictures automatically at a set recording interval.

[Auto When the shutter button is pressed fully, recording starts.
Shooting]
[OFF] This is for taking pictures manually, frame by frame.
(Only when [Auto Shooting] is set to [ON])
Sets the interval for automatic recording. A value between 1 and
[Shooting
60 seconds can be set in 1 second intervals.
Interval]
Press 2/1 to select the recording interval (seconds), press 3/4
to set it, and press [MENU/SET].
3 Press 3/4 to select [Start] and then press [MENU/SET].
4 Press 3/4 to select [New] and then press [MENU/SET].
5 Press the shutter button fully.
• Up to 9999 frames can be recorded.
6 Move the subject to decide on the composition.
• Repeat recording in the same way.
• If this unit is turned off while recording, a message for
resuming the recording is displayed when the camera is
turned on. Selecting [Yes] allows you to continue the
recording from the interruption point.

Recording materials skilfully

• The recording screen displays up to two pictures taken previously. Use them as
reference for the amount of movement.
• Pressing [(] allows you to check recorded pictures.
Unnecessary pictures can be deleted by pressing [ ].
Pressing [(] again will return you to the recording screen.

7 Touch [ ] to end the recording.

• It can also be ended by selecting [Stop Motion Animation] 30
from the [Rec] menu and then pressing [MENU/SET].
• When [Auto Shooting] is set to [ON], select [End] on the
confirmation screen.
(If [Pause] has been selected, press the shutter button
fully to resume the recording.)
• Confirmation screen is displayed. It is ended when [Yes] is selected.
• Confirmation screen for creating a motion picture is displayed next, so select [Yes].

176
7. Functions Customised for Various Subjects and Purposes

8 Select the methods for creating a motion picture.

• The recording format is set to [MP4].

Sets the quality of a motion picture.

[Rec Quality] [FHD/50p]/[FHD/25p]/[HD/25p]/[VGA/25p]

Sets the number of frames per second.

The larger the number is, the smoother the motion picture will be.
[Frame Rate] [50fps]¢/[25fps]/[12.5fps]/[8.3fps]/[6.25fps]/[5fps]/[2.5fps]/[1fps]
¢ Only when set to [FHD/50p]

[NORMAL]:
Splices pictures together in recording order.
[Sequence]
[REVERSE]:
Splices pictures together in reverse recording order.

9 Press 3/4 to select [OK] and then press [MENU/

SET].
• Confirmation screen is displayed. It is executed when [Yes]
is selected.
• Motion pictures can also be created from [Stop Motion
Video] in the [Playback] menu. (P240)

∫ Adding pictures to the Stop Motion Animation group

Selecting [Additional] in step 4 will display group pictures recorded with [Stop Motion
Animation].
Select a set of group pictures, press [MENU/SET], and then select [Yes] on the
confirmation screen.

177
7. Functions Customised for Various Subjects and Purposes

• Automatic recording may not take place at set intervals because recording takes time under
certain recording conditions, such as when the flash is used for recording.
• When a picture quality different from the aspect ratio of the original pictures is selected, black
strips will be displayed on the top and bottom or the left and right of the motion picture.
• We recommend that you use a sufficiently charged battery or an AC adaptor (optional) and a
DC coupler (optional).
• If power supply is lost by unplugging the AC adaptor or due to a blackout while creating a
motion picture with the AC adaptor, the motion picture you are creating will not be recorded.
• A motion picture that exceeds the recording time of 29 minutes and 59 seconds and a motion
picture that exceeds the file size of 4 GB cannot be created.
• A motion picture shorter than 1 second is displayed as “0s” on the motion picture recording time
(P219).
• If only one picture was taken, the picture is not saved as a group picture.
A picture cannot be selected from [Additional] when it is the only one that was taken.

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:
– In Self Shot Mode
– When using [Multi Exp.]
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
• [Auto Shooting] in [Stop Motion Animation] is not available for the following functions:
– [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)

178
7. Functions Customised for Various Subjects and Purposes

Making Multiple Exposures on One Picture

([Multi Exp.])

Applicable modes:

Gives an effect like multi exposure. (up to 4 times equivalent per a single image)

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Rec] > [Multi Exp.]
2 Press 3/4 to select [Start] and then press [MENU/
SET].

3 Decide on the composition, and take the first picture.

• After taking the picture, press the shutter button halfway
down to take the next picture.
• Press 3/4 to select the item and then press [MENU/SET] 1H[W
for one of the following operations. 5HWDNH
– [Next]: Advance to the next picture. ([LW
– [Retake]: Return to the first picture.
– [Exit]: Record the image of the first picture, and
finish the multiple exposure picture-taking
session.
4 Shooting the second, third, and fourth exposures.
• If [Fn1] is pressed while taking pictures, the photographed
images are recorded, and the multiple exposure
picture-taking session will be completed.
5 Press 4 to select [Exit] and then press [MENU/SET]. 5HWDNH
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to finish.
([LW

179
7. Functions Customised for Various Subjects and Purposes

∫ About Automatic Gain Control setting

Select [Auto Gain] on the screen shown in step 2 and set it.
• [ON]: The brightness level is adjusted according to the number of pictures taken and the
pictures are superimposed over each other.
• [OFF]: Compensate the exposure to match the subject so that all the superimposed exposure
effects will be just right.

∫ Superimposing pictures on a picture already taken

On the screen shown in step 2, set [Overlay] to [ON].
After [Start], images in the card will be displayed. Select the RAW images, press [MENU/
SET], and continue recording.
• [Overlay] is available only for RAW images taken with this unit.

• Image is not recorded until completion.

• The recording information displayed for pictures taken with multiple exposures is the recording
information for the last picture taken.
• Items shown in grey on the menu screen cannot be set during multiple exposures.

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:
– In Self Shot Mode
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation]

180
7. Functions Customised for Various Subjects and Purposes

Disabling Operational Sounds and the Output

of Light at once ([Silent Mode])
Applicable modes:

This function is useful for recording images in a quiet environment, public facility, etc. or
recording images of subjects such as babies or animals.

Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Custom] > [Silent Mode]

Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
• Audio from the speaker will be muted and the flash and the AF Assist lamp will be disabled.
The following settings are fixed.
– [Shutter Type]: [ESHTR]
– [Flash Mode]: [Œ] (forced flash off)
– [AF Assist Lamp]: [OFF]
– [Beep Volume]: [s] (OFF)
– [Shutter Vol.]: [ ] (OFF)

• Even when [ON] is set, the following functions light up/flash.

– Status indicator
– Intelligent Auto lamp
– Self-timer indicator
– Wi-Fi connection lamp
• Sounds that are produced by the camera regardless of your operations, such as the lens
aperture sound, cannot be muted.
• Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, the likeness rights, etc. of the subject
when you use this function. Use at your own risk.

181
7. Functions Customised for Various Subjects and Purposes

Taking Clear Pictures by Registering Faces

([Face Recog.])

Applicable modes:

Face Recognition is a function which finds a face resembling a registered face and
prioritises focus and exposure automatically. Even if the person is located towards the
back or on the end of a line in a group photo, the camera can still take a clear picture.

KEN KEN

Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Rec] > [Face Recog.]

Settings: [ON]/[OFF]/[MEMORY]
• [Face Recog.] will turn [ON] automatically when the face image is registered.

• The following functions will also work with the Face

Recognition function.
In Recording Mode
– Display of corresponding name when camera detects a
registered face¢ (if name has been set for the registered face)
In Playback Mode MIKA

– Display of name and age (if information has been registered)

– Selective playback of pictures chosen from pictures registered
with Face Recognition ([Category Play] (P229))
¢ Names of up to 3 people are displayed.
Precedence for the names displayed when taking pictures is determined according to the
order of registration.

182
7. Functions Customised for Various Subjects and Purposes

• [Face Recog.] only works when the AF Mode is set to [š].

• During the Burst Mode, [Face Recog.] picture information can be attached to only the first
picture.
• When group pictures are played back, the name of the first picture of the set is displayed.
• Face Recognition may take more time to select and recognise distinctive facial features than
regular Face/Eye Detection.
• Even when face recognition information has been registered, pictures taken with [Name] set to
[OFF] will not be categorised by face recognition in [Category Play].
• Even when Face Recognition information is changed (P186), Face Recognition
information for the pictures already taken will not be changed.
For instance, if the name is changed, pictures recorded before the change will not be
categorised by face recognition in [Category Play].
• To change the name information of the pictures taken, perform the [REPLACE] in [Face Rec
Edit] (P249).

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:
– Recording Modes which do not allow setting to [š] of AF Mode (P138)
– [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)
– When recording motion pictures
– When using [Slimming Mode] in Self Shot Mode
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]

183
7. Functions Customised for Various Subjects and Purposes

Face Settings
You can register information such as names and birthdays for face images of up to 6
people.

∫ Point of recording when registering the face images

• Face front with eyes open and mouth closed, making (Good example for registering)
sure the outline of the face, the eyes, or the eyebrows
are not covered with hair when registering.
• Make sure there is no extreme shading on the face when
registering.
(Flash will not flash during registration.)

∫ When face is not recognised during recording

• Register the face of same person indoors and outdoors, or with different expressions or
angles. (P185)
• Additionally register at the location of recording.
• When a person who is registered is not recognised, correct by re-registering.
• Face Recognition may not be possible or may not recognise faces correctly even for
registered faces, depending on the facial expression and environment.

1 Press 3/4 to select [MEMORY] and then press [MENU/SET].

2 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the Face Recognition
frame that is not registered, and then press [MENU/ 1HZ
SET].
.(1
• [New] will not display if there are 6 people already
registered. Delete a person already registered to register a
new person.

3 Take the picture adjusting the face with the guide.

• Confirmation screen is displayed. It is executed when [Yes]
is selected.
• The faces of subjects other than people (pets, etc.) cannot
be registered.
• To display the description of the face registration, press 1
or touch [ ].

184
7. Functions Customised for Various Subjects and Purposes

4 Set the item.

• You can register up to 3 face images.

It is possible to register names.

1 Press 4 to select [SET] and then press [MENU/SET].
[Name] 2 Enter the name.
• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text”
section on P69.
It is possible to register the birthday.
1 Press 4 to select [SET] and then press [MENU/SET].
[Age]
2 Press 2/1 to select the items (Year/Month/Day), and then
press 3/4 to set and then press [MENU/SET].
(Add Images)
To add additional face images.
1 Select the unregistered face recognition frame, and then press
[MENU/SET].
2 Perform step 3 in “Face Settings”.

[Add Images] (Delete)

To delete one of the face images.
Press 2/1 to select the face image to delete, and then press
[MENU/SET].
• This feature requires that at least one facial image remain, once
registered.
• Confirmation screen is displayed. It is executed when [Yes] is selected.

185
7. Functions Customised for Various Subjects and Purposes

Change or delete the information for a registered person

You can modify the pictures or information of an already registered person. You can also
delete the information of the registered person.

1 Press 3/4 to select [MEMORY] and then press [MENU/SET].

2 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the face image to edit or delete and then press
[MENU/SET].
3 Press 3/4 to select the item and then press [MENU/SET].
Changing the information of an already registered person.
[Info Edit]
Perform step 4 in “Face Settings”.
The focus and exposure are preferentially adjusted for
higher-priority faces.
[Priority]
Press 3/4/2/1 to select the priority and then press
[MENU/SET].
Deleting information of a registered person.
[Delete] • Confirmation screen is displayed. It is executed when [Yes] is
selected.

186
7. Functions Customised for Various Subjects and Purposes

Recording Profiles of Babies and Pets on

Images
Applicable modes:

If you set the name and birthday of your baby or pet in advance, you can record their name
and age in months and years in the images.
You can display these at playback or stamp the recorded images using [Text Stamp]
(P236).

JOE LUCKY

∫ Setting [Age] or [Name]

1 Select the menu. (P53)
MENU > [Rec] > [Profile Setup]
Settings: [ ] ([Baby1])/[ ] ([Baby2])/[ ] ([Pet])/[OFF]/[SET]
2 Press 3/4 to select [SET] and then press [MENU/SET].
3 Press 3/4 to select [Baby1], [Baby2] or [Pet] and then press [MENU/SET].
4 Press 3/4 to select [Age] or [Name] and then press
[MENU/SET].
5 Press 3/4 to select [SET] and then press [MENU/
SET].
Enter [Age] (birthday)
2/1: Select the items (year/month/day)
3/4: Setting
[MENU/SET]: Set
Enter [Name]
For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering
Text” on P69.
6 Press 4 to select [Exit] and then press [MENU/SET] to finish.

∫ To cancel [Age] and [Name]

Select the [OFF] setting in step 1.

• You can print out ages in months and names with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO ”, software available for
download from the dedicated website (P308).

Not available in these cases:

• Still pictures recorded during motion picture recording ([ ] (motion picture priorities)) (P211)
will not record age or name.

187
7. Functions Customised for Various Subjects and Purposes

Using screens and displays suitable for

recording

Checking areas that may be white saturated ([Zebra Pattern])

Applicable modes:

You can check areas that may be white saturated by displaying areas above a certain
luminance level in a zebra pattern. You can also set the minimum luminance level
(brightness) to be processed as a zebra pattern.
MENU > [Custom] > [Zebra Pattern]

Displays areas above a certain luminance level by a

right-leaning zebra pattern.
[ZEBRA1]

Displays areas above a certain luminance level by a

left-leaning zebra pattern.
[ZEBRA2]

[OFF] —
Sets the minimum brightness level for each zebra pattern.
[Zebra 1]/[Zebra 2]
Press 3/4 to select the brightness, and press [MENU/SET].
• You can select a brightness value between [50%] and [105%]. In [Zebra 2],
[SET]
you can select [OFF]. If you select [100%] or [105%], only the areas that
are already white saturated are displayed in a zebra pattern. The smaller
the value is, the wider the brightness range to be processed as a zebra
pattern will be.

• If there are any white saturated areas, we recommend compensating the exposure towards
negative (P156) referring to the histogram (P44) and then taking the picture.
• Displayed zebra patterns will not be recorded.
• If you assign [Zebra Pattern] to [Fn Button Set] (P59) in the [Custom] menu, each time you
press the function button to which the setting is assigned, the zebra pattern toggles as follows:
[Zebra 1] > [Zebra 2] > [OFF].
When [Zebra 2] is set to [OFF], the setting toggles in the order of [Zebra 1] → [OFF], allowing
you to switch the setting quickly.

188
7. Functions Customised for Various Subjects and Purposes

Displaying the recording screen in black and white ([Monochrome Live View])

Applicable modes:

You can display the recording screen in black and white. This function is convenient when
a black and white screen will make it easier to set focus with Manual Focus.
MENU > [Custom] > [Monochrome Live View]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]
• Recorded images will not be affected.

189
 8. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Optical Image Stabiliser

Applicable modes:

The camera detects jitter during recording and automatically corrects it, so you can record
images with reduced jitter.

A lens which supports the stabiliser function is required.

• The interchangeable lens (H-FS12032/H-FS35100/H-PS14042) supports the Optical Image
Stabiliser function.
• When using an optional interchangeable lens with an O.I.S. switch, it is possible to set to
enable the Optical Image Stabiliser by switching the O.I.S. switch on the lens to [ON].
(At the time of purchase, it is initially set to [ ].)

∫ Setting the Stabiliser in the [Rec] menu

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Rec] > [Stabilizer]

2 Press 3/4 to select the item and then press [MENU/SET].

Vertical and horizontal shake are compensated for.

[ ]
([Normal])

Camera shake is corrected for up/down movements.

This mode is ideal for panning (a method of taking
[ ]
pictures which involves turning the camera to track the
([Panning])
movements of a subject which continues to move in a
fixed direction).
[Stabilizer] does not work.
[OFF]
(This can be selected only when using a lens without the [O.I.S.] switch.)
• The [Stabilizer] feature is only available if the lens you are using has an internal stabiliser.
• Exit the menu after it is set.

190
8. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Preventing jitter (camera shake)

When the jitter alert [ ] appears, use [Stabilizer], a tripod or the self-timer (P170).
• Shutter speed will be slower particularly in the following cases. Keep the camera still from the
moment the shutter button is pressed until the picture appears on the screen.
We recommend using a tripod.
– Slow Sync.
– Slow Sync./Red-Eye Reduction
– [Clear Nightscape]/[Cool Night Sky]/[Warm Glowing Nightscape]/[Artistic Nightscape]/
[Glittering Illuminations]/[Clear Night Portrait] (Scene Guide Mode)
– When you set to a slow shutter speed

• It is recommended to disable the Optical Image Stabiliser when using a tripod. [ ] is

displayed on the screen at that time.

Not available in these cases:

•[ ] is not available in Panorama Shot Mode.
• The stabiliser function may not be effective in the following cases.
Be careful of camera jitter when you press the shutter button.
– When there is a lot of jitter
– When the zoom magnification is high
– When using the Digital Zoom
– When taking pictures while following a moving subject
– When the shutter speed becomes slower to take pictures indoors or in dark places
• The panning effect in [ ] is more difficult to achieve in the following cases.
– In brightly lit places such as in broad daylight on a summer’s day
– When the shutter speed is faster than 1/100th of a second
– When you move the camera too slowly because the subject is moving slowly (The
background will not become a blur)
– When the camera does not keep up with the subject satisfactorily

191
8. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Taking Pictures with the Zoom

Optical zoom

Applicable modes:

You can zoom-in to make people and objects appear closer or zoom-out to record
landscapes, etc.
T side: Enlarges distant subject
W side: Widens angle of view

Rotate the zoom ring. T

Interchangeable lens
with a zoom ring
(H-FS12032/
H-FS35100) W

Move the zoom lever. T

(The zoom speed varies depending on
Interchangeable lens how far you move the lever.)
that supports the • If you assign [Zoom Control] to a function W
power zoom button, you can operate the optical zoom
(electrically operated slowly by pressing 2/1 or fast by
zoom)(H-PS14042) pressing 3/4.
For information on how to operate, refer to step 2 and the
subsequent steps on. (P194).
Interchangeable lens The optical zoom is not available.
that does not support
the zoom

192
8. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Raising the telescopic effect

[Ex. Tele Conv.]

Applicable modes:

The Extra Tele Conversion enables you to take pictures that are further enlarged without
deteriorating the picture quality.

[Ex. Tele Conv.] 1.2k: [ M] ([16:9])

When taking pictures 1.4k: [ M] ([4:3]/[3:2]/[1:1])
([Rec])
2.0k: [ S] ([4:3]/[3:2]/[16:9]/[1:1])
• Set the picture size to [M]or [S] (picture sizes indicated with ), and set the quality to
[A] or [›].

2.4k (motion pictures size is set to

[FHD] in [Rec Quality])
When recording motion [Ex. Tele Conv.] 3.6k (motion pictures size is set to
pictures ([Motion Picture]) [HD] in [Rec Quality])
4.8k (motion pictures size is set to
[VGA] in [Rec Quality])

193
8. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

∫ Increasing the zoom magnification in steps

• This can be used only when recording pictures.
1 Select the menu. (P53)
MENU > [Rec] > [Ex. Tele Conv.] > [ZOOM]
2 Set a function button to [Zoom Control]. (P59)
• The following step is an example in which [Zoom Control] is assigned to [Fn1].
3 Press [Fn1].
4 Press 2/1 or 3/4.
3/1: Tele (Enlarges distant subject)
4/2: Wide (Widens angle of view)

• The zoom operation is terminated when [Fn1] is pressed again or a certain amount of time
passes.
4:3 4:3

EX1.0x EX2.0x

• When using an interchangeable lens (H-PS14042) that supports the power zoom, Extra Tele
Conversion becomes available after zooming in to the Tele end of the optical zoom.
A Optical Zoom range (Focal length)¢
B Extra Tele Conversion range for still picture recording
(Zoom magnification) A B
¢ This zoom slider is displayed when using an
interchangeable lens (H-PS14042) that supports the power zoom.
• A constant zoom speed will be set.
• The indicated zoom magnification is an approximation.

∫ Fixing the zoom magnification at the maximum level

Select the menu. (P53)
MENU > [Rec] > [Ex. Tele Conv.] > [TELE CONV.]
MENU > [Motion Picture] > [Ex. Tele Conv.] > [ON]

[OFF] [TELE CONV.]/[ON]

4:3 4:3

194
8. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

• When the Extra Tele Conversion is used, angle of view for still pictures will be different from the
angle of view for motion pictures because the zoom factor is different between them.
Angle of view for recording can be checked beforehand by matching the [Rec Area] (P206)
setting to the mode you wish to record in.
• If you assign [Ex. Tele Conv.] to [Fn Button Set] (P59) in the [Custom] menu, you can display
the Extra Tele Conversion setting screen for both pictures and motion pictures by pressing the
assigned function button. While this screen is displayed, you can change the [Picture Size]
setting by pressing [DISP.].
Not available in these cases:
• This function is not available in the following cases:
– [Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)
– [Toy Effect]/[Toy Pop] (Creative Control Mode)
– When [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]
– When [Burst Rate] is set to [SH]
– When [HDR] is set to [ON]
– When using [Multi Exp.]

[Digital Zoom]

Applicable modes:

Although the image quality deteriorates every time you zoom in further, you can zoom in
up to four times the original zoom magnification.
(Continuous zooming is not possible.)

MENU > [Rec] > [Digital Zoom] > [4t]/[2t]

• When using the Digital Zoom, we recommend using a tripod and the self-timer (P170) for taking
pictures.
• Those menu items are shared by the [Rec] menu and the [Motion Picture] menu. When the
setting for either of the two is changed, the setting for the other is also changed.

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:
– [Toy Effect]/[Toy Pop]/[Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)
– When using [Multi Exp.]

195
8. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Changing the settings for a power zoom lens

Applicable modes:

Sets the screen display and lens operations when using an interchangeable lens that is
compatible with power zoom (electrically operated zoom).
This may only be selected when using a lens that is compatible with power zoom
(electrically operated zoom).
• The interchangeable lens (H-PS14042) is compatible with power zoom.
• The interchangeable lenses (H-FS12032/H-FS35100) are not compatible with power zoom.
(For compatible lenses, please refer to our website.)
MENU > [Custom] > [Power Zoom Lens]

When you zoom, the focal distance is

displayed and you can confirm the zoom
[Disp Focal position. A B
Length] A Focal distance indication
B Current focal distance
[ON]/[OFF]
When you operate the zoom with this setting
[ON], the zoom will stop at positions
C
corresponding to predetermined distances.
[Step Zoom] C Step zoom indication
• [Step Zoom] is disabled during motion
picture recording.
[ON]/[OFF]
When you turn this unit on, the zoom positions when you last turned this unit
[Zoom Resume] off are automatically restored.
[ON]/[OFF]
You can set the zoom speed for zoom operations.
• If you set [Step Zoom] to [ON], the zoom speed will not change.
[Photo]:
[Zoom Speed]
[H] (High speed)/[M] (Middle speed)/[L] (Low speed)
[Video]:
[H] (High speed)/[M] (Middle speed)/[L] (Low speed)
This may only be selected when a power zoom-compatible lens with a zoom
lever and zoom ring is attached.
[Zoom Ring] When set to [OFF], the operations controlled by the zoom ring are disabled
to prevent accidental operation.
[ON]/[OFF]

196
8. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Zooming using touch operations

You can perform zoom operations by touching. (Touch zoom)
(Optical Zoom and Extra Tele Conversion for still picture recording are operable)
• If you are using an interchangeable lens not supporting power zoom (H-FS12032/H-FS35100),
you can only operate the Extra Tele Conversion for pictures by setting [Ex. Tele Conv.] (P193)
to [ZOOM].

1 Touch [ ].

2 Touch [ ].
• The slide bar is displayed.

AE

3 Perform zoom operations by dragging the

slide bar.
• The zoom speed varies depending on the touched
position.

[ ]/[ ] Zooms slowly

[ ]/[ ] Zooms quickly

• Touch [ ] again to end touch zoom operations.

• When [Step Zoom] (P196) is set to [ON], the slide bar for
step zoom is displayed.
Not available in these cases:
• Touch zoom is not available in the following cases:
– In Self Shot Mode 14 18 25

197
8. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Taking pictures by using the flash

Applicable modes:

∫ Open/Close the built-in flash

Taking a picture using the flash becomes
possible by opening the built-in flash.

A To open the flash

Slide the flash open lever.

B To close the flash

Press the flash until it clicks.
• Forcibly closing the flash can damage the
camera.
• Be sure to close the built-in flash when not in
use.
• The flash setting is fixed to [Œ] while the
flash is closed.

• Be careful when opening the flash as the flash will jump out.
• Be careful not to catch a finger when closing a flash bulb.

Forcing the flash off ([Œ])

When the flash is closed or pictures cannot be taken with the flash due to motion picture
recording, etc., [Œ] (forced flash off) is displayed on the recording screen and the flash
will not fire.
• Close the flash in places where its use is prohibited so that it will not fire.

198
8. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

In the following cases, the flash is fixed to [Œ] (forced flash off).
• When recording motion pictures
• When using the electronic shutter
• When [HDR] is set to [ON]
• When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON]
• When an image effect in [Filter Select] of [Filter Settings] is set

Using the flash skilfully

• When recording with the flash, white saturation can occur if the subject is too close.
If [Highlight] of the [Custom] menu is set to [ON], regions of white saturation will blink black
and white when you play back or use Auto Review. In this case, we recommend that you
adjust [Flash Adjust.] (P204) in the minus direction and record the pictures again.
• When taking pictures with flash with the lens hood attached, the lower portion of the photo
may turn dark and the control of the flash may be disabled because the photo flash may be
obscured by the lens hood. We recommend detaching the lens hood.

199
8. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

∫ The available flash range (approximation)

When you use certain lenses, light from the flash may be
blocked or fail to cover the lens field of view, causing dark
areas to appear in the resulting pictures.
The distance at which light from the flash is blocked by lens, and
the distance to which light from the flash is delivered vary
depending on the lens used. Check the distance to the subject
when taking a picture.

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) is used

Wide Tele
0.4 m (1.3 feet) to 4.5 m (15 feet) 0.3 m (0.98 feet) to 2.8 m (9.2 feet)

When the interchangeable lens (H-FS35100) is used

Wide Tele
0.9 m (3.0 feet) to 4.0 m (13 feet) 0.9 m (3.0 feet) to 2.8 m (9.2 feet)

When the interchangeable lens (H-PS14042) is used

Wide Tele
1.0 m (3.3 feet) to 4.5 m (15 feet) 0.3 m (0.98 feet) to 2.8 m (9.2 feet)
• These ranges are obtained, the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO], and [ISO Limit Set] (P158) is
set to [OFF].

• Do not bring the flash too close to objects or close the flash while it is activated. The objects
may be discoloured by its heat or lighting.
• Do not close the flash soon after the flash is activated prior to taking pictures due to Forced ON/
Red-Eye Reduction etc. It causes a malfunction.
• It may take time to charge the flash if you repeatedly take pictures. You must wait a moment to
take the next picture while the flash icon is blinking red indicating the flash is charging. Take a
picture after the access indication disappears.

200
8. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Changing Flash Mode

Applicable modes:

Set the built-in flash to match the recording.

1 Select the menu. (P53)
MENU > [Rec] > [Flash] > [Flash Mode]
2 Press 3/4 to select the item and then press [MENU/SET].
The flash is activated every time
regardless of the recording conditions.
‰ ([Forced Flash On]) • Use this when your subject is back-lit
([Forced On/
or under fluorescent light.
Red-Eye])

When taking pictures against a dark

background landscape, this feature will
slow the shutter speed when the flash is
activated. Dark background landscape will
([Slow Sync.])
appear brighter.
([Slow Sync./
Red-Eye]) • Use this when you take pictures of
people in front of a dark background.
• Using a slower speed can cause motion blur. Using a tripod
can enhance your photos.
The flash is activated twice.
The interval between the first and second flash is longer when [ ] or [ ] is
set. The subject should not move until the second flash is activated.
• The Red-Eye Reduction effect differs between people. Also, if the subject was far away from
the camera or was not looking at the first flash, the effect may not be evident.
∫ Correcting red eyes

Applicable modes:

When Red-Eye Reduction ([ ], [ ]) is selected, Red-Eye Removal is performed

whenever the flash is used. The camera automatically detects red-eye and corrects the
picture.
MENU > [Rec] > [Red-Eye Removal]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

• [ ] is displayed on the icon when it is set to [ON].

• Under certain circumstances, red-eye cannot be corrected.

201
8. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

∫ Available flash settings by Recording Mode

The available flash settings depend on the Recording Mode.
(±: Available, —: Not available, ¥: Initial setting)
Recording Mode ‰ Œ
Intelligent Auto Mode —¢ —¢ —¢ —¢ ±
Intelligent Auto Plus Mode —¢ —¢ —¢ —¢ ±
Programme AE Mode ± ± ± ± ±
Aperture-Priority AE Mode ± ± ± ± ±
Shutter-Priority AE Mode ± ± — — ±
Manual Exposure Mode ± ± — — ±
Panorama Shot Mode — — — — ±
[Silky Skin] ± ¥ — — ±
[Backlit Softness] — — — — ¥
[Relaxing Tone] — — — — ¥
[Bright Blue Sky] — — — — ¥
[Romantic Sunset Glow] — — — — ¥
[Vivid Sunset Glow] — — — — ¥
[Glistening Water] — — — — ¥
[Clear Nightscape] — — — — ¥
[Cool Night Sky] — — — — ¥
[Warm Glowing Nightscape] — — — — ¥
Scene Guide
[Artistic Nightscape] — — — — ¥
Mode
[Glittering Illuminations] — — — — ¥
[Handheld Night Shot] — — — — ¥
[Clear Night Portrait] — — — ¥ ±
[Soft Image of a Flower] ¥ — — — ±
[Appetizing Food] ¥ — — — ±
[Cute Dessert] ¥ — — — ±
[Freeze Animal Motion] ¥ — — — ±
[Clear Sports Shot] ¥ — — — ±
[Monochrome] ¥ ± ± ± ±
Scenery Mode — — — — ¥
Child Mode ± ¥ — — ±
Portrait Mode ± ¥ — — ±
Creative Control Mode — — — — ±

¢ Cannot be set using the [Rec] menu.

[ ] is set when the flash is opened. (P72)

• The flash setting may change if the Recording Mode is changed. Set the flash setting again if
necessary.
• In Scene Guide Mode/Scenery Mode/Child Mode/Portrait Mode, the default flash settings are
restored each time you change the scene or Recording Mode.

202
8. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

∫ Shutter speed for each flash setting

Flash setting Shutter speed (Sec.) Flash setting Shutter speed (Sec.)
‰
1/50th¢1 1 to 1/16000th

Œ 60¢2 to 1/16000th
¢1 In Shutter Priority AE Mode, the shutter speed can be set to a value between 60 seconds
and 1/50th of a second; in Manual Exposure Mode, it can be set to T (Time) or a value
between 60 seconds and 1/50th of a second.
¢2 The setting changes to T (Time) in Manual Exposure Mode.

• When the flash is activated the fastest shutter speed that can be selected is 1/50th of a second.
• In Intelligent Auto ( or ) Mode, shutter speed changes depending on the identified
scene.

Setting to the 2nd Curtain Synchro

Applicable modes:

2nd curtain synchro activates the flash just before the shutter closes when taking pictures
of moving objects such as cars using a slow shutter speed.

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Rec] > [Flash] > [Flash Synchro]
2 Press 3/4 to select the item and then press [MENU/SET].
1st curtain synchro
The normal method when taking pictures with the flash.
[1ST]

2nd curtain synchro

The light source appears behind the subject and picture
[2ND]
becomes dynamic.

• Set it to [1ST] for normal use.

• [2nd] is displayed in the flash icon on the screen if you set [Flash Synchro] to [2ND].
• When a fast shutter speed is set, the effect of [Flash Synchro] may deteriorate.
• You cannot set [ ] or [ ] when [Flash Synchro] is set to [2ND].

203
8. Stabiliser, Zoom and Flash

Adjust the flash output

Applicable modes:

Adjust the flash brightness when pictures taken with the flash are over or underexposed.

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Rec] > [Flash] > [Flash Adjust.]
2 Press 2/1 to set the flash output and then press [MENU/SET].
• You can adjust from [j2 EV] to [i2 EV] in steps of 1/3 EV.
• Select [n0] to return to the original flash output.

• [i] or [j] is displayed on the flash icon in the screen when the flash level is adjusted.

Synchronising the output of the flash to the Exposure Compensation

Applicable modes:

The camera automatically optimises the flash output for the Exposure Compensation
value.
Select the menu. (P53)
MENU > [Rec] > [Flash] > [Auto Exposure Comp.]
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

• For details on Exposure Compensation, refer to P156.

204
 9. Recording Motion Pictures

Recording Motion Picture

Applicable modes:

This camera can record full high definition motion pictures compatible with the AVCHD
format or motion pictures recorded in MP4.
Audio will be recorded in stereo.
The functions available when recording motion pictures differ according to the lens you are
using, and the operational sound of the lens may be recorded.
Refer to the website for compatible lenses.

1 Start recording by pressing the motion

picture button.
A Elapsed recording time
B Available recording time

• Recording of motion picture appropriate for each

A C
mode is possible.
• The recording state indicator (red) C will flash while
recording motion pictures. 3s
• If approximately 1 minute elapses without an
operation being performed, part of the display will
disappear. Press [DISP.] or touch the monitor to make
the display reappear. R1m37s
• Release the motion picture button right after you press B
it.

2 Stop the recording by pressing the motion picture button again.

• Still picture recording is also possible during the motion picture recording by fully
pressing the shutter button. (P211)

205
9. Recording Motion Pictures

Enabling/disabling the motion picture button

MENU > [Custom] > [Video Button] > [ON]/[OFF]

• This function is for preventing accidental operation of the button.

Switching between the angle of view for taking pictures and the one for
recording motion pictures

MENU > [Custom] > [Rec Area] > [!] (Picture)/[ ] (Motion picture)

• When the aspect ratio setting is different in still and motion pictures, the angle of view
changes at the start of motion picture recording.
When [Rec Area] is set to [ ], angle of view during motion picture recording is displayed.
• The recording area indicated is an approximation.

206
9. Recording Motion Pictures

• When a high ambient temperature, continuous recording or other conditions cause the camera
to overheat, the following restrictions will occur to protect the camera. Wait until the camera
cools down.
– Continuous recording, motion picture recording, and the Wi-Fi connection will be temporarily
disabled.
– If you continue recording even when [ ] is flashing on the screen, a message will be
displayed and the camera will turn off automatically.
• The operational sound of the zoom or button operation may be recorded when it is operated
during the recording of a motion picture.
• When using the interchangeable lens (H-PS14042), if you take your finger off the zoom lever,
focus lever during recording of a motion picture, the sound of the lever returning may be
recorded. When returning the lever to its starting position, do so quietly.
• When using the interchangeable lens (H-PS14042), zoom speed may be slower than normal
when recording motion pictures.
• The available recording time displayed on the screen may not decrease regularly.
• Depending on the type of the card, the card access indication may appear for a while after
recording motion pictures. This is not a malfunction.
• The [Sensitivity] will be set to [AUTO] (for motion pictures) when recording motion pictures.
Also, the [ISO Limit Set] will not operate.
• When recording a motion picture, [Stabilizer] will be fixed to [ ] even if it is set to [ ].
• It is recommended to use a fully charged battery or AC adaptor (optional) when recording
motion pictures. (P319)
• If while recording motion pictures using the AC adaptor (optional) the power supply is cut off
due to a power cut or if the AC adaptor (optional) is disconnected etc., the motion picture will
not be recorded.
• It will be recorded in the following categories for certain Recording Modes. A motion picture
recording matching each Recording Mode will be performed for the ones not listed below.
Recording Mode while
Selected Recording Mode
recording motion picture
– Programme AE Mode
– Aperture-Priority AE Mode
– Shutter-Priority AE Mode Normal motion picture
– Manual Exposure Mode
– Self Shot Mode
– [Clear Nightscape]/[Artistic Nightscape]/[Handheld Night
Low Light Mode
Shot]/[Clear Night Portrait] (Scene Guide Mode)

Not available in these cases:

• Motion pictures cannot be recorded in the following cases.
– [Glistening Water]/[Glittering Illuminations]/[Soft Image of a Flower] (Scene Guide Mode)
– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/[Sunshine] (Creative
Control Mode)
– When using [Time Lapse Shot]
– When using [Stop Motion Animation]

207
9. Recording Motion Pictures

Setting the format, size and recording frame rate

Applicable modes:

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Motion Picture] > [Rec Format]

2 Press 3/4 to select the item and then press [MENU/SET].

This data format is suitable for when playing back on a high-definition

[AVCHD]
TV, etc.
[MP4] This data format is suitable for when playing back on a PC, etc.

3 Press 3/4 to select [Rec Quality] and then press [MENU/SET].

4 Press 3/4 to select the item and then press [MENU/SET].

• Exit the menu after it is set.

When [AVCHD] is selected

Recording frame
Item Size Sensor output Bit rate
rate

[FHD/28M/50p]¢ 1920k1080 50p 50 frames/second 28 Mbps

[FHD/17M/50i] 1920k1080 50i 50 frames/second 17 Mbps

[FHD/24M/25p] 1920k1080 50i 25 frames/second 24 Mbps

[FHD/24M/24p] 1920k1080 24p 24 frames/second 24 Mbps

¢ AVCHD Progressive

208
9. Recording Motion Pictures

When [MP4] is selected

Recording frame
Item Size Sensor output Bit rate
rate

[FHD/28M/50p] 1920k1080 50p 50 frames/second 28 Mbps

[FHD/20M/25p] 1920k1080 20 Mbps

[HD/10M/25p] 1280k720 25p 25 frames/second 10 Mbps

[VGA/4M/25p] 640k480 4 Mbps

• What is bit rate

This is the volume of data for a definite period of time, and the quality becomes higher when the
number gets bigger. This unit is using the “VBR” recording method. “VBR” is an abbreviation for
“Variable Bit Rate”, and the bit rate (volume of data for definite period of time) is changed
automatically depending on the subject to record. Therefore, the recording time is shortened
when a subject with fast movement is recorded.

∫ About the compatibility of the recorded motion pictures

Even when a compatible device is used, recorded motion pictures may be played back
with reduced picture and sound quality, or they may not be played back.
Also, recording information may not be displayed correctly. Use this unit to playback in
such case.
• To play back motion pictures recorded with [FHD/28M/50p], [FHD/24M/25p] or [FHD/24M/24p]
in [AVCHD] with another device, or to transfer them to another device, you need a compatible
Blu-ray disc recorder or a PC on which “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”, software available for download
from a website (P308), is installed.

209
9. Recording Motion Pictures

How to set focus when recording a motion picture ([Continuous AF])

Applicable modes:

Focusing varies depending on the settings of the [Focus Mode] and the [Continuous AF] in
the [Motion Picture] menu.
Focus mode [Continuous AF] Description of settings
The camera automatically keeps focusing on subjects
[ON]
[AFS]/[AFF]/ during recording.
[AFC] The camera maintains the focus position at the start of
[OFF]
recording.
[MF] [ON]/[OFF] You can focus manually. (P148)

• When the focus mode is set to [AFS], [AFF] or [AFC], if you press the shutter button halfway
while recording a motion picture, the camera will re-adjust the focus.
• Depending on the recording conditions or lens used, operational sound may be recorded when
the Auto Focus is operated while recording a motion picture.
It is recommended to record with [Continuous AF] in the [Motion Picture] menu set to [OFF], if
the sound of operation bothers you to avoid recording the lens noise.
• When operating the zoom when recording motion pictures, it may take time to come into focus.
• [Continuous AF] does not work while [Pull Focus] in [Snap Movie] is in operation.

210
9. Recording Motion Pictures

Recording still pictures while recording motion

pictures
Applicable modes:

Still pictures can be recorded even while recording a motion picture. (Simultaneous
recording)
During motion picture recording, press the
shutter button fully to record a still picture.
• Simultaneous recording indicator is displayed while recording
still pictures.
• Recording with the Touch Shutter function (P50) is also
available. 13

∫ Setting motion picture and still picture priorities

Applicable modes:

Recording method for the still pictures taken while recording a motion picture can be set
with [Picture Mode] in the [Motion Picture] menu.
• Pictures will be recorded with a picture size of [S] (2 M).
The picture quality may be different to [S] (2 M) of standard pictures.
• Only JPEG images are recorded when [Quality] is set to [ ], [ ] or
[ ]
[ ].
(Motion picture
(When set to [ ], still pictures will be recorded in [Quality] of [A].)
priorities)
• Up to 15 still pictures can be recorded during recording of the motion picture.
• In [Miniature Effect] of Creative Control Mode, there may be a slight delay
between fully pressing the shutter button and recording.
• Pictures will be recorded with the set picture size and quality.
[ ]
• The screen will go dark while recording pictures. A still picture will be
(Still picture
recorded in the motion picture during that period, and audio is not recorded.
priorities)
• Up to 4 still pictures can be recorded during recording of the motion picture.

• The picture aspect ratio will be fixed to [16:9].

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:
– When [Rec Format] is set to [VGA/4M/25p] in [MP4]
– When the [FHD/24M/24p] is set [only when [ ] (still picture priorities) is set]
– When using [Ex. Tele Conv.] in the [Motion Picture] menu [only when [ ] (still picture
priorities) is set]
– When [Snap Movie] is set to [ON]

211
9. Recording Motion Pictures

Recording Snap Movies

Applicable modes:

You can specify the recording time in advance and record motion pictures casually like you
take snapshots. The function also allows you to shift a focus at the start of recording and
add fade in/out effects in advance.
• Motion pictures will be recorded with [FHD/20M/25p] in [MP4].
• Using the smartphone/tablet app “Panasonic Image App”, you can combine motion pictures
recorded with the camera. Music can be added and various editing operations can be
performed when you combine them. In addition, you can send the combined motion picture to a
web service. (P265)

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Motion Picture] > [Snap Movie]

2 Select [SET] with 3/4, and then press [MENU/SET].

3 Press 3/4 to select an item and then press [MENU/SET].

Sets the recording time of motion pictures.

[Record time]
[8SEC]/[6SEC]/[4SEC]/[2SEC]
Allows dramatic imaging expression by shifting focus gradually at
the start of recording.
[Pull Focus]
[ON]/[OFF]
• Refer to P214 for details.
Adds a fade-in (gradual appearance) effect to an image and audio
as recording starts or adds a fade-out (gradual disappearance)
effect to them as recording ends.
[WHITE-IN]/[WHITE-OUT]:
Adds a fade-in or fade-out effect that uses a white screen.
[BLACK-IN]/[BLACK-OUT]:
[Fade]
Adds a fade-in or fade-out effect that uses a black screen.
[COLOR-IN]/[COLOR-OUT]:
Adds an effect that fades in from black-and-white to colour or an
effect that fades out from colour to black-and-white. Audio will be
recorded normally.
[OFF]

4 Press [ ].

5 Press [MENU/SET].

6 Select [ON] with 3/4, and then press [MENU/SET].

• Press the shutter button halfway to exit the menu.
• If [Pull Focus] is set to [ON], set its focus.

212
9. Recording Motion Pictures

A
7 Start recording by pressing the motion SNAP
4SEC

picture button.
3s
A Elapsed recording time
B Set recording time
• Release the motion picture button right after you press it.
• You cannot stop motion picture recording in the 4s
middle.The recording will stop automatically when the set B
recording time has elapsed.

∫ To deactivate Snap Movie

Select [OFF] in step 2.

• Motion pictures recorded with [WHITE-IN] or [BLACK-IN] are displayed as all-white or all-black
thumbnails in Playback Mode.
• If you assign [Snap Movie] to [Fn Button Set] (P59), you can display a screen that lets you
switch [Snap Movie] between [ON]/[OFF] by pressing the assigned function button. If you press
[DISP.] while the screen is displayed, you can change the settings for Snap Movie.
• [Snap Movie] will be set to [OFF] when you connect to Wi-Fi.
• You cannot record motion pictures with Snap Movie when using [Miniature Effect] in Creative
Control Mode.

213
9. Recording Motion Pictures

Setting up [Pull Focus]

Set the frames that determine a focus start (first) position and
focus end (second) position. The camera then measures its
distance to the subjects and sets focus. When you start
motion picture recording, focus shifts from the first frame to
the second frame.
Button operation
1 Press 2.
2 Press 3/4/2/1 to move the AF area frame, and press [MENU/SET]. (First position)
• If you press [DISP.] before pressing [MENU/SET], the frame will return to the centre.
3 Repeat step 2. (Second position)
• Auto Focus will work to set the start and end focus of Pull Focus. When the setup has
failed, the frame returns to the first position. Perform the setup again.
• If you press [MENU/SET], the frame settings will be cancelled.
Touch operation
Touch a subject (first position), drag your finger to the desired location (second position),
and release the finger.
• Auto Focus will work to set the start and end focus of Pull Focus. When the setup has failed,
the frame returns to the first position. Perform the setup again.
• If you touch [ ], the frame settings will be cancelled.

• A greater effect can be achieved by creating a striking contrast of focus between

the start and end positions, for example by shifting focus from the background to
foreground, or vice versa.
• After setting focus, try to keep the distance between the subject and the camera
constant.

• When [Pull Focus] is set to [ON]:

– Auto Focus Mode will be switched to [ ], a setting specially designed for [Pull Focus].
– If you take a picture, the Auto Focus operation [Ø] will take place at the first frame position.
• To re-adjust the focus while recording a motion picture, press the shutter button halfway after
Pull Focus operation finishes.
• Pull Focus does not work when the two frames are not set.
• Even when [Metering Mode] (P160) is set to [ ], the spot metering target does not move with
focus. The target is fixed at the start position (first position) of Pull Focus.

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:
– In Manual Focus
– When using the Digital Zoom
– With lenses that only offer Manual Focus
– With some Four Thirds lenses

214
9. Recording Motion Pictures

Using the [Motion Picture] Menu

For details on [Motion Picture] menu settings, refer to P53.

• [Photo Style], [Filter Settings], [Focus Mode], [Metering Mode], [i.Dynamic], [i.Resolution] and
[Digital Zoom] are common to both the [Rec] menu and [Motion Picture] menu. Changing these
settings in one of these menus is reflected in other menu.
• [Motion Picture] menu is not displayed in the following cases.
– [Glistening Water]/[Glittering Illuminations]/[Soft Image of a Flower] (Scene Guide Mode)
– [Rough Monochrome]/[Silky Monochrome]/[Soft Focus]/[Star Filter]/[Sunshine] (Creative
Control Mode)

[Snap Movie]
• Refer to P212 for details.

[Rec Format]
• Refer to P208 for details.

[Rec Quality]
• Refer to P208 for details.

[Picture Mode]
• Refer to P211 for details.

[Continuous AF]
• Refer to P210 for details.

[Ex. Tele Conv.]

• Refer to P193 for details.

[Flkr Decrease]

Applicable modes:

The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the flicker or striping in the motion picture.
Settings: [1/50]/[1/60]/[1/100]/[1/120]/[OFF]

215
9. Recording Motion Pictures

[Mic Level Disp.]

Applicable modes:

Set whether or not the mic levels are displayed on the screen.
Settings: [ON]/[OFF]

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following case:
– [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)

[Mic Level Adj.]

Applicable modes:

Adjust the sound input level to 4 different levels.

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following case:
– [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)

[Wind Cut]

Applicable modes:

Reduces the wind noise effectively if there is wind noise when recording sound.
Settings: [AUTO]/[HIGH]/[STANDARD]/[LOW]/[OFF]

• Setting [Wind Cut] may alter the usual sound quality.

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following case:
– [Miniature Effect] (Creative Control Mode)

216
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

Playing Back Pictures

1 Press [(].

2 Press 2/1. 1/98

2: Play back the previous picture

1: Play back the next picture
• If you press and hold 2/1, you can play back the
pictures in succession.
• It is also possible to forward or rewind the image by dragging the screen horizontally
(P48).
• You can forward or rewind pictures continuously by keeping your finger on the left or
right sides of the screen after forwarding/rewinding a picture.
(Pictures are displayed reduced in size)
• Speed of picture forwarding/rewinding changes depending on the playback status.

Switching the speed for forwarding or rewinding pictures continuously

MENU > [Custom] > [Touch Scroll] > [H] (High speed)/[L] (Low speed)

Sending an image to a web service

If you press 4 when displaying images one by one, you can easily send an image to a
web service. (P281)

∫ To finish playback
Press [(] again, press the shutter button halfway or press the motion picture
button.

217
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

Not available in these cases:

• This camera complies with the DCF standard “Design rule for Camera File system” established
by JEITA “Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association” and with Exif
“Exchangeable Image File Format”.
This camera can only display pictures that comply with the DCF standard.
• The camera may not play back images recorded on other devices correctly, and the functions
of the camera may not be available for the images.

218
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

Playing Back Motion Pictures

This unit was designed to play motion pictures using the AVCHD, MP4 and QuickTime
Motion JPEG formats.
• Motion pictures are displayed with the motion picture icon
A
([ ]).

Press 3 to play back.

12s
A Motion picture recording time

• After playback starts, the elapsed playback time is displayed on

the screen.
For example, 8 minutes and 30 seconds is displayed as
[8m30s].
• Some information (recording information, etc.) is not displayed
for motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD].
• Touching [ ] in the middle of the screen allows you to play back motion pictures.
• Motion pictures recorded with [Snap Movie] are played back automatically.

∫ Operations during Motion Picture Playback

Button Touch Description of Button Touch Description of

operation operation operation operation operation operation

3 Play/Pause 4 Stop

Fast rewind¢ Fast forward¢

2 Frame-by-frame 1 Frame-by-frame
rewind forward
(while pausing) (while pausing)

Increase volume
Reduce volume level
level

¢ The fast forward/rewind speed increases if you press 1/2 again.

• Control panel disappears after approximately 2 seconds if no operation is performed. Touch
the screen to redisplay the control panel.
• If you press [MENU/SET] during a pause, you can create a picture from a motion picture.
(P220)

219
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

∫ Operations during automatic Snap Movie playback

3 Playback from the beginning
2 Back to previous picture
1 Ahead to next picture
• If you touch the screen, automatic playback will stop.

• You can play back motion pictures on a PC with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (P308).

Creating Still Pictures from a Motion Picture

You can create a single still picture from a recorded motion picture.

1 Press 3 to pause motion picture playback.

2 Press [MENU/SET].
• The same operation can be performed by touching
[ ].
• Confirmation screen is displayed. It is executed when
[Yes] is selected.

• It will be saved with [Picture Size] set to [S] (2 M), [Aspect Ratio] set to [16:9], and [Quality] set
to [›].
• Still pictures created from a motion picture may be coarser than with normal picture quality.
•[ ] is displayed during playback of still pictures created from motion pictures.
• To create still pictures from motion pictures when the camera is connected to a TV with an
HDMI micro cable, set [VIERA Link] in [TV Connection] in the [Setup] menu to [OFF].

Not available in these cases:

• Still pictures cannot be created from motion pictures recorded in [VGA/4M/25p] of [MP4].

220
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

Switching the Playback Method

Using the Playback Zoom

Rotate the control dial to the right. A

1k 2k 4k 8k 16k 2.0X
• If the control dial is rotated to the left after the image is enlarged,
the magnification will be reduced.
• You can also enlarge/reduce the image by pinching out/pinching in
(P48) on the part you want to enlarge/reduce.
• When you change the magnification, the zoom position indication
A appears for about 1 second.
• The more a picture is enlarged, the more its quality deteriorates.
• You can move the enlarged part by pressing 3/4/2/1 of the
cursor button or dragging the screen. (P48)
• You can also enlarge (2k) the image by double-touching the part
you want to enlarge. If you double-touch the enlarged image, the
magnification is reset to 1k.

Displaying multiple screens (Multi Playback)

Rotate the control dial to the left. 1/98

1 screen 12 screens 30 screens Calendar screen

display
• If the control dial is rotated to the right, the previous playback
screen will be displayed.
• It is possible to switch the playback screen by touching the
following icons.
–[ ]: 1 screen
–[ ]: 12 screens
–[ ]: 30 screens
– [ CAL ]: Calendar screen display
• The screen can be switched gradually by dragging the screen up
or down.
• Pictures displayed using [ ] cannot be played back.

∫ To return to Normal Playback

Press 3/4/2/1 to select a picture and then press [MENU/SET].

221
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

Displaying Pictures by Recording Date (Calendar Playback)

1 Rotate the control dial to the left to display the calendar screen.
2 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the date to be played back.
3 Press [MENU/SET] to display the images that are
recorded in selected date.
4 Press 3/4/2/1 to select a picture and then press
[MENU/SET].
• Rotate the control dial left to return to the Calendar screen
display.

• The recording date of the picture selected in the playback screen becomes the date selected
when the Calendar screen is first displayed.
• You can display the Calendar between January 2000 and December 2099.
• If the date is not set in the camera, the recording date is set as the 1st January, 2016.
• If you take pictures after setting the travel destination in [World Time], the pictures are
displayed by the dates at the travel destination in Calendar Playback.

222
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

Playing Back Group Pictures

A picture group consists of multiple pictures. You can play back pictures in a group either
continuously or one by one.
• You can edit or delete all pictures in a group at once.
(For example, if you delete a picture group, all pictures in the group are deleted.)

[ ]:
A picture group consisting of pictures taken in the Burst Mode 1/98
SLF
with the burst speed [SH]. (P164)
[ ]:
A picture group consisting of pictures taken in a Time Lapse SUB
MENU
Shot. (P172)
[ ]:
A picture group consisting of pictures taken in the Stop Motion
Animation. (P175)

• Pictures will not be grouped if recorded without setting the clock.

Continuously playing back Group Pictures

Press 3.
• The same operation can be performed by touching the group picture icon ([ ], [ ],
[ ]).
• When playing back group pictures one at a time, options are displayed.
[From the first picture]:
Pictures are played back continuously from the first picture of the group.
[From the current picture]:
Pictures are played back continuously from the picture being played back.

∫ Operations during Group Pictures playback

3 Continuous playback/Pause 4 Stop

Fast rewind Fast forward

2 1
Rewind Forward
(while pausing) (while pausing)

223
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

Playing back each Group Pictures

1 Press 4.
SUB 1/98
• The same operation can be performed by touching [ MENU ].
SLF
2 Press 3/4 to select [Display In Group], and then
press [MENU/SET].
SUB
MENU

3 Press 2/1 to flip through images.

SUB
• Pressing 4 again or touching [ MENU ] and selecting [Exit Display In Group] will return you to
the normal playback screen.
• Each picture in a group can be treated same as normal pictures when they are played
back. (Such as Multi Playback, Playback Zoom and deleting images)

224
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

Deleting Pictures
Once deleted, pictures cannot be recovered.
• Pictures that are not in the DCF standard or those that are protected cannot be deleted.

To delete a single picture

1 In Playback Mode, select the picture to delete

and then press [ ].
• The same operation can be performed by touching [ ].

2 Press 3 to select [Delete Single] and then

'HOHWH6LQJOH
press [MENU/SET].
'HOHWH0XOWL
• Confirmation screen is displayed. 'HOHWH$OO
Picture is deleted by selecting [Yes].

[Delete Confirmation] in the [Playback] menu enables you to set which option
on the delete confirmation screen, [Yes] or [No], will be highlighted first.
The default setting is [No]. (P250)

225
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

To delete multiple pictures (up to 100¢) or all the pictures

¢ Picture groups are treated as a single picture.
(All the pictures in the selected picture group will be deleted.)

1 In Playback Mode, press [ ].

2 Press 3/4 to select [Delete Multi] or [Delete All] and then press
[MENU/SET].
• [Delete All] > Confirmation screen is displayed.
Pictures are deleted by selecting [Yes].
• It is possible to delete all pictures except the ones set as favourite when [All Delete
Except Favorite] is selected with the [Delete All] set.

3 (When [Delete Multi] is selected)

Press 3/4/2/1 to select the picture, and then 2.
press [MENU/SET] to set. (Repeat this step.)
• [‚] appears on the selected pictures.
If [MENU/SET] is pressed again, the setting is cancelled.

4 (When [Delete Multi] is selected)

Press 2 to select [OK], and then press [MENU/SET] to execute.
• Confirmation screen is displayed.
Pictures are deleted by selecting [Yes].

• Do not turn the camera off while deleting. Use a battery with sufficient battery power or the AC
adaptor (optional) (P319).
• Depending on the number of pictures to be deleted, it may take some time to delete them.

226
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

Using the [Playback] Menu

With this menu, you can use various playback functions such as cropping and other
editing of recorded images, protect settings, etc.
• With [Beauty Retouch], [Clear Retouch], [Text Stamp], [Time Lapse Video], [Stop Motion Video],
[Resize] or [Cropping], a new edited picture is created.
A new picture cannot be created if there is no free space on the card so we recommend
checking that there is free space before editing the picture.
• The camera may not play back images recorded on other devices correctly, and the functions
of the camera may not be available for the images.

[2D/3D Settings]
Playback methods for the 3D pictures can be switched.
• This is a menu that is only displayed when 3D playback is possible.
Refer to P301 for details.

[Slide Show]
You can play back the pictures you have taken in synchronisation with music, and you can
do this in sequence while leaving a fixed interval between each of the pictures.
You can also put together a slide show composed of only still pictures, only motion
pictures, only 3D pictures etc.
We recommend this feature when you view your pictures by connecting the camera to a
TV.

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Playback] > [Slide Show]
2 Select the group to play back by pressing 3/4, and
then press [MENU/SET].
• Refer to P301 for the method to play back [3D] pictures in
3D.
• When [Category Selection] is selected, press 3/4/2/1
to select a category and then press [MENU/SET].
For details on categories, refer to P229.
3 Press 3 to select [Start] and then press [MENU/SET].

227
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

∫ Operations during a slideshow

Button Touch Description of Button Touch Description of
operation operation operation operation operation operation

3 Play/Pause 4 Exit slide show

Back to previous
2 1 Ahead to next picture
picture

Increase volume
Reduce volume level
level

• Normal playback resumes after the slide show finishes.

∫ Changing the slide show settings

You can change the settings for slide show playback by selecting [Effect] or [Setup] on the
slide show menu screen.
[Effect]
This allows you to select the screen effects when switching from one picture to the next.
[AUTO]/[NATURAL]/[SLOW]/[SWING]/[URBAN]/[OFF]
• When [URBAN] has been selected, the picture may appear in black and white as a screen
effect.
• [AUTO] can be used only when [Category Selection] has been selected. The pictures are
played back with the recommended effects in each category.
• [Effect] is fixed to [OFF] when in [Video Only] or during the slide show for [ ], [ ], [ ] in
[Category Selection].
• Even if [Effect] is set, it does not work during a slide show of Group Pictures.
• When pictures are displayed on a TV connected via an HDMI micro cable or when
vertically-displayed pictures are played back, some of the [Effect] settings will not work.
[Setup]
[Duration] or [Repeat] can be set.
[Duration] [5SEC]/[3SEC]/[2SEC]/[1SEC]
[Repeat] [ON]/[OFF]
[AUTO]: Music is played when the still pictures are played back,
and audio is played when the motion pictures are played
back.
[Sound] [Music]: Music is played back.
[Audio]: Audio (only for motion pictures) is played back.
[OFF]: There will be no sound.

• [Duration] can be set only when [OFF] has been selected as the [Effect] setting.
• When playing back the following pictures, the [Duration] setting is disabled.
– Motion pictures
– Panorama pictures
– Group Pictures
228
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

[Playback Mode]
Playback in [Normal Play], [Picture Only], [Video Only], [3D Play], [Category Play] or
[Favorite Play] can be selected.

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Playback] > [Playback Mode]
2 Select the group to play back by pressing 3/4, and then press [MENU/SET].
• Refer to P301 for the method to play back [3D Play] pictures in 3D.

When [Category Play] is selected in above step 2

3 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the category and then press [MENU/SET] to set.
• Pictures are sorted into the categories shown below.

– [Face Recog.]¢
– [i-Portrait]/[i-Night Portrait]/[i-Baby] (Scene Detection)
– [Silky Skin]/[Backlit Softness]/[Relaxing Tone]/[Clear Night Portrait] (Scene
*
Guide Mode)
– Child Mode/Portrait Mode
– In Self Shot Mode
– [i-Scenery]/[i-Sunset] (Scene Detection)
– [Bright Blue Sky]/[Romantic Sunset Glow]/[Vivid Sunset Glow]/[Glistening
,
Water] (Scene Guide Mode)
– Scenery Mode
– [i-Night Portrait]/[i-Night Scenery]/[iHandheld Night Shot] (Scene Detection)
– [Clear Nightscape]/[Cool Night Sky]/[Warm Glowing Nightscape]/[Artistic
.
Nightscape]/[Glittering Illuminations]/[Handheld Night Shot]/[Clear Night
Portrait] (Scene Guide Mode)
– [Clear Sports Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)
– [i-Food] (Scene Detection)
1
– [Appetizing Food]/[Cute Dessert] (Scene Guide Mode)
– [Travel Date]
– Still pictures recorded continuously with burst speed set to [SH]
– [Time Lapse Shot]/[Time Lapse Video]
– [Stop Motion Animation]/[Stop Motion Video]
¢ Press 3/4/2/1 to select the person to play back and then press [MENU/SET].
As for group pictures, the entire group is treated as a single picture with Face
Recognition information.
• Categorisation of the motion pictures differ from the still pictures depending on the
Recording Mode. Some motion pictures may not be played back.

229
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

[Location Logging]
You can write location information sent from a smartphone (latitude and longitude) on
images.
• You can send location information and write it on images using a smartphone.
(P263)
• You need to install “Panasonic Image App” on your smartphone. (P255)
• Read the [Help] in the “Image App” menu for further details on how to operate.
Preparation:
Sending location information to the camera from the smartphone.

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Playback] > [Location Logging] > [Add Location Data]
2 Press 3/4 to select the period you intend to record location information on
images, then press [MENU/SET].
• Confirmation screen is displayed. It is executed when [Yes] is selected.
• Images with location information are indicated with [ ].

∫ To pause the recording of location information

Press [MENU/SET] while recording of the location information onto images is taking
place.
• During a suspended period, [±] is displayed.
Select the period with [±] to restart the recording process from the picture you left off.

∫ To delete the received location information

1 Select the menu. (P53)
MENU > [Playback] > [Location Logging] > [Delete Location Data]
2 Press 3/4 to select the period you want to delete, then press [MENU/SET].
• Confirmation screen is displayed. It is executed when [Yes] is selected.

Not available in these cases:

• Location information cannot be written to the following images or in the following situations:
– Images recorded after location information was sent to the camera (P263)
– Motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD]
– Images with location information already written to them
– Images protected by [Protect]
– When there is insufficient space left on the card
– When the Write-Protect switch to the card is set to the [LOCK] position
– Images recorded with other devices

230
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

[Beauty Retouch]
Apply effects similar to that of aesthetics or makeup to brighten up any face.

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Playback] > [Beauty Retouch]
2 Press 2/1 to select a picture, and then press [MENU/SET].
3 Press 2/1 to select the face of the person to edit,
and then press [MENU/SET].
• Only a person with an arrow can be selected.
(If only one person is detected, press [MENU/SET].)

4 Press 3/42/1 to select an item and effect. C B A

A: Items, B: Sub-items, C: Effects
2/1: Select A, B or C 5
4
3/4: Select a setting in A, B or C 3

• There are no sub-items for [Foundation] and [Smile]. 2

1
You can apply an effect in B. 0
• To add a different effect, return to A or B to select the OK
desired item.

A (Items) B (Sub-items) Description of settings

Reduces blemishes and dullness in
[ ] ([Clear Skin])
the skin while bringing out clearness.
Shiny areas of the skin are matted
[ ] ([Shine Removal])
down.
[Aesthetic Retouch] [ Eyes and teeth are whitened and
] ([Whitening])
beautified.
[ ] ([Lift Up]) Face lines are sharpened.

[ ] ([Eye Emphasis]) Eyes look bigger and defined.

[Foundation] — Adjusts foundation colour.

Colour of the lips is adjusted to
[ ] ([Lip Color])
highlight the texture.
[Make Up Emphasises structure of face through
[ ] ([Cheek Color])
Retouch] selection of shape and colour.
Raises level of gorgeousness
[ ] ([Eye Shadow])
through colour selection.
[Smile] — Give the subject a smile.

231
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

5 After finishing the picture editing, press [MENU/SET].

• Confirmation screen is displayed.
Selecting [Yes] displays images before application and after application.
6 Press [MENU/SET].
• Confirmation screen is displayed.
It is executed when [Yes] is selected.

• Two or more people may not be edited at once. Save the picture first, and then select the next
person.
• The brightness and colour of pictures you are checking before saving may differ to the actual
picture that is saved.
• Intended retouching may not be possible when the face detection is not performed properly.
• When a subject is wearing glasses, the desired retouch may not be possible.
• When a picture is bright due to reflected light from a flash or the sun, the retouching effect may
be less pronounced.
• To take pictures appropriate for [Beauty Retouch]:
– Record a large, frontal view of the face
– Avoid taking pictures in a very dark place
– Clearly record the part you intend to retouch
• With certain image colouring, such as that of black and white images, the retouching effect may
not work.
• Reallusion is a trademark of Reallusion Inc.

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:
– Pictures taken in Panorama Shot Mode
– Motion pictures
– Pictures taken with [ ]
– Pictures in which faces cannot be detected.

232
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

[Clear Retouch]
You can erase unnecessary parts recorded
on the pictures taken.
• The erasure operation can only be performed
by touching. [Clear Retouch] automatically
enables the touch operation.

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Playback] > [Clear Retouch]
2 Press 2/1 to select a picture, and then press [MENU/SET].
3 Drag your finger over the part you want to delete.
• The parts to be erased are coloured.
• Touching [Undo] will return the coloured part back to its
previous state. 5(029(

6&$/,1*

8QGR 6HW

Erasing details (enlarging the display)

1 Touch [SCALING].
• Pinching out/pinching in (P48) the screen allows you
to enlarge/reduce it.
• You can also enlarge/reduce the picture by rotating 5(029(
the control dial. 6&$/,1*
• Dragging the screen allows you to move the
8QGR 6HW
enlarged part.
2 Touch [REMOVE].
• This will bring you back to the operation of dragging your finger over the part you
want to delete. The part you want to delete can be dragged even while the picture is
enlarged.

4 Touch [Set].
• Preview screen is displayed.
5 Touch [Save] or press [MENU/SET].
• Confirmation screen is displayed. It is executed when [Yes] is selected.
Exit the menu after it is executed.

233
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

• Pictures may appear unnatural because the background of deleted parts is artificially created.
• For group pictures, perform [Clear Retouch] on each picture.
(They cannot be edited at once.)
• When [Clear Retouch] is performed on group pictures, they are saved as new pictures separate
from the original ones.

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:
– Pictures taken in Panorama Shot Mode
– Motion pictures
– Pictures taken with [ ]

234
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

[Title Edit]
You can add text (comments) to pictures. After text has been registered, it can be stamped
in prints using [Text Stamp] (P236).

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Playback] > [Title Edit] > [Single]/[Multi]

2 Select the picture.

• [’] is displayed for pictures with titles already registered.
[Single] setting
1 Press 2/1 to select the picture.
2 Press [MENU/SET].

6HW

[Multi] setting
1 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the picture and then press
[MENU/SET] (repeat).
• The setting is cancelled when [MENU/SET] is pressed 2.
again.
2 Press 2 to select [OK], and then press [MENU/SET]
to execute.

3 Enter the text. (P69)

• Exit the menu after it is set.

• To delete the title, erase all the text in the text input screen.
• You can print out texts (comments) using the software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (P308).
• You can set up to 100 pictures at one time with [Multi].

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:
– Motion pictures
– Images recorded with [Quality] set to [ ], [ ] or [ ]

235
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

[Text Stamp]
You can stamp the recording date/time, name, location, travel date or title onto the
recorded pictures.

LISA

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Playback] > [Text Stamp] > [Single]/[Multi]

2 Select the picture.

• [‘] appears on screen if the picture is stamped with text.
[Single] setting
1 Press 2/1 to select the picture.
2 Press [MENU/SET].

6HW
[Multi] setting
1 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the picture and then press
[MENU/SET] (repeat).
• The setting is cancelled when [MENU/SET] is pressed 2.
again.
2 Press 2 to select [OK], and then press [MENU/SET]
to execute.

3 Press 3/4 to select [Set], and then press [MENU/SET].

236
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

4 Press 3/4 to select text stamp items, and then press [MENU/SET].
5 Press 3/4 to select the settings, and then press [MENU/SET].
[W/O TIME]: Stamp the year, month and date.
[Shooting Date] [WITH TIME]: Stamp the year, month, day, hour and minutes.
[OFF]
[ ]
([Face
Recognition]): Name registered in [Face Recog.] will be
stamped.
[Name]
[ ]
([Baby/Pet]): Name registered in [Profile Setup] will be
stamped.
[OFF]
[ON]: Stamps the travel destination name set under
[Location] [Location].
[OFF]
[ON]: Stamps the travel date set under [Travel Date].
[Travel Date]
[OFF]
[ON]: Title input in the [Title Edit] will be stamped.
[Title]
[OFF]

6 Press [ ].
7 Press 3 to select [OK], and then press [MENU/SET].
• Confirmation screen is displayed. It is executed when [Yes] is selected.
Exit the menu after it is executed.

237
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

• When you print pictures stamped with text, the date will be printed over the stamped text if you
specify printing of the date at the photo shop or on the printer.
• You can set up to 100 pictures at one time in [Multi].
• The picture quality may deteriorate when text stamping is carried out.
• Depending on the printer being used, some characters may be cut at printing. Check before
printing.
• When you stamp pictures in a group, the stamped ones are saved separately from the original
ones in the group.

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:
– Motion pictures
– Pictures taken in Panorama Shot Mode
– Pictures recorded without setting the clock and title
– Pictures stamped with [Text Stamp]
– Pictures taken with [ ]

238
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

[Video Divide]
Recorded motion picture can be divided in two. It is recommended for when you want to
divide a part you need with a part you do not need.
Dividing a motion picture is permanent. Decide before you divide!

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Playback] > [Video Divide]
2 Press 2/1 to select the motion picture to divide, and then press [MENU/SET].
3 Press 3 at the location to divide.
• You can finely adjust the location for division by pressing 2/
1 while the motion picture is paused.

4 Press 4.
• Confirmation screen is displayed. It is executed when [Yes] is selected.
Exit the menu after it is executed.
• Motion picture may be lost if the card or battery is removed while processing the dividing.

Not available in these cases:

• Avoid trying to divide motion picture near the very beginning or end of the motion picture.
• This function is not available in the following case:
– Motion pictures with a short recording time

239
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

[Time Lapse Video]

This function allows you to create a motion picture from a picture group recorded with
[Time Lapse Shot].
The created motion picture is saved in MP4 recording format.

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Playback] > [Time Lapse Video]
2 Select the [Time Lapse Shot] picture group with 2/1, and then press [MENU/
SET].
3 Create a motion picture by selecting the methods for creating it.
• The steps are the same as those for creating a motion picture following the recording of
[Time Lapse Video].
Refer to step 5 onwards on P173 for details.
Also refer to the notes on P174 for created motion pictures.

[Stop Motion Video]

A Motion picture is created from group pictures taken with [Stop Motion Animation].
Created motion pictures are saved in MP4 recording format.

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Playback] > [Stop Motion Video]
2 Select the Stop Motion Animation group with 2/1, and then press [MENU/SET].
3 Create a motion picture by selecting the methods for creating it.
• The steps are the same as those for creating a motion picture following the recording of
[Stop Motion Animation].
Refer to step 8 onwards on P177 for details.
Also refer to the notes on P178 for created motion pictures.

240
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

[Resize]
To allow easy posting to web pages, attachment to e-mail etc., picture size (number of
pixels) is reduced.

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Playback] > [Resize] > [Single]/[Multi]

2 Select the picture and size.

[Single] setting
1 Press 2/1 to select the picture, and then press 4:3
L 16
[MENU/SET].
2 Press 3/4 to select the size, and then press [MENU/ 4:3
M 8

SET]. 4:3
S 4

• Confirmation screen is displayed. It is executed when

6HW
[Yes] is selected.
Exit the menu after it is executed.
[Multi] setting
1 Press 3/4 to select the size, and then press [MENU/
SET].
2 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the picture, and then press 2.
[MENU/SET] to set (repeat).
• The setting is cancelled when [MENU/SET] is pressed
again.
3 Press 2 to select [OK], and then press [MENU/SET] to
execute.
• Confirmation screen is displayed. It is executed when
[Yes] is selected.
Exit the menu after it is executed.

241
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

• You can set up to 100 pictures at one time in [Multi].

• The picture quality of the resized picture will deteriorate.

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:
– Motion pictures
– Pictures taken in Panorama Shot Mode
– Group Pictures
– Pictures stamped with [Text Stamp]
– Pictures taken with [ ]

242
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

[Cropping]
You can enlarge and then clip the important part of the recorded picture.

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Playback] > [Cropping]
2 Press 2/1 to select the picture, and then press [MENU/SET].
3 Use the control dial and press 3/4/2/1 to select the parts to be cropped.
Control dial (right): Enlargement
Control dial (left): Reduction
3/4/2/1: Move
• You can also touch [ ]/[ ] to enlarge/reduce.
• You can also move by dragging on the screen.
4 Press [MENU/SET].
• Confirmation screen is displayed. It is executed when [Yes] is selected.
Exit the menu after it is executed.

• The picture quality of the cropped picture will deteriorate.

• Crop one picture at a time when you want to crop the pictures in a picture group.
(You cannot edit all pictures in a group at once.)
• When you crop pictures in a group, the cropped ones are saved separately from the original
ones in the group.
• Information regarding the Face Recognition in the original picture will not be copied to images
having undergone [Cropping].

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:
– Motion pictures
– Pictures taken in Panorama Shot Mode
– Pictures stamped with [Text Stamp]
– Pictures taken with [ ]

243
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

[Rotate]/[Rotate Disp.]
This mode allows you to automatically display pictures vertically if they were recorded
holding the camera vertically or rotate pictures manually in 90o steps.

[Rotate] (The picture is rotated manually)

• The [Rotate] function is disabled when [Rotate Disp.] is set to [OFF].

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Playback] > [Rotate]
2 Press 2/1 to select the picture and then press [MENU/SET].
• The [Rotate] function is disabled for Group Pictures.
3 Select the rotation direction.
:
The picture rotates clockwise in steps of 90o.
:
The picture rotates counter-clockwise in steps of 90o.
• Exit the menu after it is set.

[Rotate Disp.] (The picture is automatically rotated and displayed)

Select the menu. (P53)
MENU > [Playback] > [Rotate Disp.] > [ON]
• The pictures are displayed without being rotated when you select [OFF].
• Exit the menu after it is set.

Not available in these cases:

• When you play back pictures on a PC, they cannot be displayed in the rotated direction unless
the OS or software is compatible with Exif.
Exif is a file format for still pictures which allows recording information etc. to be added. It was
established by “JEITA (Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association)”.
• [Rotate Disp.] may not work on a screen that plays back multiple pictures, such as the one
displayed after [Delete Multi] is selected.

244
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

[Favorite]
You can do the following if a mark has been added to pictures and they have been set as
favourites.
• Play back the pictures set as favourites only as a slide show.
• Play back only the pictures set as favourites. ([Favorite Play])
• Delete all the pictures not set as favourites. ([All Delete Except Favorite])

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Playback] > [Favorite] > [Single]/[Multi]

2 Select the picture.

[Single] setting
Press 2/1 to select the picture, and then press [MENU/
SET].
• The setting is cancelled when [MENU/SET] is pressed again.
• Exit the menu after it is set.
6HW&DQFHO
[Multi] setting
Press 3/4/2/1 to select the picture, and then press
[MENU/SET] to set (repeat). 1 2 3
• The setting is cancelled when [MENU/SET] is pressed again.
• Exit the menu after it is set. 4 5 6

6HW&DQFHO

∫ Cancelling all the [Favorite] settings

Select the menu. (P53)
MENU > [Playback] > [Favorite] > [Cancel]
• Confirmation screen is displayed. It is executed when [Yes] is selected.
Exit the menu after it is executed.
• In [Playback Mode], the [Cancel] is disabled.

• You can set up to 999 pictures as favourites.

• When you set pictures in a group as [Favorite], the number of your [Favorite] pictures is
displayed on the [Favorite] icon of the group’s top picture.

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following case:
– Pictures taken with [ ]

245
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

[Print Set]
DPOF “Digital Print Order Format” is a system that allows the user to select which pictures
to print, how many copies of each picture to print and whether or not to print the recording
date on the pictures when using a DPOF compatible photo printer or photo printing store.
For details, ask at your photo printing store.
When you set [Print Set] for a group pictures, the print setting for the number of prints will
be applied to every picture in the group.

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Playback] > [Print Set] > [Single]/[Multi]

2 Select the picture.

[Single] setting
Press 2/1 to select the picture, and then press [MENU/
SET]. 

&RXQW 1
'DWH 6HW

[Multi] setting
Press 3/4/2/1 to select the picture and then press 
[MENU/SET]. 1 2 3

4 5 6
&RXQW 1
'DWH 6HW

3 Press 3/4 to set the number of prints, and then press [MENU/SET] to set.
• When [Multi] has been selected
– Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each picture.
(It is not possible to use the same setting for a multiple number of pictures.)
• [999+] is displayed on the screen, if the total number of prints you set for a group pictures
is more than 1000 pictures.
• Exit the menu after it is set.

246
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

∫ Cancelling all the [Print Set] settings

Select the menu. (P53)
MENU > [Playback] > [Print Set] > [Cancel]
• Confirmation screen is displayed. It is executed when [Yes] is selected.
Exit the menu after it is executed.

∫ To print the date

After setting the number of prints, set/cancel printing with the recording date by pressing
1.
• Depending on the photo printing store or the printer, the date may not be printed even if you set
to print the date. For further information, ask at your photo printing store or refer to the
operating instructions for the printer.
• The date print feature is disabled for pictures that are stamped with text.

• The number of prints can be set from 0 to 999.

• Depending on the printer, the date print settings of the printer may take precedence so check if
this is the case.
• It may not be possible to use the print settings with other equipment. In this case, cancel all the
settings, and reset the settings.
• When you set pictures in a group to [Print Set], the number of pictures added to [Print Set] and
the total number of pictures to be printed are displayed on the [Print Set] icon of the group’s top
picture.

Not available in these cases:

• This function is not available in the following cases:
– Motion pictures
– Pictures taken with [ ]
– File that does not comply with the DCF standard

247
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

[Protect]
You can set protection for pictures you do not want to delete by mistake.

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Playback] > [Protect] > [Single]/[Multi]

2 Select the picture.

[Single] setting
Press 2/1 to select the picture, and then press [MENU/
SET].
• The setting is cancelled when [MENU/SET] is pressed
again.
• Exit the menu after it is set.
6HW&DQFHO

[Multi] setting
Press 3/4/2/1 to select the pictures and then press
[MENU/SET] (repeat). 1 2 3

• The setting is cancelled when [MENU/SET] is pressed

4 5 6
again.
• Exit the menu after it is set. 6HW&DQFHO

∫ Cancelling all the [Protect] settings

Select the menu. (P53)
MENU > [Playback] > [Protect] > [Cancel]
• Confirmation screen is displayed. It is executed when [Yes] is selected.
Exit the menu after it is executed.

Even if you do not protect pictures on a card, they cannot be deleted when the
card’s Write-Protect switch is set to [LOCK].

• The [Protect] feature is only designed to work with this camera.

• Even if you protect pictures on a card, they will be deleted if the card is formatted.
• When you set pictures in a group to [Protect], the number of pictures with the [Protect] setting is
displayed on the [Protect] icon of the group’s top picture.

248
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

[Face Rec Edit]

You can clear and replace all information relating to face recognition in selected images.

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Playback] > [Face Rec Edit] > [REPLACE]/[DELETE]
2 Press 2/1 to select the picture and then press [MENU/SET].
3 Press 2/1 to select the person and then press [MENU/SET].
4 (When [REPLACE] is selected)
Press 3/4/2/1 to select the person to replace and then press [MENU/SET].
• Confirmation screen is displayed. It is executed when [Yes] is selected.
Exit the menu after it is executed.

• Cleared information regarding the [Face Recog.] cannot be restored.

• When all Face Recognition information in a picture has been cancelled, the picture will not be
categorised using Face Recognition in [Category Play].
• The Face Recognition information of pictures in a group has to be edited at once.
(You cannot edit one picture at a time.)
• Editing of group pictures can be performed only on the first picture of each set.

[Picture Sort]
You can set the order in which the camera displays images during playback.
1 Select the menu. (P53)
MENU > [Playback] > [Picture Sort]
2 Press 3/4 to select an item and then press [MENU/SET].
Displays images by folder name/file name. This display format allows
[FILE NAME]
you to locate images in the card easily.
Displays images by recording date. If the card contains pictures taken
[DATE/TIME] with more than one camera, this display format is convenient for
looking for images.
• Exit the menu after it is set.

• When you insert another card, images may not be displayed by [DATE/TIME] first. The images
will be displayed by [DATE/TIME] if you wait for a while.

249
10. Playing Back and Editing Images

[Delete Confirmation]
This sets which option, [Yes] or [No], will be highlighted first
when the confirmation screen for deleting a picture is
displayed.
It is set to [“No” first] at the time of purchase.
Yes No

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Playback] > [Delete Confirmation]
2 Press 3/4 to select an item and then press [MENU/SET].
[“Yes” first] [Yes] is highlighted first, so deletion can be done quickly.
[“No” first] [No] is highlighted first. Accidental deletion of pictures is avoided.

• Exit the menu after it is set.

250
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

Wi-FiR function
∫ Use the camera as a wireless LAN device
When using equipment or computer systems that require more reliable security than
wireless LAN devices, ensure that the appropriate measures are taken for safety designs
and defects for the systems used. Panasonic will not take any responsibility for any
damage that arises when using the camera for any purpose other than as a wireless LAN
device.

∫ Use of the Wi-Fi function of this camera is presumed to be in countries where this
camera is sold
There is the risk that the camera violates the radiowave regulations if used in countries
other than those where this camera is sold, and Panasonic takes no responsibility for any
violations.

∫ There is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be intercepted
Please note that there is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be
intercepted by a third party.

∫ Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or
interference
• Do not use the camera in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or interference, such as
near microwave ovens. These may cause the interruption of the radio waves.
• Using the camera near devices such as microwave ovens or cordless telephones that use the
2.4 GHz radio wave band may cause a decrease in performance in both devices.

∫ Do not connect to the wireless network you are not authorised to use
When the camera utilises its Wi-Fi function, wireless networks will be searched
automatically. When this happens, wireless networks that you are not authorised to use
(SSID¢) may be displayed, however do not attempt to connect to the network as it may be
considered as unauthorised access.
¢ SSID refers to the name that is used to identify a network over a wireless LAN connection. If
the SSID matches for both devices, transmission is possible.

∫ Before Use
• Set the date and time settings in advance. (P33)
• To use the Wi-Fi function on this unit, a wireless access point or a destination device equipped
with the wireless LAN function is required.

251
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

∫ About the Wi-Fi connection lamp

Lit blue: The Wi-Fi connection is on standby

Blinking blue: Sending/receiving data through the Wi-Fi connection
∫ About the [Wi-Fi] button
[Wi-Fi]/[Fn1] button can be used in two ways, as [Wi-Fi] or as
[Fn1] (function 1).
At the time of purchase, it is initially set to [Wi-Fi].
• Refer to P59 for details about the function button.
• When you activate Self Shot Mode by rotating the LCD monitor,
the [Wi-Fi]/[Fn1] button works as a shutter button.

Pressing [Wi-Fi] before connecting to Wi-Fi

(When connecting to a smartphone)
• The information required for connecting the smartphone to this
unit is displayed. (P256)
• You can select the following items by pressing [DISP.].
(You can also display the same menu by performing the following
operations:
MENU > [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function]. )

[New Connection]
[Select a destination from History] (P293)
[Select a destination from Favorite] (P293)
• These operating instructions describe the procedure for [New Connection].

What you can do with the [Wi-Fi] button when connected to Wi-Fi
• Following items can be selected.
[Terminate the Connection] Terminates the Wi-Fi connection.
¢1 Terminates the Wi-Fi connection, and allows you to select
[Change the Destination]
a different Wi-Fi connection.
[Change Settings for Sending Refer to P297 for details.
Images]¢2
Registering the current connection destination or the
[Register the Current Destination
¢1 connection method, you can easily connect with the same
to Favorite]
connection method next time.
[Network Address] Displays the MAC address and IP address of this unit.
¢1 These items are not displayed when you press 4 to send the displayed image to a web
service (P281) or when you change the settings for sending images or terminate the
connection.
¢2 This is not displayed when the destination of [Remote Shooting & View], [Playback on TV] or
[Send Images Stored in the Camera] is set to [Printer].

252
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

∫ Describing method
When “select [Select a destination from History]”, etc. is
described in a step, perform any of the following operations.
Button operation: Select [Select a destination from
History] with the cursor button, and
then press [MENU/SET].
Touch operation: Touch [Select a destination from
History].

• The camera cannot be used to connect to a public wireless LAN connection.

• Use a IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g or IEEE802.11n compatible device when using a wireless
access point.
• We strongly recommend that you set an encryption to maintain information security.
• It is recommended to use a fully charged battery when sending images.
• When the battery indicator is flashing red, the connection with other equipment may not start or
the connection may be disrupted.
(A message such as [Communication error] is displayed.)
• When sending images on a mobile network, high packet communication fees may be incurred
depending on the details of your contract.
• Pictures may not be completely sent depending on radio wave conditions. If the connection is
terminated while sending pictures, pictures with missing sections may be sent.
• Do not remove the memory card or battery or move to an area without any reception
while sending images.
• The monitor display may become distorted for an instant while connected to the service,
however this will not affect the image being sent.

253
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

What you can do with the Wi-Fi function

Controlling with a Smartphone/Tablet (P255)

Recording with a smartphone (P261)
Playing back pictures in the camera
(P262)
Saving images stored in the camera
(P262)
Sending images to an SNS (P263)
Writing location information on images stored in the camera (P263)
Combining motion pictures recorded with Snap Movie according to
your preference on a smartphone/tablet (P265)

Easy connection
By pressing [Wi-Fi], you can easily connect the
camera to a smartphone or tablet.

Displaying pictures on a TV (P269)

Printing Wirelessly (P270)

When sending images to AV device (P271)

You can send pictures and motion pictures to AV devices in your house
(home AV devices).

When sending images to PC (P273)

Using Web services (P277)

You can send pictures and motion pictures to an SNS, etc. via “LUMIX
CLUB”.
By using [Cloud Sync. Service], you can receive pictures and motion pictures
on a PC or smartphone.

These operating instructions refer to both smartphones and tablets as “smartphones” from
this point on unless noted otherwise.

254
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

Controlling with a Smartphone/Tablet

Using a smartphone, you can record images on the
camera and save them.
You need to install “Panasonic Image App” (referred to
as “Image App” from this point on) on your
smartphone.

Installing the smartphone/tablet app “Image App”

The “Image App” is an application provided by Panasonic.
• OS
App for AndroidTM: Android 4.0 or higher
App for iOS: iOS 7.0 or higher

1 Connect the smartphone to a network.

2 (Android) Select “Google PlayTM Store”.
(iOS) Select “App StoreSM”.
3 Enter “Panasonic Image App” or “LUMIX” into the search box.
4 Select “Panasonic Image App” and install it.

• Use the latest version.

• Supported OSs are current as of January 2016 and are subject to change.
• Read the [Help] in the “Image App” menu for further details on how to operate.
• The screen differs depending on the OS.
• The screens and procedures described from this point on are those at the time when the model
first became available for purchase. The screens and procedures may change with version
updates.
• The service may not be able to be used properly depending on the type of smartphone being
used.
For information on the “Image App”, refer to the support site below.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(This Site is English only.)
• When downloading the app on a mobile network, high packet communication fees may be
incurred depending on the details of your contract.

255
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

Connecting to a smartphone/tablet
You can directly connect the camera to a smartphone with ease by pressing [Wi-Fi].
When [Wi-Fi Password] is set to the default setting [OFF], third parties may intercept
Wi-Fi radio waves and collect the content of communications. To set [Wi-Fi Password] to
[ON], refer to P257.

Preparations
(On the camera) (On your smartphone)
• Set [Wi-Fi Password] to [OFF]. (P298) • Install the “Image App” in advance. (P255)

1 Press [Wi-Fi] on the camera.

• The information required for connecting the smartphone to
this unit (SSID) is displayed.
A SSID

• To change the connection method, refer to P260.

• You can also set up a Wi-Fi connection to the camera by
selecting the following menu items:
MENU > [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi
Function] > [New Connection] > [Remote
Shooting & View]
A

2 Operate the smartphone.

• The connection method differs according to your smartphone.
• When the connection is complete, a message indicating that the smartphone is connected
is displayed on its screen.
(After this operation, it may take a while for the connection to be completed.)

If you are using an iOS device

1 Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the setting menu of the smartphone.

2 Select the SSID displayed on the screen of the camera.

Wi-Fi

0123456789ABC

3 Start “Image App”. (P255)

• The connection confirmation screen is displayed on the camera. Select [Yes]. (Only
when connecting for the first time)

256
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

If you are using an Android device

1 Start “Image App”. (P255)

2 Select [Wi-Fi].
3 Select the SSID displayed on the screen of the camera.
• The connection confirmation screen is displayed on the camera. Select [Yes]. (Only
when connecting for the first time)

∫ Using a password to set up a connection

When [Wi-Fi Password] is set to [ON], you scan a QR code or manually enter a password to
set up a connection. Taking either of these steps will improve your security.

Preparations
(On the camera) (On your smartphone)
• Set [Wi-Fi Password] to [ON]. (P298) • Install the “Image App” in advance. (P255)

1 Press [Wi-Fi] on the camera.

2 Operate the smartphone.
• The connection method differs according to your smartphone.

If you are using an iOS device

When scanning the QR code to set up a connection
(If you are reconnecting the camera, steps 1 to 5 are not required)
1 Start “Image App”. (P255)

2 Select [QR code], and then select [OK].

257
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

3 Using “Image App”, scan the QR code displayed

on the screen of the camera.
• If you press [MENU/SET] on the camera, the QR
code will be enlarged. When it is difficult to scan
the QR code, try enlarging it.
A SSID and password
B QR code A B
4 Install the profile.
• A message will be displayed on the browser.
• If the smartphone is locked with a passcode, enter the passcode to unlock the
smartphone.
5 Press the home button to close the browser.
6 Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the setting menu of the smartphone.

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi

0123456789ABC

7 Select the SSID displayed on the screen of the

camera.
Wi-Fi

0123456789ABC

8 Return to the home screen, and then start “Image

App”. (P255)

258
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

When using an SSID and password to set up a connection

1 Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the setting menu of the smartphone.
2 Select the SSID displayed on the screen of the
camera.
Wi-Fi

0123456789ABC

3 Enter the password displayed on the screen of the

camera.
(Only when connecting for the first time)
4 Start “Image App”. (P255)
If you are using an Android device
When scanning the QR code to set up a connection
1 Start “Image App”. (P255)

2 Select [QR code].

3 Using “Image App”, scan the QR code displayed
on the screen of the camera.
• If you press [MENU/SET] on the camera, the QR
code will be enlarged. When it is difficult to scan
the QR code, try enlarging it.

When using an SSID and password to set up a connection

1 Start “Image App”. (P255)
2 Select [Wi-Fi].
3 Select the SSID displayed on the screen of the
camera.

4 Enter the password displayed on the screen of

the camera.
(Only when connecting for the first time)
• If you mark the box that enables the smartphone to display the password, you
can see the password as you enter it.

259
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

∫ Changing the connection method

To change the connection method, follow the steps below:
Wi-Fi > [DISP.] button > [New Connection] >
[Remote Shooting & View] > [DISP.] button

When connecting with [Via Network]:

On the camera
1 Select [Via Network].
• Follow the connection procedure described on P290 to connect the camera to a wireless
access point.

On your smartphone
2 Turn on the Wi-Fi function.
3 Connect the smartphone to the wireless access point to which the camera is
connected.
4 Start “Image App”. (P255)
When connecting with [WPS Connection]¢ in [Direct]:
On the camera
1 Select [Direct].
• Follow the connection procedure described on P292 to connect the camera to the
smartphone.

On your smartphone
2 Start “Image App”. (P255)
¢ WPS is a function that allows you to easily set up a connection with a wireless LAN device
and make security-related settings. To check whether your smartphone supports the
function, refer to the operating instructions of the smartphone.

∫ Terminating the connection

After use, terminate the connection to the smartphone.
1 Press [Wi-Fi] on the camera. (P252)
(You can also terminate the connection by performing the following operations on the
recording screen: MENU > [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [Yes].)
2 On the smartphone, close “Image App”.
(If you are using an iOS device)
On the screen of “Image App”, press the home button to close the app.
(If you are using an Android device)
On the screen of “Image App”, press the return button twice to close the app.

260
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

Taking images via a smartphone/tablet (remote recording)

1 Connect to a smartphone. (P256)
2 Operate the smartphone.
1 Select [ ].
2 Record an image.
• The recorded images are saved in the camera.
• Some settings are not available.
• When a high ambient temperature, continuous recording
or other conditions cause the camera to overheat, the A
following restrictions will occur to protect the camera.

Wait until the camera cools down.

– Continuous recording, motion picture recording, and
the Wi-Fi connection will be temporarily disabled.
– If you continue recording even when [ ] is flashing
on the screen, a message will be displayed and the
camera will turn off automatically.

Not available in these cases:

• In the following case, remote recording does not work:
– Panorama Shot Mode
– Self Shot Mode
– When [Snap Movie] is set to [ON]

∫ Taking a picture while jumping

When you hold your smartphone and jump, the camera’s shutter can be released
automatically as the smartphone detects the peak of the jump. This function is convenient
for taking a picture while jumping.
Operate the smartphone.
[ ] > [Live Control Settings] > [Jump Snap] > Select the sensitivity.
• [ ] will be displayed on the remote recording screen of the smartphone.
• We recommend that you take test pictures to determine the camera’s angle and how hard you
jump and to make any desired adjustments.
• For details, refer to the help section in the “Image App” menu.

261
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

Playing back images in the camera

1 Connect to a smartphone. (P256) 
2 Operate the smartphone.
1 Select [ ].
• You can switch the images to be
displayed by selecting the icon (A)
on the top left of the screen. To 
display images stored in the camera,
select [LUMIX].
2 Touch the image to enlarge it.

Saving images stored in the camera

1 Connect to a smartphone. (P256) 
2 Operate the smartphone.
1 Select [ ].
• You can switch the images to be
displayed by selecting the icon (A)
on the top left of the screen. To 
display images stored in the camera, 
select [LUMIX].
2 Touch and hold an image, and drag
it to save it.
• The function can be assigned to the top, bottom,
left or right according to your preference. 
• Pictures in RAW format and motion pictures of
[AVCHD] cannot be saved.
• 3D pictures (MPO format) will be saved as 2D pictures (JPEG format).

262
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

Sending images in the camera to an SNS

1 Connect to a smartphone. (P256) 
2 Operate the smartphone.
1 Select [ ].
• You can switch the images to be 
displayed by selecting the icon (A)
on the top left of the screen. To

display images stored in the camera,
select [LUMIX].
2 Touch and hold an image, and drag
it to send it to an SNS, etc.
• The image is sent to a web service
such as an SNS.

• The function can be assigned to the top, bottom,
left or right according to your preference.

Adding location information to images stored in the camera from a

smartphone/tablet
You can send location information acquired with a smartphone to the camera. After
sending the information, you can also write it on images stored in the camera.
• Once the location information is sent to the camera, you can also write it on images by
performing [Location Logging] (P230) in the [Playback] menu.

GPS 




1 Start recording location information
2 Start recording images
3 Finish recording the location information
4 Sending and writing location information
• Location information different from that at the time of recording may be written. Keep the
following points in mind:
– Set the camera’s [Home] setting in [World Time] to your region.
– Once you start recording location information with your smartphone, do not change the
camera’s [Home] setting in [World Time].
• Location information cannot be written on images that were recorded when the clock was not
set.

263
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

∫ Operate the smartphone

1 Connect to a smartphone. (P256)
2 Select [ ].
3 Select [Geotagging].
4 Select an icon.

Start/stop recording location information.

Sending and writing location information.

• Follow the on-screen messages to operate the smartphone.
• Images with location information are indicated with [ ].

• Cautions for Use:

Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, the likeness rights, etc. of the subject
when you use this function. Use at your own risk.
• On the smartphone, you can set the acquisition interval of location information and check the
transfer status of location information.
Refer to [Help] in the “Image App” menu for details.
Not available in these cases:
• Location information cannot be written to the following images or in the following situations:
– Images recorded after location information was sent to the camera
– Motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD]
– Images with location information already written to them
– Images protected by [Protect]
– When there is insufficient space left on the card
– When the Write-Protect switch to the card is set to the [LOCK] position
– Images recorded with other devices

264
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

Combining motion pictures recorded with Snap Movie according to

your preference on a smartphone/tablet
Using a smartphone, you can combine motion pictures recorded with the camera’s [Snap
Movie] function (P212). Music can be added to motion pictures to be combined. In
addition, you can save the combined motion picture or upload it on a web service.




 

A Web service
1 Record motion pictures with [Snap Movie].
2 Send the recorded motion pictures.
3 Edit the motion pictures.
4 A: Combine the motion pictures, save the combined motion picture, and send it to a
web service.
B: Combine the motion pictures, and save the combined motion picture.

∫ Combining motion pictures by operating a smartphone

1 Connect to a smartphone. (P256)
2 Operate the smartphone.
1 Select [ ].
2 Select [Snap Movie].
• [Snap Movie] motion pictures with recent recording dates will be randomly selected
and automatically sent to the smartphone.
• When motion pictures with recent recording dates are not available, a screen that lets
you select motion pictures will be displayed. Select motion pictures and send them.
3 Edit the motion pictures.
• Operate the smartphone to edit the motion pictures, such as rearranging them,
deleting those that are unnecessary or adding music to them.
• You can combine the edited motion pictures and save the combined file on the
smartphone or upload it on a web service.
• Read the [Help] in the “Image App” menu for further details on how to operate.

• [Snap Movie] of the “Image App” requires a smartphone that supports Android OS 4.3 or higher.
• The iPhone 4 does not support [Snap Movie] of the “Image App”.

265
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

Sending images to a smartphone/tablet by controlling the camera

∫ Methods for sending and images that can be sent

JPEG RAW MP4 AVCHD 3D

Sending an image each time a recording is made

± — — — —
([Send Images While Recording])

Select and send the images

± — ± — —
([Send Images Stored in the Camera])

• Some images may not be played back or sent depending on the device.
• For information on the playback of images, check the operating instructions of the destination
device.
• For details on how to send images, refer to P295.

Preparations
• Install the “Image App” in advance. (P255)

Sending an image each time a recording is made ([Send Images While

≠ P267
Recording])

Select and send the images ([Send Images Stored in the Camera]) ≠ P268

266
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

Sending an image each time a recording is made ([Send Images While

Recording])
1 Select the menu. (P53)
MENU > [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >
[Send Images While Recording] > [Smartphone]
2 Select [Via Network] or [Direct], and connect. (P289)
On your smartphone
When connecting with [Via Network]:
1 Turn on the Wi-Fi function.
2 Select the wireless access point you want to connect to, and set.
3 Start “Image App”. (P255)
When connecting with [Wi-Fi Direct] or [WPS Connection] in [Direct]:
1 Start “Image App”. (P255)
When connecting with [Manual Connection] in [Direct]:
1 Turn on the Wi-Fi function.
2 Select the SSID that matches the one displayed on the screen of this unit.
• The connection confirmation screen is displayed on the camera. Select [Yes].
(Only when connecting for the first time)
3 Start “Image App”. (P255)
3 Select a device you want to connect.
4 Check the send settings, and select [Set].
• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (P297)
5 Take pictures.
• The pictures are sent automatically after taking them.
• To change the setting or disconnect, press [Wi-Fi]. (P252)
You cannot change the settings while sending pictures. Wait until sending is complete.
(You can also terminate the connection by performing the following operations:
MENU > [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [Yes])

267
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

Select and send the images ([Send Images Stored in the Camera])
1 Select the menu. (P53)
MENU > [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >
[Send Images Stored in the Camera] > [Smartphone]
2 Select [Via Network] or [Direct], and connect. (P289)
On your smartphone
When connecting with [Via Network]:
1 Turn on the Wi-Fi function.
2 Select the wireless access point you want to connect to, and set.
3 Start “Image App”. (P255)
When connecting with [Wi-Fi Direct] or [WPS Connection] in [Direct]:
1 Start “Image App”. (P255)
When connecting with [Manual Connection] in [Direct]:
1 Turn on the Wi-Fi function.
2 Select the SSID that matches the one displayed on the screen of this unit.
• The connection confirmation screen is displayed on the camera. Select [Yes].
(Only when connecting for the first time)
3 Start “Image App”. (P255)
3 Select a device you want to connect.
4 Check the send settings, and select [Set].
• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (P297)
5 Select [Single Select] or [Multi Select].
[Single Select] setting
1 Select the picture.
2 Select [Set].

6HW
[Multi Select] setting
1 Select the picture. (repeat)
• The setting is cancelled when the picture is selected
again. 2.
2 Select [OK].
• The number of pictures that can be sent by [Multi Select]
is limited.
• Confirmation screen is displayed. It is executed when [Yes] is selected.
• To change the send settings on a screen that is displayed after the image has been sent,
press [DISP.]. To terminate the connection, select [Exit].

268
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

Displaying pictures on a TV

You can display pictures on a TV that supports the

Digital Media Renderer (DMR) function of the DLNA
standard.

Preparations

Set the TV to DLNA waiting mode.

• Read the operating instructions for your TV.

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >
[Playback on TV]
2 Select [Via Network] or [Direct], and connect. (P289)
3 Select a device you want to connect.
• When the connection is established, the screen is displayed.
4 Take or play back pictures on this unit.
• To change the setting or disconnect, press [Wi-Fi]. (P252)
(You can also terminate the connection by performing the following operations:
MENU > [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [Yes])

• When a TV is connected to this unit, the TV screen may temporarily return to the status before
the connection. Pictures are displayed again when you take or play back pictures.
• [Effect] and [Sound] of the Slide Show are disabled.

Not available in these cases:

• Motion pictures cannot be played back.
• During the multi/calendar playback, pictures displayed on the screen of this unit are not
displayed on TV.

269
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

Printing Wirelessly

You can send images to a compatible printer, and print

them wirelessly.

∫ Methods for sending and images that can be sent

JPEG RAW MP4 AVCHD 3D

Select and send the images

± — — — —
([Send Images Stored in the Camera])

• Some images may not be sent depending on the device.

• For details on how to send images, refer to P295.

Preparations
• You can print out recorded pictures wirelessly from a PictBridge (wireless LAN-compatible)¢
printer.
¢ Compliant with the DPS over IP standards.
For details on the PictBridge (wireless LAN-compatible) printer, contact the respective
company.

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >
[Send Images Stored in the Camera] > [Printer]
2 Select [Via Network] or [Direct], and connect. (P289)
3 Select a printer you want to connect.
4 Select pictures, and then print.
• The procedure for selecting pictures is the same as the one for when the USB connection
cable is connected.
For details, refer to P315.
• To change the setting or disconnect, press [Wi-Fi]. (P252)
(You can also terminate the connection by pressing [ ].)

Not available in these cases:

• Motion pictures cannot be printed out.

270
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

When sending images to AV device

You can send pictures and motion pictures to AV devices in your house (home AV
devices).

A Wireless access point B Home AV device

∫ Methods for sending and images that can be sent

JPEG RAW MP4 AVCHD 3D

Sending an image each time a recording is made

± — — — ±
([Send Images While Recording])

Select and send the images

± — — — ±
([Send Images Stored in the Camera])

• Some images may not be played back or sent depending on the device.
• For information on the playback of images, check the operating instructions of the destination
device.
• For details on how to send images, refer to P295.

Preparations

When sending a picture to AV devices, set your device to DLNA waiting mode.
• Read the operating instructions of your device for details.

Sending an image each time a recording is made ([Send Images While

≠ P272
Recording])

Select and send the images ([Send Images Stored in the Camera]) ≠ P272

271
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

Sending an image each time a recording is made ([Send Images While

Recording])
1 Select the menu. (P53)
MENU > [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >
[Send Images While Recording] > [AV device]
2 Select [Via Network] or [Direct], and connect. (P289)
3 Select a device you want to connect.
4 Check the send settings, and select [Set].
• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (P297)
5 Take pictures.
• To change the setting or disconnect, press [Wi-Fi]. (P252)
You cannot change the settings while sending pictures. Wait until sending is complete.
(You can also terminate the connection by performing the following operations:
MENU > [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [Yes])

Select and send the images ([Send Images Stored in the Camera])
1 Select the menu. (P53)
MENU > [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >
[Send Images Stored in the Camera] > [AV device]
2 Select [Via Network] or [Direct], and connect. (P289)
3 Select a device you want to connect.
4 Check the send settings, and select [Set].
• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (P297)
5 Select [Single Select] or [Multi Select].
[Single Select] setting
1 Select the picture.
2 Select [Set].

6HW
[Multi Select] setting
1 Select the picture. (repeat)
• The setting is cancelled when the picture is selected
again. 2.
2 Select [OK].
• The number of pictures that can be sent by [Multi Select]
is limited.
• Confirmation screen is displayed. It is executed when [Yes] is selected.
• To change the send settings on a screen that is displayed after the image has been sent,
press [DISP.]. To terminate the connection, select [Exit].

272
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

When sending images to PC

You can send pictures and motion pictures recorded

with this unit to a PC.

∫ Methods for sending and images that can be sent

JPEG RAW MP4 AVCHD¢ 3D

Sending an image each time a recording is made

± ± — — ±
([Send Images While Recording])

Select and send the images

± ± ± ± ±
([Send Images Stored in the Camera])

¢ A motion picture recorded in [AVCHD] can be sent to [PC] if the file size is 4 GB or smaller. It
cannot be sent if the size is greater than 4 GB.

• Some images may not be played back or sent depending on the device.
• For information on the playback of images, check the operating instructions of the destination
device.
• For details on how to send images, refer to P295.

Preparations
(On the camera) (On your PC)
• If the workgroup of the destination PC has • Turn the computer on.
been changed from the standard setting, you • Prepare folders for receiving images on the
also need to change the setting of this unit in PC before sending a picture to the PC.
[PC Connection]. (P298) (P274)

Sending an image each time a recording is made ([Send Images While

≠ P275
Recording])

Select and send the images ([Send Images Stored in the Camera]) ≠ P276

273
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

To create a folder that receives images

• Create a PC user account [account name (up to 254 characters) and password (up to
32 characters)] consisting of alphanumeric characters. An attempt to create a receive folder
may fail if the account includes non-alphanumeric characters.

∫ When using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”

1 Install “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” to the PC. (P308)
2 Create a folder that receives images with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.
• To create the folder automatically, select [Auto-create]. To specify a folder, create a new
folder, or set a password to the folder, select [Create manually].
• For details, refer to the operating instructions of “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF).

∫ When not using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”

(For Windows)
Supported OS: Windows 7/Windows 8/Windows 8.1/Windows 10
Example: Windows 7
1 Select a folder you intend to use for receiving, then right-click.
2 Select [Properties], then enable sharing of the folder.
• For details, refer to the operating instructions of your PC or Help on the OS.

(For Mac)
Supported OS: OS X v10.5 to v10.11
Example: OS X v10.8
1 Select a folder you intend to use for receiving, then click on the items in the
following order.
[File] [Get Info]
2 Enable sharing of the folder.
• For details, refer to the operating instructions of your PC or Help on the OS.

274
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

Sending an image each time a recording is made ([Send Images While

Recording])
1 Select the menu. (P53)
MENU > [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >
[Send Images While Recording] > [PC]
2 Select [Via Network] or [Direct], and connect. (P289)
3 Select the PC you want to connect to.
• When the PC you want to connect to is not displayed, select [Manual Input], and enter the
computer name of the PC (NetBIOS name for Apple Mac computers).
4 Select the folder you want to send.
5 Check the send settings, and select [Set].
• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (P297)
6 Take pictures.
• To change the setting or disconnect, press [Wi-Fi]. (P252)
You cannot change the settings while sending pictures. Wait until sending is complete.
(You can also terminate the connection by performing the following operations:
MENU > [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [Yes])

275
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

Select and send the images ([Send Images Stored in the Camera])
1 Select the menu. (P53)
MENU > [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >
[Send Images Stored in the Camera] > [PC]
2 Select [Via Network] or [Direct], and connect. (P289)
3 Select the PC you want to connect to.
• When the PC you want to connect to is not displayed, select [Manual Input], and enter the
computer name of the PC (NetBIOS name for Apple Mac computers).
4 Select the folder you want to send.
5 Check the send settings, and select [Set].
• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (P297)
6 Select [Single Select] or [Multi Select].
[Single Select] setting
1 Select the picture.
2 Select [Set].

6HW
[Multi Select] setting
1 Select the picture. (repeat)
• The setting is cancelled when the picture is selected
again. 2.
2 Select [OK].
• The number of pictures that can be sent by [Multi Select]
is limited.
• Confirmation screen is displayed. It is executed when [Yes] is selected.
• To change the send settings on a screen that is displayed after the image has been sent,
press [DISP.]. To terminate the connection, select [Exit].

• Folders sorted by the sent date are created in the specified folder, and pictures are saved in
those folders.
• If the screen for a user account and password entry appears, enter the one you set on your PC.
• When the computer name (NetBIOS name for Apple Mac computers) contains a space (blank
character), etc., it may not be recognised correctly.
If a connection attempt fails, we recommend that you change the computer name (or NetBIOS
name) to the one consisting of only alphanumeric characters, with a maximum of
15 characters.

276
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

Using Web services

You can send pictures and motion pictures to an SNS, etc. via “LUMIX CLUB”.
By setting up automatic transfers of pictures and motion pictures to the Cloud Sync
Service, you can receive the transferred pictures or motion pictures on a PC or
smartphone.

LUMIX CLUB

A Wireless access point B Web service C Cloud Sync Service

Preparations

To send images to a web service or a cloud folder, you need to register to “LUMIX
CLUB” (P284).
To send images to a web service, you need to register the web service. (P279)

When sending images to web service ≠ P278

When sending images to [Cloud Sync. Service] ≠ P282

277
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

When sending images to web service

∫ Methods for sending and images that can be sent

JPEG RAW MP4 AVCHD 3D

Sending an image each time a recording is made

± — — — ±
([Send Images While Recording])

Select and send the images

± — ± — ±
([Send Images Stored in the Camera])

• Some images may not be played back or sent depending on the device.
• For information on the playback of images, check the web service.
• For details on how to send images, refer to P295.

Sending an image each time a recording is made ([Send Images While

≠ P279
Recording])

Select and send the images ([Send Images Stored in the Camera]) ≠ P280

• Images uploaded to the web service cannot be displayed or deleted with this camera. Check
images by accessing the web service with your smartphone or computer.
• If sending images fails, a report email outlining the failure will be sent to the email address
registered with “LUMIX CLUB”.
• Images may contain personal information that can be used to identify the user, such as a
title, the time and date when the images was taken, and the location where the image
was taken. Check this information before uploading images to web services.

• Panasonic assumes no responsibility for the damages resulting from the leakage, loss, etc.
of images uploaded on web services.
• When uploading images to the web service, do not delete images from this camera, even
after they have finished sending, until you have checked that they have been properly
uploaded to the web service. Panasonic assumes no responsibility for the damages
resulting from the deletion of images stored in this unit.

278
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

Registering web services

When sending images to web services, the web service being used must be registered
with the “LUMIX CLUB”. (P284)
• Check the “FAQ/Contact us” on the following site for compatible web services.
http://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/lumix_faqs/

Preparation:
Make sure that you have created an account on the web service you want to use, and
have the login information available.

1 Connect to the “LUMIX CLUB” site using a smartphone or computer.

http://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/
2 Enter your “LUMIX CLUB” login ID and password and log in to the service.
(P284)
3 Register your email address.
4 Select the web service to be used and register it.
• Follow the instructions on the screen to register the service.

Sending an image each time a recording is made ([Send Images While

Recording])
1 Select the menu. (P53)
MENU > [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >
[Send Images While Recording] > [Web service]
2 Select [Via Network], and connect. (P290)
3 Select a web service.
4 Check the send settings, and select [Set].
• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (P297)
5 Take pictures.
• To change the setting or disconnect, press [Wi-Fi]. (P252)
You cannot change the settings while sending pictures. Wait until sending is complete.
(You can also terminate the connection by performing the following operations:
MENU > [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [Yes])

279
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

Select and send the images ([Send Images Stored in the Camera])
1 Select the menu. (P53)
MENU > [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >
[Send Images Stored in the Camera] > [Web service]
2 Select [Via Network], and connect. (P290)
3 Select a web service.
4 Check the send settings, and select [Set].
• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (P297)
5 Select [Single Select] or [Multi Select].
[Single Select] setting
1 Select the picture.
2 Select [Set].

6HW
[Multi Select] setting
1 Select the picture. (repeat)
• The setting is cancelled when the picture is selected
again. 2.
2 Select [OK].
• The number of pictures that can be sent by [Multi Select]
is limited.
• Confirmation screen is displayed. It is executed when [Yes] is selected.
• To change the send settings on a screen that is displayed after the image has been sent,
press [DISP.]. To terminate the connection, select [Exit].

280
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

∫ Sending images in the camera to a web service with simple operations

Once you send an image, you can send other images to a web service with simple,
smartphone-like operations in an environment where a wireless access point connection is
available.
(The instructions below assume that you are already registered to “LUMIX CLUB”
and the camera has a record of a connection to a wireless access point.)
1 Display an image.
2 Press 4.
(When group pictures are selected, proceed to select
[Upload(Wi-Fi)].)
• The same operation can be performed by touching [ ].
SUB
(When group pictures are selected, touch [ MENU ], and select
[Upload(Wi-Fi)].)
3 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen.
4 Select a web service.
5 Check the send settings, and select [Set].
• The camera will connect to a previously connected wireless access point and sends the
image to a web service.
• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (P297)
• Step 4, 5 are not necessary when you continue to send another image.
The image will be sent to the same web service with the same send settings.
• To terminate the connection, press [Wi-Fi]. (P252)
You can also terminate the Wi-Fi connection by exiting the playback screen.

To change the settings for sending images or web service

• To change the send settings for sending images, press [Wi-Fi] when the camera is connected
to Wi-Fi. (P252)
• To change the web service, terminate the Wi-Fi connection, and perform the operations of step
1 and onwards again.

• If the camera has no records of connections to wireless access points that are available, a
screen that asks you to select a connection method is displayed. Select a connection method,
and connect the camera to a wireless access point. (P290)
• When you are not registered to “LUMIX CLUB”, a screen that asks you to acquire a new login
ID is displayed. Acquire a login ID and set a password. (P284)
• When group pictures are displayed continuously, all pictures in the group will be sent. When
group pictures are displayed one by one, the currently displayed picture will be sent.

281
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

When sending images to [Cloud Sync. Service]

∫ Using [Cloud Sync. Service] (As of January 2016)

Preparations

You need to register to “LUMIX CLUB” (P284) and configure the Cloud Sync. setting to
send a picture to a Cloud Folder.
For a PC, use “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (P308) to set up Cloud Sync settings. For a
smartphone, use “Image App” to set them up.

• If you set the picture destination to [Cloud Sync. Service], sent pictures are temporarily saved
in the cloud folder, and they can be synchronised with the device in use, such as the PC or
smartphone.
• A Cloud Folder stores transferred images for 30 days (up to 1000 pictures). Transferred images
are deleted automatically 30 days after the transfer. Furthermore, when the number of stored
images exceeds 1000, some images may be deleted depending on the [Cloud Limit] (P297)
setting even within 30 days after the transfer.
• When the download of images from a Cloud Folder to all specified devices is complete, images
may be deleted from the Cloud Folder even within 30 days after the transfer.

∫ Methods for sending and images that can be sent

JPEG RAW MP4 AVCHD 3D

Sending an image each time a recording is made

± — — — ±
([Send Images While Recording])

Select and send the images

± — ± — ±
([Send Images Stored in the Camera])

• Some images may not be played back or sent depending on the device.
• For information on the playback of images, check the operating instructions of the destination
device.
• For details on how to send images, refer to P295.

Sending an image each time a recording is made ([Send Images While

≠ P283
Recording])

Select and send the images ([Send Images Stored in the Camera]) ≠ P283

282
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

Sending an image each time a recording is made ([Send Images While

Recording])
1 Select the menu. (P53)
MENU > [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >
[Send Images While Recording] > [Cloud Sync. Service]
2 Select [Via Network], and connect. (P290)
3 Check the send settings, and select [Set].
• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (P297)
4 Take pictures.
• To change the setting or disconnect, press [Wi-Fi]. (P252)
You cannot change the settings while sending pictures. Wait until sending is complete.
(You can also terminate the connection by performing the following operations:
MENU > [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [Yes])

Select and send the images ([Send Images Stored in the Camera])
1 Select the menu. (P53)
MENU > [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [New Connection] >
[Send Images Stored in the Camera] > [Cloud Sync. Service]
2 Select [Via Network], and connect. (P290)
3 Check the send settings, and select [Set].
• To change the send setting, press [DISP.]. (P297)
4 Select [Single Select] or [Multi Select].
[Single Select] setting
1 Select the picture.
2 Select [Set].

6HW
[Multi Select] setting
1 Select the picture. (repeat)
• The setting is cancelled when the picture is selected
again. 2.
2 Select [OK].
• The number of pictures that can be sent by [Multi Select]
is limited.
• Confirmation screen is displayed. It is executed when [Yes] is selected.
• To change the send settings on a screen that is displayed after the image has been sent,
press [DISP.]. To terminate the connection, select [Exit].

283
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

Registering to the “LUMIX CLUB”

About the [LUMIX CLUB]

Acquire a “LUMIX CLUB” login ID (free).
If you register this unit to the “LUMIX CLUB”, you can synchronise images between the
devices you are using, or transfer these images to web services.
Use the “LUMIX CLUB” when uploading pictures to web services.
• You can set the same “LUMIX CLUB” login ID for this unit and a smartphone. (P287)

Refer to the “LUMIX CLUB” site for details.

http://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/
Please note:
• The service may be suspended due to regular maintenance or unexpected troubles, and
the service contents may be changed or added, without prior notice to the users.
• The service may be stopped in whole or in part with a reasonable period of advance notice.

Acquiring a new login ID ([New account])

1 Select the menu. (P53)
MENU > [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Setup] > [LUMIX CLUB]
2 Select [Set/Add Account].

3 Select [New account].

• Connect to the network.
Proceed to the next page by selecting [Next].
• A confirmation screen will be displayed if a login ID has
already been acquired for the camera. Select [Yes] to
acquire a new login ID, or [No] if you do not need to acquire
a new login ID.
4 Select the method for connecting to a wireless access point, and set.
• Refer to P290 for details.
• A setting screen will be displayed only when connecting for the first time.
Once you set the connection method, it will be saved on this unit and used when
connecting the next time. To change the wireless access point you want to connect to,
press [DISP.], and change the connection destination.
• Proceed to the next page by selecting [Next].

284
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

5 Read through the “LUMIX CLUB” terms of use and select [Agree].
• You can switch pages by 3/4.
• The display can be enlarged (2k) by rotating the control dial to the right.
• The enlarged display can be reset to its original size (1k) by rotating the control dial to the
left.
• You can move the position of the enlarged display with 3/4/2/1.
• Press [ ] to cancel the process without acquiring a login ID.
6 Enter a password.
• Enter any combination of 8 to 16 characters and numbers for the password.
• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” section on P69.
7 Check the login ID and select [OK].
• The login ID (12-digit number) will be displayed
automatically.
When logging in to the “LUMIX CLUB” with a computer,
you only need to enter the numbers.
• A message is displayed when the connection is complete.
Select [OK].
• Be sure to make a note of the login ID and password.
• Exit the menu after it is set.

285
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

Using the acquired login ID/Checking or changing the login ID or password ([Set
Login ID])
Preparation:
When using the acquired login ID, check the ID and password.
To change the “LUMIX CLUB” password on the camera, access the “LUMIX CLUB”
website from your smartphone or PC and change the “LUMIX CLUB” password in
advance.
• The login ID and password registered to the “LUMIX CLUB” cannot be changed on this unit.

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Setup] > [LUMIX CLUB]
2 Select [Set/Add Account].
3 Select [Set Login ID].
• The login ID and password are displayed.
• The password is displayed as “ ”.
• Close the menu if only checking the login ID.
4 Select the item to change.
5 Enter the login ID or password.
• Refer to “Entering Text” (P69) for information on how to
enter text.
• Enter the new password you have created on your
smartphone or PC into the camera. If the password differs
from the one you created on your smartphone or PC, you
will not be able to upload images.
• Exit the menu after it is set.

286
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

To set the same login ID for the camera and the smartphone/tablet
• Setting the same login ID on this unit and your smartphone is convenient for sending images on
this unit to other devices or web services.

When either this unit or the smartphone/tablet has acquired the login ID:
1 Connect this unit to the smartphone. (P256)
2 From the “Image App” menu, set the common login ID.
• The login IDs for this unit and the smartphone become the same.
• After connecting this unit to the smartphone, the setup screen for a common login ID may
appear when you display the playback screen. You can also set a common login ID by
following the on-screen instructions.
• This operation is not available for [Wi-Fi Direct] connection.

When this unit and the smartphone/tablet have acquired different login IDs:
(When you want to use the smartphone’s login ID for this unit)
Change the login ID and password for this unit to those acquired by the
smartphone.
(When you want to use this unit’s login ID for the smartphone)
Change the login ID and password for the smartphone to those acquired by this
unit.

Check the “LUMIX CLUB” terms of use

Check the details if the terms of use have been updated.

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Setup] > [LUMIX CLUB]
2 Select [Terms of use].
• The camera will connect to the network and the terms of use will be displayed.
Close the menu after checking the terms of use.

287
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

Delete your login ID and account from the “LUMIX CLUB”

Delete the login ID from the camera when transferring it to another party or disposing of it.
You can also delete your “LUMIX CLUB” account.

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Setup] > [LUMIX CLUB]
2 Select [Delete account].
• The message is displayed. Select [Next].
3 Select [Yes] in the login ID delete confirmation screen.
• The message is displayed. Select [Next].
4 Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen for deleting the “LUMIX CLUB”
account.
• If you want to continue using the service, selecting [No] will only delete the login ID.
Exit the menu after it is executed.
5 Select [Next].
• The login ID is deleted, and then the message notifying the deletion of your account is
displayed. Select [OK].
• Exit the menu after it is executed.

• Changes and other actions to login IDs can only be made to the login ID acquired with the
camera.

288
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

About Connections
You can select a connection method after selecting a Wi-Fi function and a destination.
Performing a direct connection is convenient for when you are in a place away from home
where wireless access points are not available or for when connecting temporarily to a
device you do not usually use.
When connecting with the same settings as the previous ones, you can use the Wi-Fi
function quickly by connecting via [Select a destination from History]or [Select a
destination from Favorite].

Wireless access point

[Via Network] Connects via a wireless access point. P290

[Direct] Your device connects directly to this unit. P292

289
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

Connecting from your house (via the network)

You can select the method for connecting to a wireless
access point.
¢ WPS refers to a function that allows you to easily configure
the settings related to the connection and security of wireless
LAN devices.
To check if the wireless access point you are using is
compatible with WPS, refer to the manual of the wireless
access point.

Save push button type wireless access point that is compatible with
Wi-Fi Protected SetupTM with a WPS mark.

Press the wireless access point e.g.:

WPS button until it switches to WPS
[WPS (Push-Button)] mode.
• Refer to the wireless access point
instruction manual for details.

Save PIN code type wireless access point that is compatible with
Wi-Fi Protected Setup with a WPS mark.
1 Select the wireless access point you are connecting
to.
[WPS (PIN code)] 2 Enter the PIN code displayed on the camera screen
into the wireless access point.
3 Press [MENU/SET].
• Refer to the wireless access point instruction manual for
details.
Select this option when you are not sure about the WPS
compatibility, or when you want to search for and connect to a
[From List]
wireless access point.
• Refer to P291 for details.

290
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

If you are not sure about the WPS compatibility (connecting by [From List])
Search for available wireless access points.
• Confirm encryption key of the selected wireless access point if the network authentication is
encrypted.
• When connecting by [Manual Input], confirm SSID, encryption type, encryption key of the
wireless access point you are using.

1 Select the wireless access point you are connecting

to.
• Pressing [DISP.] will search for a wireless access point
again.
• If no wireless access point is found, refer to “When
connecting with [Manual Input]” on P291.
2 (If network authentication is encrypted)
Enter the encryption key.
• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” section on P69.

∫ When connecting with [Manual Input]

1 On the screen displayed in step 1 of “If you are not sure about the WPS
compatibility (connecting by [From List])”, select [Manual Input].
2 Enter the SSID of the wireless access point you are connecting to, then select
[Set].
• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” section on P69.
3 Select the network authentication type.
• For information on network authentication, see the manual of the wireless access point.
4 Select the encryption type.
• The type of settings that can be changed may vary depending on the details of network
authentication settings.

Network authentication type Encryption types that can be set

[WPA2-PSK] [TKIP]/[AES]

[WPA-PSK] [TKIP]/[AES]

[Common Key] [WEP]

[Open] [No Encryption]/[WEP]

5 (When an option other than [No Encryption] is selected)

Enter the encryption key.

291
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

• Check the wireless access points instruction manual and settings when saving a wireless
access point.
• If no connection can be established, the wireless access point’s radio waves may be too weak.
Refer to “Message Display” (P324) and “Troubleshooting” (P337) for details.
• Transmission speed may decrease, or may not be usable depending on the environment it is
used in.

Connecting from a location away from your house (direct connection)

You can select the method for connecting to the device you
are using.
Select the connection method supported by your device.

1 Set the device to Wi-Fi DirectR mode.

[Wi-Fi Direct]
2 Select [Wi-Fi Direct].
3 Select the device to connect to.
• Read the operating instructions of your device for details.
[WPS (Push-Button)]
1 Select [WPS (Push-Button)].
2 Set the device to WPS mode.
• You can wait longer for a connection by pressing [DISP.] on this
[WPS Connection] unit.
[WPS (PIN code)]
1 Select [WPS (PIN code)].
2 Enter the PIN code of the device into this unit.
Enter the SSID and password into
the device. The SSID and
password are displayed on the
connection waiting screen of this
[Manual Connection]
unit.
• If the destination is set to
[Smartphone], the password is not
displayed. Select the SSID to establish a connection. (P256)

292
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

Connecting quickly with the same settings as the previous ones

([Select a destination from History]/[Select a destination from Favorite])
When the Wi-Fi function is used, a record is saved in the history. You can register records
as favourites.
Using the history or favourites list, you can easily connect with the same settings as used
previously.
Check to see if the Wi-Fi settings of the device to connect to are the same as used
previously.
• If the settings of the device to connect to have been changed, it may not be possible to connect
to the device.

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function]

2 Select [Select a destination from History] or

[Select a destination from Favorite].

Connects with the same

[Select a destination from
settings as the previous
History]
ones.
[Select a destination from Connects with settings
Favorite] registered as favourites.

3 Select item.
• If the device you want to connect to (smartphone, etc.) is
connected to a wireless access point other than the
camera, you cannot connect the device to the camera
using [Direct]. Change the Wi-Fi settings of the device
you want to connect to so that the access point to be
used is set to the camera.
You can also select [New Connection] and reconnect the devices. (P256)

Registering records as favourites

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [Select a destination
from History]
2 Select the item you want to register to favourites, and then press 1.
3 Enter a registration name.
• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” section on P69.
• A maximum of 30 characters can be entered. A two-byte character is treated as two
characters.
293
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

Editing the items registered to favourites

1 Select the menu. (P53)

MENU > [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Function] > [Select a destination
from Favorite]
2 Select the favourite item you want to edit, and then press 1.
3 Select the item.
[Remove from Favorite] —
[Change the Order in Select the destination.
Favorite]
• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering
[Change the Registered Text” section on P69.
Name] • A maximum of 30 characters can be entered. A two-byte
character is treated as two characters.

Save frequently-used Wi-Fi connection settings as favourites

The number that can be saved in the history is limited.

We recommend that you save frequently-used Wi-Fi connection settings by registering
them as favourites. (P293)

Checking the connection detail of a record or favourite

If [DISP.] is pressed when selecting an item in the history or favourites, the detail of the
connection can be displayed.

• Performing [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] clears the history and the contents saved in [Select a
destination from Favorite].
• When connecting to a network to which many PCs are connected by using [Select a destination
from History] or [Select a destination from Favorite], a connection attempt may fail because the
previously-connected device will be identified from among many devices.
If a connection attempt fails, reconnect by using [New Connection].

294
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

About settings for sending images

When sending images, select the method for sending them after selecting [New
Connection].
After the connection has been completed, settings for sending, such as the image size for
sending, can also be changed.

∫ Images that can be sent

Destination JPEG RAW MP4¢1 AVCHD¢1, 2 3D
[Smartphone] ± — ± — —
[PC] ± ± ± ± ±
[Cloud Sync. Service] ± — ± — ±
[Web service] ± — ± — ±
[AV device] ± — — — ±
[Printer]¢1 ± — — — —

¢1 Sending by [Send Images While Recording] is not available.

¢2 A motion picture recorded in [AVCHD] can be sent to [PC] if the file size is 4 GB or smaller. It
cannot be sent if the size is greater than 4 GB.
• Some images may not be played back or sent depending on the device.
• Refer to the manual of the destination equipment or the web service for more information on
how to playback pictures.

295
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

Send Images While Recording

A picture can be automatically sent to a specified device every time you take it.
• Since the camera gives priority to recording, sending may take longer during the recording.

• When connected with [Send Images While Recording], [ ] is

displayed on the recording screen, and [ ] is displayed while
sending a file.
• If you turn off this unit or the Wi-Fi connection before sending is 55
complete, unsent pictures will not be resent.
• You may not be able to delete files or use the playback menu
while sending.

Not available in these cases:

• Motion pictures cannot be sent.

Send Images Stored in the Camera

Images can be selected and sent after recording.

• Details of the playback menu [Favorite] or [Print Set] settings will not be sent.

Not available in these cases:

• Some images taken with a different camera may not be able to be sent.
• Images that have been modified or edited with a computer may not be able to be sent.

296
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

Changing the settings for sending images

Pressing [DISP.] after completing a connection allows you to change the settings for
sending such as the image size for sending.
Resize the image to send.
[Original]/[Auto]¢1/[Change]
• If you select [Auto], the image size is determined by the
[Size]
circumstances at the destination.
• You can select the image size for [Change] from [M], [S] or [VGA].
The aspect ratio does not change.
[File Format]¢2 [JPG]/[RAWiJPG]/[RAW]
Select whether to delete the location information from images before
sending them.
[ON]: Delete the location information, then send.
[Delete Location [OFF]: Keep the location information and send.
Data]¢3 • This operation only deletes the location information from the images
that are set to be sent.
(The location information will not be deleted from the original images
stored in this unit.)
You can select whether to send images when the Cloud Folder runs
¢4
out of free space.
[Cloud Limit]
[ON]: Do not send images.
[OFF]: Delete images from the oldest ones, then send new images.
¢1 Only available when the destination is set to [Web service].
¢2 Only available when the destination is set to [PC].
¢3 Only available when the destination is set to [Cloud Sync. Service] or [Web service].
¢4 Only available when the destination is set to [Cloud Sync. Service].

297
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

[Wi-Fi Setup] Menu

Configure the settings required for the Wi-Fi function.
The settings cannot be changed when connected to Wi-Fi.
Select the menu. (P53)
MENU > [Setup] > [Wi-Fi] > [Wi-Fi Setup] > Desired item to be set

You can improve security by enabling password entry for a direct

connection to a smartphone.
[ON]:
[Wi-Fi Password] Connects the camera and a smartphone using an SSID and
password. (P257)
[OFF]:
Connects the camera and a smartphone using an SSID. (P256)

• When [ON] is selected, you can also set up a connection by scanning a QR code. (P257, 259)

[LUMIX CLUB] Acquires or changes the “LUMIX CLUB” login ID.

• Refer to P284 for details.

You can set the workgroup.

To send images to a PC, a connection to the same workgroup as
the destination PC is required.
(The default setting is “WORKGROUP”.)
[PC Connection]
[Change Workgroup Name]:
Enter the workgroup of the connecting PC.
[Restore to Default]:
Restores the default state.
• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” section on P69.
• If you are using the PC with standard settings, you do not need to change the workgroup.

You can change the name of this unit.

1 Press [DISP.].
[Device Name] 2 Enter the desired device name.
• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text”
section on P69.
• A maximum of 32 characters can be entered.

298
11. Using the Wi-Fi function

To prevent incorrect operation or use of the Wi-Fi function by a

third party and to protect saved personal information, it is
recommended that you protect the Wi-Fi function with a
password.
[Wi-Fi Function Lock] Setting a password will automatically display the password input
screen when the Wi-Fi function is used.
[Setup]:
Enter any 4-digit numbers as the password.
[Cancel]
• For details on how to enter characters, refer to “Entering Text” section on P69.
• Make a copy of password.
If you forget the password, you can reset it with [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] in the [Setup] menu,
however other settings will also be reset. (excluding [LUMIX CLUB])

[Network Address] Displays the MAC address and IP address of this unit.
• A “MAC Address” is a unique address that is used to identify network equipment.
• “IP address” refers to a number that identifies a PC connected to a network such as the
Internet. Usually, the addresses for homes are automatically assigned by the DHCP function
such as a wireless access point. (Example: 192.168.0.87)

299
12. Connecting to other equipment

Enjoying 3D pictures

Taking 3D pictures
Attaching the 3D interchangeable lens (H-FT012: optional) to the camera allows you to
take 3D pictures for extra impact.
To view 3D pictures, a television that supports 3D is required.

1 Attach the 3D interchangeable lens to the camera.

2 Bring the subject into the frame and record by pressing the shutter
button fully.
• Focusing is not required when recording 3D pictures.
• Still pictures recorded with the 3D interchangeable lens attached are saved in MPO
format (3D).

To ensure that the 3D pictures can be safely viewed, pay attention to the
following points when recording.
• Where possible, record with the unit in a horizontal state.
• The suggested minimum subject distance is 0.6 m (2.0 feet).
• Be careful not to shake the camera while in a vehicle or walking.

It is recommended to use a tripod or a flash to record steady pictures.

• Up to approx. 1990 3D pictures can be recorded on a 8 GB card.

(When the aspect ratio is set to [4:3], and the quality is set to [ ].)
• Read the operating instructions of the 3D interchangeable lens for details.

Not available in these cases:

• You cannot record 3D pictures in vertical orientation.
• When a distance to the subject is 0.6 m (2.0 feet) to approximately 1 m (3.3 feet), horizontal
disparity becomes too great, and you may not see the 3D effect at the edges of the image.

300
12. Connecting to other equipment

Playing back 3D pictures

Connecting the camera to a 3D compatible television and playing back pictures taken in
3D allows you to enjoy 3D pictures for extra impact.
It is also possible to play back the recorded 3D pictures by inserting an SD card into the
3D compatible television with an SD card slot.

Preparations:
Set the [HDMI Mode] to [AUTO], [1080p] or [1080i]. (P65)
Set the [3D Playback] to [ ]. (P66)

Connect the unit to a 3D compatible television using the HDMI micro cable
and display the playback screen. (P303)
• When [VIERA Link] is set to [ON] and the camera is connected to a TV supporting VIERA Link,
input of the TV will be switched automatically and playback screen will be displayed.
Refer to P305 for details.
• For the pictures recorded in 3D, [ ] will appear on the thumbnail display at playback.

∫ Playback in 3D by selecting only the still pictures recorded in 3D

Select [3D Play] in [Playback Mode] in the [Playback] menu. (P229)

∫ Playback as a 3D slide show by selecting only the still pictures recorded in 3D

Select [3D] in [Slide Show] in the [Playback] menu. (P227)

∫ Switch the playback method for the still pictures recorded in 3D

1 Select the picture recorded in 3D.
2 Select [2D/3D Settings] on the [Playback] menu. (P53)
• Playback method will switch to 3D if it is playing back in 2D (conventional image), or it will
switch to 2D if it is playing back in 3D.
• If you feel tired, uncomfortable or otherwise strange when playing back pictures recorded
in 3D, set to 2D.

• A black screen is displayed for a few seconds when switching playback back and forth from 3D
to 2D pictures.
• When you select a 3D picture thumbnail, it may take a few seconds for playback to start. After
playback, the thumbnail display may take a few seconds to reappear.
• When viewing 3D pictures, your eyes may become tired if you are too close to the television
screen.
• If your television does not switch to a 3D picture, make the necessary settings on the TV.
(For details, refer to the operating instructions of the TV.)
• 3D pictures can be saved to your computer or Panasonic devices. (P307, 312)

301
12. Connecting to other equipment

Functions that cannot be used on 3D pictures

∫ Functions that cannot be used during 3D recording

When recording with the 3D interchangeable lens (H-FT012: optional), the following
feature will be disabled:
(Recording functions)
• Auto Focus/Manual Focus operation • Aperture setting
• Zoom operation • Recording motion pictures¢1
• Panorama Shot Mode
• [Glistening Water]/[Glittering Illuminations]/[Handheld Night Shot] (Scene Guide Mode)
• [Rough Monochrome]/[Impressive Art]/[High Dynamic]/[Toy Effect]/[Toy Pop]/[Star Filter]/[One
Point Color]/[Sunshine] (Creative Control Mode)
• Defocus control function
¢1 The motion picture button and the [Motion Picture] menu will be unavailable or unusable.
([Rec] menu)
• [Simultaneous record w/o filter] in [Filter Settings]/[Picture Size]¢2/[Quality]¢3/[Focus Mode]/
[SH] of [Burst Rate]/[i.Dynamic]/[i.Resolution]/[iHandheld Night Shot]/[iHDR]/[HDR]/[Multi Exp.]/
[Panorama Direction]/[EFC] of [Shutter Type]/[Red-Eye Removal]/[Shading Comp.]/[Ex. Tele
Conv.]/[Digital Zoom]/[Stabilizer]
¢2 The setting is fixed as shown below.
Aspect ratio Picture size Aspect ratio Picture size
[4:3] 1824k1368 [16:9] 1824k1024
[3:2] 1824k1216 [1:1] 1712k1712
¢3 When attaching 3D interchangeable lens, the following icons are displayed.
[ ] Both MPO images and fine JPEG images are recorded
([3D+Fine]) simultaneously.
[ ] Both MPO images and standard JPEG images are recorded
([3D+Standard]) simultaneously.

([Custom] menu)
• [AF/AE Lock]/[Quick AF]/[Pinpoint AF Time]/[Pinpoint AF Display]/[AF Assist Lamp]/[Focus/
Release Priority]/[AF+MF]/[MF Assist]/[MF Assist Display]/[MF Guide]/[Rec Area]/[Remaining
Disp.]/[Video Button]/[Power Zoom Lens]/[Lens w/o Focus Ring]/[Touch AF] in [Touch Settings]

∫ Functions that cannot be used during 3D picture playback

During the 3D playback of 3D pictures on a 3D-compatible TV, the following functions are
disabled.
• [Highlight] ([Custom] menu) • Playback Zoom
([Playback] menu)

• [Location Logging]/[Beauty Retouch]/[Clear Retouch]/[Title Edit]/[Text Stamp]/[Video Divide]/

[Time Lapse Video]/[Stop Motion Video]/[Resize]/[Cropping]/[Rotate]/[Rotate Disp.]/[Favorite]/
[Print Set]/[Protect]/[Face Rec Edit]/[Picture Sort]/[Delete Confirmation]

302
12. Connecting to other equipment

Playing Back Pictures on a TV Screen

Pictures recorded with this unit can be played back on a TV screen.
Preparations:
Turn this unit and the TV off.
• Confirm the terminals on your TV and HDMI Video
use a cable compatible with the socket socket
terminals.
Image quality may vary with the
High quality
connected terminals.

1 Connect the camera and a TV.

• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.
(It may result in malfunction by the deforming of the terminal if it is plugged in obliquely
or in wrong direction.)
Do not connect devices to incorrect terminals. Doing so may cause malfunction.

To connect with an HDMI micro cable

• Use a “High Speed HDMI micro cable” with the HDMI logo.
Cables that do not comply with the HDMI standards will not work.
“High Speed HDMI micro cable” (Type D–Type A plug, up to 2 m (6.6 feet) long)
• Check the [HDMI Mode]. (P65)
• During 24p motion picture playback, please set [HDMI Mode] to [AUTO].
For settings other than [AUTO], it cannot output at 24 frames/second.
• Audio will be played back as stereo.
• No picture is displayed on the screen of this unit.
• When [VIERA Link] is set to [ON], operations using the buttons on the camera are restricted.
• [Beauty Retouch] cannot be used.

303
12. Connecting to other equipment

To connect with an AV cable (optional)

• Always use a genuine Panasonic AV cable (DMW-AVC1: optional).

• Check the [TV Aspect]. (P65)
• Audio will be played back in monaural.
A HDMI micro cable E White: to the audio input socket
B HDMI socket F Align the marks, and insert.
C AV cable (optional) G Check the terminal.
D Yellow: to the video input socket

2 Turn on the TV and select the input to match the connector in use.

3 Turn the camera on and then press [(].

• Input of the TV will switch automatically and playback screen is displayed when
connected to a VIERA Link compatible TV using an HDMI micro cable with the [VIERA
Link] set to [ON]. (P305)

• Depending on the [Aspect Ratio], black bands may be displayed on the top and bottom or the
left and right of the pictures.
• Change the screen mode on your TV if the picture is displayed with the top or bottom cut off.
• Output from the HDMI micro cable has priority when both AV cable (optional) and HDMI micro
cable are connected.
• The connection with the USB connection cable (supplied) will take priority when you connect
the USB connection cable (supplied) simultaneously with the HDMI micro cable.
• When you play back a picture vertically, it may be blurry.
• Proper playback will be dependent on the TV used for viewing.
• You can view pictures on TVs in other countries (regions) which use the NTSC or PAL system
when you set [Video Out] in the [Setup] menu.
• No sound is output from the camera speakers.
• Read the operating instructions for the TV.

304
12. Connecting to other equipment

The recorded pictures can be played back on a TV with an SD Memory Card

slot

• Depending on the TV model, pictures may not be displayed on the full screen.
• The file format of the motion pictures that can be played back differs depending on the TV
model.
• In some cases, panorama pictures cannot be played back. Also, auto-scroll playback of
panorama pictures may not work.
• For cards compatible with playback, refer to the operating instructions of the TV.

Using VIERA Link (HDMI)

What is the VIERA Link (HDMI) (HDAVI Control™)?

• This function allows you to use your remote control for the Panasonic TV for easy
operations when this unit has been connected to a VIERA Link compatible device using an
HDMI micro cable for automatic linked operations.
(Not all operations are possible.)
• VIERA Link is a unique Panasonic function built on an HDMI control function using the
standard HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) specification.
Linked operations with HDMI CEC compatible devices made by other companies are not
guaranteed. When using devices made by other companies that are compatible with
VIERA Link, refer to the operating instructions for the respective devices.
• This unit supports “VIERA Link Ver.5” function. “VIERA Link Ver.5” is the standard for
Panasonic’s VIERA Link compatible equipment. This standard is compatible with
Panasonic’s conventional VIERA Link equipment.

Preparations:
Set the [VIERA Link] to [ON]. (P66)

1 Connect this unit to a Panasonic TV compatible with VIERA Link with

an HDMI micro cable (P303).

2 Turn the camera on and then press [(].

3 Operate with the remote control for the TV.

• Operate with reference to the operation icons displayed on the screen.

• To play back the sound of a film during a slide show, set [Sound] to [AUTO] or [Audio] on the
Slide Show setting screen.
• It is recommended to connect this unit to an HDMI terminal other than the HDMI1 if there are 2
or more HDMI input terminals on the TV.
• Operation using the buttons on this unit will be limited.

305
12. Connecting to other equipment

∫ Other linked operations

Turning this unit off:
If you use the remote control for the TV to turn the TV off, this unit is also turned off.

Automatic input switching:

• If you connect with an HDMI micro cable and then turn this unit on, and then press [(], the
input channel on the TV automatically switches to this unit’s screen. If the TV’s power is in
standby status, it will turn on automatically (if [Set] has been selected for the TV’s [Power on
link] setting).
• Depending on your TV’s HDMI connection, on some TV’s it may be necessary to manually
select the HDMI connection you are using. In this case, use the remote control for the TV to
switch the input channel.
(For details on how to switch input, please read the operating instructions for the TV.)
• If VIERA Link does not work properly, refer to P348.

• If you are unsure whether or not the TV you are using is compatible with VIERA Link, read the
operating instructions for the TV.
• Available linked operations between this unit and a Panasonic TV are different depending on
the types of Panasonic TVs even if they are compatible with VIERA Link. Refer to the operating
instructions of the TV for the operations are supported on the TV.
• Be sure to use a cable that is HDMI certified.
• Use a “High Speed HDMI micro cable” with the HDMI logo.
Cables that do not comply with the HDMI standards will not work.
“High Speed HDMI micro cable” (Type D–Type A plug, up to 2 m (6.6 feet) long)
• [HDMI Mode] for this unit is determined automatically when the VIERA Link is operating.

306
12. Connecting to other equipment

Saving still pictures and motion pictures on

your PC
You can acquire recorded pictures to a PC by connecting the camera and the PC.
• Some PCs can read directly from the card removed from the camera. For details, refer to the
operating instructions of your PC.
• If the computer being used does not support SDXC Memory Cards, a message
prompting you to format may appear.
(Doing so will cause recorded images to be erased so do not choose to format.)
If the card is not recognised, please refer to the below support site.
http://panasonic.net/avc/sdcard/information/SDXC.html

∫ PC that can be used

The unit can be connected to any PC capable of recognising a mass storage device.
• Windows support: Windows 7/Windows 8/Windows 8.1/Windows 10
• Mac support: OS X v10.5 to v10.11

AVCHD motion pictures may not be imported correctly when copied as files or
folder

• When using Windows, import AVCHD motion pictures with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (P308).
• With a Mac, AVCHD motion pictures can be imported using “iMovie”.
Please note that importing is not possible depending on the picture quality.
(For details about iMovie, please contact Apple Inc.)

307
12. Connecting to other equipment

Downloading software
Download and install software to edit and play back images with a PC.

PHOTOfunSTUDIO 9.8 PE
This software allows you to manage images. For example, you can send pictures and
motion pictures to a PC and sort them by recording date or model name. You can also
perform operations such as writing images to a DVD, processing and correcting images,
and editing motion pictures.

Check the site below to download and install the software.

Download the software while it is available for download.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/soft/download/d_pfs98pe.html
(This Site is English only.)
• Download expiration: March 2021

• Operating environment

WindowsR 7 (32bit/64bit) SP1,

WindowsR 8 (32bit/64bit),
OS
WindowsR 8.1 (32bit/64bit),
WindowsR 10 (32bit/64bit)
WindowsR 7
WindowsR 8
CPU PentiumR 4 2.8 GHz or higher
WindowsR 8.1
WindowsR 10
Display 1024k768 pixels or more (1920k1080 pixels or more recommended)
WindowsR 7
WindowsR 8 1 GB or more (32bit)
RAM
WindowsR 8.1 2 GB or more (64bit)

WindowsR 10
Free hard disk
450 MB or more for installing software
space
• Refer to the operating instructions of “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (PDF file) for further operating
environment.

308
12. Connecting to other equipment

SILKYPIX Developer Studio SE

This is software to edit RAW format images.
Edited images can be saved in a format (JPEG, TIFF, etc.) that can be displayed on a
personal computer.

Check the site below to download and install the software.

http://www.isl.co.jp/SILKYPIX/english/p/

• Operating environment

WindowsR 7,
WindowsR 8,
Windows
OS WindowsR 8.1,
WindowsR 10
Mac Mac OS X v10.6 to v10.11
• For details on how to use the SILKYPIX Developer Studio, refer to the “Help” or the Ichikawa
Soft Laboratory’s support website.

LoiLoScope 30 day full trial version

(Windows 7/Windows 8/Windows 8.1/Windows 10)
This software allows you to edit motion pictures with ease.

Check the site below to download and install the software.

http://loilo.tv/product/20

• Only the trial version will be installed.

• For more information on how to use LoiLoScope, read the LoiLoScope manual available for
download at the site.

• To download the software, you need to connect the PC to the Internet.

• It may take some time to download the software depending on the communication
environment.

309
12. Connecting to other equipment

Transferring images to a PC
Preparations:
Install “PHOTOfunSTUDIO ” to the PC. (P308)

1 Connect the computer and camera with the USB connection cable
(supplied).
• Please turn this unit on and your PC before connecting.
• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.
(It may result in malfunction by the deforming of the terminal if it is plugged in obliquely
or in wrong direction.)
Do not connect devices to incorrect terminals. Doing so may cause malfunction.
• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one or a genuine
Panasonic USB connection cable (DMW-USBC1: optional).

A USB connection cable (supplied)

B Align the marks, and insert.
C Check the terminal.

2 Press 3/4 to select [PC], and then press [MENU/SET].

• If [USB Mode] (P65) is set to [PC] in the [Setup] menu in advance, the camera will be
automatically connected to the PC without displaying the [USB Mode] selection screen.
• When the camera is connected to a PC while [USB Mode] is set to [PictBridge(PTP)], a
message may appear on the PC screen. In that case, close the message, and remove
the USB connection cable safely, and then set the [USB Mode] to [PC].

3 Copy the images to a PC using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”.

• Do not delete or move copied files or folders in Windows Explorer.
When viewing in “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”, you will not be able to play back or edit.

• Use a battery with sufficient battery power or the AC adaptor (optional). If the remaining battery
power becomes low while the camera and the PC are communicating, the status indicator
blinks and the alarm beeps.
Disconnect the USB connection cable safely.
• Before connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor (optional), turn the camera off.
• Before inserting or removing a card, turn the camera off and disconnect the USB connection
cable. Otherwise, data may be destroyed.

310
12. Connecting to other equipment

∫ Copying to a PC without using “PHOTOfunSTUDIO ”

If you are not able to install “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”, you can copy files and folders to your
PC by dragging and dropping files from this unit.
• The content (folder structure) on the card of this unit is as follows.
For Windows: A drive ([LUMIX]) is displayed in [Computer]
For Mac: A drive ([LUMIX]) is displayed on the desktop

• Card
DCIM: Images
DCIM 1 Folder number
2 Colour space P: sRGB
100_PANA
_: AdobeRGB
3 File number
P1000001.JPG
4 JPG: Still pictures
MP4: [MP4] Motion pictures
P1000002.JPG
RW2: Pictures in RAW files
P1000999.JPG MPO: 3D pictures
101_PANA MISC: DPOF print
999_PANA Favourite
MISC AVCHD: [AVCHD] Motion pictures

PRIVATE
AVCHD

• A new folder is created when pictures are taken in the following situations.
– After [No.Reset] (P67) in the [Setup] menu has been executed
– When a card containing a folder with the same folder number has been inserted
(such as when pictures were taken using another maker of camera)
– When there is a picture with file number 999 inside the folder

∫ Connection in the PTP Mode

Set [USB Mode] to [PictBridge(PTP)].
• Data can now be read only from the card in the PC.
• When there are 1000 or more pictures on a card, the pictures may not be imported in the PTP
Mode.
• Motion picture cannot be played back in PTP Mode.

311
12. Connecting to other equipment

Saving still pictures and motion pictures on a

Recorder
If you insert card holding content recorded with this unit into a
Panasonic recorder, you can dub the content to a Blu-ray Disc or
DVD etc.
Methods to export still pictures and motion pictures to other
devices will vary depending on the file format. (JPEG, RAW,
MPO, AVCHD, or MP4).
• See the operating instructions for the recorder about the details about copying and playing
back.

∫ Dubbing with non-compatible equipment

You can dub the content played back using this unit to non-compatible equipment such as
recorders and video players by connecting this unit to the non-compatible equipment using
an AV cable (optional).
Non-compatible equipment will be able to play back the content. This is convenient if you
wish to pass around dubbed content. In this case, the content will be played back in
standard rather than high-definition picture quality.

1 Connect this unit with the recording

equipment with an AV cable
(optional).
2 Start the playback of this unit.
3 Start the recording on the recording
equipment.
• When ending the recording (copying),
stop the playback on this unit after
stopping the recording on recording
equipment.

1 Yellow: to the video input socket

2 White: to the audio input socket
A AV cable (optional)
B Check the terminal.

• When you play back motion pictures on 4:3 aspect ratio TV, you must set [TV Aspect] (P65) on
this unit to [4:3] before starting a copy.
The image will be vertically long if you play back motion pictures copied with [16:9] setting on a
[4:3] aspect TV.
• Always use a genuine Panasonic AV cable (DMW-AVC1: optional).
• See the operating instructions for the recording equipment for details about copying and
playing back.

312
12. Connecting to other equipment

Printing the Pictures

If you connect the camera to a printer supporting PictBridge, you can select the pictures to
be printed out and instruct that printing be started on the camera’s monitor.
• Group pictures will not be displayed as group pictures but as single pictures.
• Some printers can print directly from the card removed from the camera. For details, refer to
the operating instructions of your printer.

Preparations:
Turn on the camera and the printer.
Perform the print quality and other settings at the printer before printing the pictures.

1 Connect the printer and camera with the USB connection cable
(supplied).
• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug.
(It may result in malfunction by the deforming of the terminal if it is plugged in obliquely
or in wrong direction.)
Do not connect devices to incorrect terminals. Doing so may cause malfunction.
• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one or a genuine
Panasonic USB connection cable (DMW-USBC1: optional).

A USB connection cable (supplied)

B Align the marks, and insert.
C Check the terminal.

2 Press 3/4 to select [PictBridge(PTP)], and then press [MENU/SET].

313
12. Connecting to other equipment

• Use a battery with sufficient battery power or the AC adaptor (optional). If the remaining battery
power becomes low while the camera and the printer are connected, the status indicator blinks
and the alarm beeps. If this happens during printing, stop printing at once. If not printing,
disconnect the USB connection cable.
• Do not disconnect the USB connection cable while [å] (Cable disconnect prohibit icon) is
displayed.
(May not be displayed depending on the type of printer used.)
• Before connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor (optional), turn the camera off.
• Before inserting or removing a card, turn the camera off, and disconnect the USB connection
cable.

Not available in these cases:

• Motion pictures recorded cannot be printed out.

314
12. Connecting to other equipment

Selecting a single picture and printing it

1 Press 2/1 to select the picture and then press PictBridge

[MENU/SET].

0XOWL3ULQW
3ULQW

2 Press 3 to select [Print start] and then press [MENU/SET].

• Refer to P316 for the items that can be set before starting to print the pictures.
• Disconnect the USB connection cable after printing.

Selecting multiple pictures and printing them

1 Press 3.
2 Press 3/4 to select an item and then press [MENU/SET].
Multiple pictures are printed at one time.
• Press 3/4/2/1 to select the pictures and then press [MENU/
SET].
[Multi Select]
(When [MENU/SET] is pressed again, the setting is cancelled.)
• After the pictures have been selected, press 2 to select [OK], and
then press [MENU/SET].
[Select All] Prints all the stored pictures.
[Print Set (DPOF)] Prints the pictures set in [Print Set] only. (P246)
[Favorite] Prints the pictures set as favourites only. (P245)

3 Press 3 to select [Print start] and then press [MENU/SET].

• If the print check screen has appeared, select [Yes], and print the pictures.
• Refer to P316 for the items which can be set before starting to print the pictures.
• Disconnect the USB connection cable after printing.

315
12. Connecting to other equipment

Print Settings
Select and set the items both on the screen in step 2 of the “Selecting a single
picture and printing it” and in step 3 of the “Selecting multiple pictures and printing
them” procedures.
• When you want to print pictures on a paper size or a layout which is not supported by the
camera, set [Paper Size] or [Page Layout] to [{] and then set the paper size or the layout on
the printer.
(For details, refer to the operating instructions of the printer.)
• When [Print Set (DPOF)] has been selected, the [Print with Date] and [Num.of prints] items are
not displayed.

∫ [Print with Date]

[ON] Date is printed.
[OFF] Date is not printed.

• If the printer does not support date printing, the date cannot be printed on the picture.
• Depending on the printer, the date print settings of the printer may take precedence so check if
this is the case.
• When printing images with a text stamp, please remember to set print with date to [OFF] or the
date will print on top.
• In some printers, the picture date for pictures taken with the aspect ratio set to [1:1] will be
printed vertically.

When asking the photo shop to print the pictures

• By stamping the date using [Text Stamp] (P236) or setting date printing at the time of the [Print
Set] (P246) setting before going to a photo shop, the dates can be printed on the pictures at the
photo shop.

∫ [Num.of prints]
You can set the number of prints up to 999.
• You can also use the control dial to set.

316
12. Connecting to other equipment

∫ [Paper Size]
{ Settings on the printer are prioritised.
[L/3.5qk5q] 89 mmk127 mm
[2L/5qk7q] 127 mmk178 mm
[POSTCARD] 100 mmk148 mm
[16:9] 101.6 mmk180.6 mm
[A4] 210 mmk297 mm
[A3] 297 mmk420 mm
[10k15cm] 100 mmk150 mm
[4qk6q] 101.6 mmk152.4 mm
[8qk10q] 203.2 mmk254 mm
[LETTER] 216 mmk279.4 mm
[CARD SIZE] 54 mmk85.6 mm

• Paper sizes not supported by the printer will not be displayed.

∫ [Page Layout] (Layouts for printing that can be set with this unit)
{ Settings on the printer are prioritised.
á 1 picture with no frame on 1 page
â 1 picture with a frame on 1 page
ã 2 pictures on 1 page
ä 4 pictures on 1 page

• An item cannot be selected if the printer does not support the page layout.

317
12. Connecting to other equipment

∫ Layout printing
When printing a picture several times on 1 sheet of paper.
For example, if you want to print the same picture 4 times on 1 sheet of paper, set [Page
Layout] to [ä] and then set [Num.of prints] to 4 for the picture that you want to print.

When printing different pictures on 1 sheet of paper.

For example, if you want to print 4 different pictures on 1 sheet of paper, set [Page Layout]
to [ä] and then set [Num.of prints] to 1 for each of the 4 pictures.

• The camera is receiving an error message from the printer when the [¥] indication lights
orange during printing. After finishing printing, make sure there are no problems with the
printer.
• If the number of prints is high, the pictures may be printed several times. In this case, the
remaining number of prints indicated may differ from the number set.
• Only pictures taken in JPEG format can be printed. Those taken in RAW will use the JPEG
pictures that were simultaneously created. If an equivalent JPEG picture is not available, no
print will take place.

318
13. Others

Optional accessories
• Some optional accessories may not be available in some countries.

AC adaptor (optional)/DC coupler (optional)

By connecting the AC adaptor (optional), and then plugging them into an electrical socket,
you can connect this unit to a PC or printer and use without worrying about the capacity of
the battery.
To use the AC adaptor, a DC coupler (optional) is required.

• Always use a genuine Panasonic AC adaptor (optional).

• When using an AC adaptor, use the AC cable supplied with the AC adaptor.
• Also read the operating instructions for the AC adaptor and DC coupler.

∫ Conversion lens (optional)

You can easily widen the range of expression of the unit by installing a compatible lens.

Wide conversion lens: Wide-angle effect allows a wider field of view.

Tele conversion lens: Telescopic effect allows a higher level of magnification.
Macro conversion lens: Allows higher level of magnification of small subjects.
Fish eye conversion lens: Enables recording of image with stretched perspective.
• We recommend that you use a conversion lens that is compatible with this unit.
Use of a non-compatible conversion lens or adaptor may result in breakage or damage to the
lens.
• For details, refer to the operating instructions of the relevant conversion lenses.

Filters (optional)
The MC protector is a transparent filter which affects neither the colours nor the amount of
light, so it can always be used to protect the camera’s lens.
The ND filter reduces the amount of light to approximately 1/8th (equal to adjusting the
aperture value 3 increments) without affecting the colour balance.
PL filter will suppress the reflected light from a metal or non spherical surfaces (flat
non-metallic surfaces, water vapour or invisible particles in the air), making it possible to
take a picture with enhanced contrast.
• When using the interchangeable lens (H-PS14042), turn this unit off and ensure the lens barrel
is retracted before attaching or removing a filter.
• Do not attach multiple filters at the same time.
• You can attach the lens cap or the lens hood when the filter is attached.
• Refer to the instructions for each filter for details.

319
13. Others

Monitor Display

In recording

4:3
L AFS  Fn2
  OFF
ラュン No
Effect Fn3
MINI

OFF Fn4

OFF
Fn5
SNAP


BKT
 Fn6
AEL
3.5 60 0 200 AWB 98 1pic.


1 Multi exposure (P179)

Digital Zoom (P195)
1 Recording Mode (P40) Electronic shutter (P161)
EXPS
Picture Mode (Still picture
priorities) (P211)
Photo Style (P119) Overheat indicator (P325, 337)
2
‰ Œ Flash Mode (P201) A› Quality (P128)
Flash (P203) AFS AFF AFC MF Focus Mode (P135)
Extra Tele Conversion (when Ø
recording motion pictures) AF Mode (P137)
(P193)
Recording format/Recording Pull Focus (P214)
quality (P208) Face Recognition (P182)
SNAP
4SEC Snap Movie (P212) AFL AF Lock (P154)
4:3
L
Picture size/Aspect Ratio Burst (P164)
(P127)
Auto Bracket (P167)
4:3
M
Extra Tele Conversion (when
EX

taking still pictures) (P193) Self-timer (P170)

Image effect (filter) adjustment Battery indication (P21)
display (P109, 121) Optical Image Stabiliser¢2
Image effect (filter) setting (P190)
EXPS (P121) Jitter alert (P191)
Card (displayed only during
Recording state (Flashes red.)/
recording) (P27)
Focus (Lights green.) (P133)
Elapsed recording time¢1
8m30s Focus (Under low illumination)
(P205) LOW
(P133)
Simultaneous recording
Connected to Wi-Fi
indicator (P211)
Peaking (P153) Histogram (P44)

ラュン HDR (P130)/iHDR (P75)

320
13. Others

3 Colour (P77)

Name¢3 (P187) Number of recordable pictures¢6

98 (P28)
Number of days that have passed since the
departure date¢4 (P62) Available recording time¢1, 6
R 8m30s (P28)
Age¢3 (P187)
Location¢4 (P62)
6
Current date and time/Travel destination setting :
¢4
Touch tab (P49)
“ (P61)
Exposure meter (P85) Touch zoom (P197)
Focal distance display (P196) Touch Shutter (P50)
Step zoom (P196)
Touch AE (P51)
4 AE

AF area (P133, 141) Peaking (P153)

Spot metering target (P160) OFF
No
Effect OFF
In Self Shot Mode (P80)
Self-timer¢5 (P170)
OFF
Mic level display (P216) Fn2 Fn3 Fn4

Silent Mode (P181) Fn5 Fn6

Function button (P60)
SNAP

AEL AE Lock (P154)

Colour (P77)
AE Metering Mode (P51, 160)
Programme Shift (P85) Defocus control function
(P76, 110)
3.5 Aperture value (P38)
Brightness (P77, 110)
60 Shutter speed (P38)
Exposure compensation value Type of defocus ([Miniature
(P156)
/ Effect]) (P115)
Brightness (P77, 110) One point colour (P117)
Manual Exposure Assistance
(P90) Position of the light source
(P118)
ISO sensitivity (P157)
5 Image effect (filter)
adjustment (P110, 121)
Dial operation guide (P41)
White Balance Bracket (P126)
MINI Image effect (filter) (P121)
BKT
AWB White Balance Fine Adjustment
(P125)
VÐîÑ
1
White Balance (P123)

¢1 h: hour, m: minute, s: second

¢2 Only available when a lens that supports the Stabiliser function is attached.
¢3 This is displayed for about 5 seconds when the camera is turned on if the [Profile Setup]
setting is set.
¢4 This is displayed for about 5 seconds when the camera is turned on, after setting the clock
and after switching from Playback Mode to Recording Mode.
¢5 This is displayed during countdown.
¢6 It is possible to switch the display between the number of recordable pictures and available
recording time with the [Remaining Disp.] setting in the [Custom] menu.
321
13. Others

In playback

A› Quality (P128)
4:3
1 L
Battery indication (P21)
 1/98 
SLF 1/98 Picture number/Total pictures

Connected to Wi-Fi
67'$<
 SLF Number of group pictures

PRQWK  GD\V Motion picture recording time¢1
8m30s (P219)
F3.5 60 0 200 AWB 
3
1 Clear Retouch completed icon
(P233)
Playback Mode (P229)
3D Currently retrieving information icon
(P326)
Protected picture (P248)
Playback (Motion Pictures) (P219)
Number of prints (P246)
Number of days that have passed
67'$< since the departure date (P62)
Location Information display (P230)

Ü Favourites (P245) Upload (Wi-Fi) (P281)

SUB Sub Menu (P224)
After Beauty Retouch (P231) MENU

Cable disconnect prohibit icon Silent Mode (P181)

å (P314)
PRQWKGD\V Age (P185, 187)
Motion picture playback (P219)
Multi Playback (P221)
Play panorama (P96)

Continuous Burst Picture Group Delete (P225)

Playback (P223)
Continuous [Time Lapse Shot]
4
Picture Group Playback (P223)
Name¢2 (P185, 187)
Continuous playback of the Stop
Location¢2 (P62)
Motion Animation Group (P223)
Title¢2 (P235)
‘ Stamped with text indication (P236)

Elapsed playback time¢1 (P219)

5
8m30s
Recording information¢3
2
4:3
L Picture size/Aspect Ratio (P127)

AVCHD Recording format/Recording quality

FHD 50i
(P208)

Snap Movie (P212)

322
13. Others

In playback
Detailed information display

F3.5 60
0
 WB AWB
ISO 200 AFS
P STD.

 10:00 1.DEC.2016
4:3 s 100-0001 
L RGB

1 2
Recording information Recorded date and time/World Time (P61)
Intelligent Dynamic Range Control¢3 3
(P129)
4:3
L Picture size/Aspect Ratio (P127)
HDR¢4 (P130)/iHDR¢4 (P75)
A› Quality (P128)
Intelligent Resolution (P129)
Colour space¢4 (P132)
Shading Compensation¢4 (P131)
100-0001 Folder/File number¢3 (P311)

Histogram display

F3.5 60 
0 ISO200
 1/98 100-0001

1 3
Histogram (P46) 1/98 Picture number/Total pictures
2 100-0001 Folder/File number¢3 (P311)
Recording information¢3

¢1 h: hour, m: minute, s: second

¢2 It is displayed in order of [Title], [Location], [Name] ([Baby1]/[Baby2], [Pet]), [Name] ([Face
Recog.]).
¢3 This is not displayed for motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD].
¢4 This is not displayed for motion pictures.

323
13. Others

Message Display
Confirmation messages or error messages will be displayed on the screen in some cases.
The major messages are described below as examples.

[This picture is protected]

• Delete the picture after cancelling the protect setting. (P248)

[Some pictures cannot be deleted]/[This picture cannot be deleted]

• This feature can only be used with pictures that comply with the DCF standard.
Perform formatting (P27) on this unit after saving necessary data on a PC, etc.

[Cannot be set on this picture]

• [Title Edit], [Text Stamp], [Print Set], etc. cannot be set for pictures not based on the DCF
standard.

[Memory Card Error

Format this card?]
• It is a format that cannot be used with this unit.
– Insert a different card.
– Format the card again with the camera after saving necessary data on a PC etc. (P27)
Data will be deleted.

[Lens not found, or shoot w/o lens in Custom menu is set to off.]
• When using a Leica lens mount adaptor (DMW-MA2M, DMW-MA3R: optional), set [Shoot w/o
Lens] (P30) to [ON] in the [Custom] menu.

[The lens is not attached properly. Do not push lens release button while lens is
attached.]
• Detach the lens once, and then attach it again without pressing the lens release button. (P30)
Turn this unit on again, and if it is still displaying, contact the dealer.

[Lens attachment failed. Please make sure the lens is attached correctly.]
• Detach the lens from the camera body and gently wipe the contacts on the lens and the
camera body using a dry cotton swab.
Attach the lens, turn this unit on again, and if it is still displaying, contact the dealer.

[Lens not detected. Please turn camera on again.]

• This is displayed when the lens has stopped operating normally due to being pressed on by a
hand etc.
Turn the camera off and on. If the message persists, contact the dealer or Panasonic.

324
13. Others

[Memory Card Error]/[This memory card cannot be used]

• Use a card compatible with this unit. (P18)

[Insert SD card again]/[Try another card]

• An error has occurred accessing the card.
Insert the card again.
• Insert a different card.

[Read Error/Write Error

Please check the card]
• It has failed to read or write data.
Remove the card after turning this unit off. Insert the card again, turn this unit on, and try to
read or write the data again.
• The card may be broken.
• Insert a different card.

[Cannot record due to incompatible format(NTSC/PAL) data on this card.]

• Perform formatting (P27) on this unit after saving necessary data on a PC, etc.
• Insert a different card.

[Motion recording was cancelled due to the limitation of the writing speed of the
card]
• Use a card with SD Speed Class with “Class 4” or higher when recording motion pictures.
• In the event that it stops even after using a “Class 4” card or higher, the data writing speed has
deteriorated so it is recommended to make a backup and then format (P27).
Depending on the type of the card, motion picture recording may stop in the middle.

[A folder cannot be created]

• A folder cannot be created because there are no remaining folder numbers that can be used.
Format the card on this unit after saving necessary data on a PC etc. (P27)
If you execute [No.Reset] in the [Setup] menu after formatting, the folder number is reset to
100. (P67)

[Recording stopped due to overheating. Please wait for the camera to cool down.]/
[The Wi-Fi connection will be terminated due to overheating. Please wait for the
camera to cool down.]/[Temporarily disabled. Please wait for the camera to cool
down.]
• When a high ambient temperature, continuous recording or other conditions cause the
camera to overheat, the following restrictions will occur to protect the camera. Wait until the
camera cools down.
– Continuous recording, motion picture recording, and the Wi-Fi connection will be
temporarily disabled.
– If you continue recording even when [ ] is flashing on the screen, a message will be
displayed and the camera will turn off automatically.

325
13. Others

[Picture is displayed for 16:9 TV]/[Picture is displayed for 4:3 TV]

• Select [TV Aspect] in the [Setup] menu if you want to change the TV aspect. (P65)
• This message also appears when the USB connection cable is connected to the camera only.
In this case, connect the other end of the USB connection cable to a PC or a printer. (P310,
313)

[Editing operation cannot proceed as information processing is ongoing.]

When there are too many image files, the currently retrieving information icon ([ ]
or [ ]) may be displayed on the playback screen for a long period of time. During
this time, use of some items in the [Playback] menu is not possible.
• If this unit is turned off while acquiring information, only the pictures that have already
acquired the information are saved as a group.
When you switch on again, the information retrieval will restart from the same point.

[This battery cannot be used]

• Use a genuine Panasonic battery. If this message is displayed even when a genuine
Panasonic battery is used, contact the dealer or Panasonic.
• If the battery terminal is dirty, clean it and remove any objects.

[Failed to connect wireless access point]/[Connection failed]/[No destination

found]
• Check following regarding the wireless access point.
– The wireless access point information set on this unit is wrong.
Check the authentication type, encryption type, and encryption key. (P291)
– Power of the wireless access point is not turned on.
– Setting of the wireless access point is not supported by this unit.
• Check the network setting of the destination.
• Radio waves from other devices may block the connection to a wireless access point.
Check other devices that are connected to the wireless access point and devices that use the
2.4 GHz band.

[No picture to send]

• This is displayed when there is no image to transmit due to the restriction of the destination.
Check the file format of the image to send. (P295)

[Connection failed. Please retry in a few minutes.]/[Network disconnected. Transfer

stopped.]
• Radio waves from the wireless access point are getting weak.
Perform the connection closer to the wireless access point.
• There is no reply from the server or it has exceeded the communication processing time.
Try again after a while.
• Depending on the wireless access point, connection may be automatically disconnected after
specific time has passed.
Reconnect the connection again.

326
13. Others

[Upload to the Cloud Folder is available after Cloud Sync settings have been set up
on downloadable devices such as PCs or smartphones.]
• Devices that download images from a cloud folder are not registered.
• Perform Cloud Sync setting. Configure the settings on a PC with “PHOTOfunSTUDIO”
(P308) or on a smartphone with “Image App”.
Refer to P282 for details on [Cloud Sync. Service].

[Connection failed]
• Check following regarding the smartphones you intend to connect.
– The smartphone does not operate.
– Change the access point to connect to in the smartphone Wi-Fi settings to this camera.
– There is no free storage space on the smartphone.

[Login failed. Please check Login ID and Password.]

• Login ID or password for the “LUMIX CLUB” is not correct.
Please enter it again.
If you have forgotten the login ID or the password, there is information in the login screen of
the “LUMIX CLUB” website.

[Some files cannot be sent because of destination limit]/[Transfer completed.

Some files are left because of destination limit.]
• Check the file format of the image to send. (P295)
• Sending motion pictures may fail if the file size is too large.
Split the motion picture using [Video Divide]. (P239)

[Unavailable. Please set Login settings on LUMIX CLUB web site.]

• Login to the “LUMIX CLUB” from your smartphone or PC, and set the login details of the
destination web service.

[Both picture and video sharing service cannot be selected together]

• Web services designed only for pictures, and web services designed only for motion pictures
cannot be selected at the same time.
Deselect one of the services.

[Cannot get IP address. Please set wireless AP’s IP address setting to DHCP.]
• Turn on DHCP settings of the IP address of the connected wireless access points.

[Cannot connect to server]

• If a message is displaying asking to update the root certificate, agree to update the root
certificate.

327
13. Others

Menu list
[Rec] P328 [Motion Picture] P331 [Custom] P332

[Setup] P334 [Playback] P336

• [Photo Style], [Filter Settings], [Focus Mode], [Metering Mode], [i.Dynamic], [i.Resolution] and
[Digital Zoom] are common to both the [Rec] menu and [Motion Picture] menu. Changing these
settings in one of these menus is reflected in other menu.

[Rec]

You can select effects to match the type of image you wish
[Photo Style] to record. P119
You can adjust the colour and image quality of the effects.
[Filter Settings] Changes the settings related to image effects (filters). P121
[Aspect Ratio] Sets the aspect ratio of the image. P127
[Picture Size] Set the number of pixels. P127
Set the compression rate at which the pictures are to be
[Quality] P128
stored.
[Sensitivity] This allows the sensitivity to light (ISO sensitivity) to be set. P157
[Focus Mode] Sets the focus method. P135
[Metering Mode] Sets the light metering method for measuring brightness. P160
[Burst Rate] Sets the burst speed for burst recording. P164
Sets single/burst recording, compensation range and
[Auto Bracket] P167
recording sequence for Auto Bracket recording.
[Self Timer] Sets the manner in which the self-timer works. P170
[i.Dynamic] (Intelligent Adjusts the contrast and exposure.
P129
dynamic range control)
Records images with more defined outlines and sense of
[i.Resolution] P129
clarity.
Pictures of the night scenery will be taken at a high burst
[iHandheld Night Shot] P74
speed and composed into a single picture.

328
13. Others

There is, for example, strong contrast between the

background and the subject, multiple still pictures are
[iHDR] P75
recorded with differing exposures and combined to create
a single still picture rich in gradation.
You can combine 3 pictures with different levels of
[HDR] P130
exposure into a single picture with rich gradation.
Gives an effect like multi exposure. (up to 4 times
[Multi Exp.] P179
equivalent per a single image)
You can set the recording start time, the recording interval
[Time Lapse Shot] and the number of pictures, and automatically record P172
subjects such as animals and plants as time elapses.
A stop motion picture is created by splicing pictures
[Stop Motion Animation] P175
together.
[Panorama Direction] Sets the recording direction for Panorama Shot Mode. P94
This enables you to choose whether pictures will be taken
[Shutter Type] P161
with the Electronic Front Curtain or the electronic shutter.
[Flash] Sets the manner in which the flash works. P201
Automatically detects red-eye caused by the flash and
[Red-Eye Removal] P201
corrects the image data accordingly.
When the ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO] or [ ], an
[ISO Limit Set] optimal ISO sensitivity is set with the selected value as an P158
upper limit.
The ISO sensitivity settings values changes in steps of
[ISO Increments] P159
1/3 EV or 1 EV.
[Extended ISO] ISO sensitivity can be set up to minimum [ISO100]. P159
You can eliminate the noise caused by recording with a
[Long Shtr NR] P131
slower shutter speed.
If the screen periphery darkens as a result of lens
[Shading Comp.] characteristics, the brightness in this region will be P131
corrected.
When the number of pixels is set to anything other than [L],
[Ex. Tele Conv.] the Tele effect is increased without degradation in image P193
quality.

329
13. Others

Increases the Tele effect.

[Digital Zoom] The higher the level of magnification, the greater the P195
degradation in image quality.
Set this when you want to correct the colour reproduction
[Color Space] P132
of the recorded pictures on a PC, printer etc.
When camera shake is sensed during recording, the
[Stabilizer] P190
camera corrects it automatically.
Sets the focus and exposure automatically prioritising
[Face Recog.] P182
registered faces.
If you set the name and birthday of your baby or pet in
[Profile Setup] advance, you can record their name and age in months P187
and years in the images.

330
13. Others

[Motion Picture]

You can select effects to match the type of image you wish
[Photo Style] to record. P119
You can adjust the colour and image quality of the effects.
[Filter Settings] Changes the settings related to image effects (filters). P121
Lets you specify the recording time in advance and records
[Snap Movie] P212
motion pictures just like you take snapshots.
[Rec Format] Sets the file format for the motion pictures you record. P208
[Rec Quality] This sets up the picture quality of motion pictures. P208
[Focus Mode] Sets the focus method. P135
Sets the recording method for still pictures during motion
[Picture Mode] P211
picture recording.
Continues to focus on the subject for which focus has been
[Continuous AF] P210
achieved.
[Metering Mode] Sets the light metering method for measuring brightness. P160
[i.Dynamic] (Intelligent Adjusts the contrast and exposure.
P129
dynamic range control)
Records images with more defined outlines and sense of
[i.Resolution] P129
clarity.
[Ex. Tele Conv.] Increases the Tele effect. P193
Increases the Tele effect.
[Digital Zoom] The higher the level of magnification, the greater the P195
degradation in image quality.
The shutter speed can be fixed to reduce the flicker or
[Flkr Decrease] P215
striping in the motion picture.
Set whether or not the mic levels are displayed on the
[Mic Level Disp.] P216
screen.
[Mic Level Adj.] Adjust the sound input level to 4 different levels. P216
Reduces the wind noise effectively if there is wind noise
[Wind Cut] P216
when recording sound.

331
13. Others

[Custom]

[Silent Mode] Disables operational sounds and output of light at once. P181
Sets the fixed content for focusing and exposure when the
[AF/AE Lock] P154
AF/AE lock is on.
The shutter will immediately fire when the shutter button is
[Half Press Release] P145
pressed halfway.
Speeds up the focusing that takes place when you press
[Quick AF] P145
the shutter button.
Sets the time for which the screen is enlarged when the
[Pinpoint AF Time] shutter button is pressed halfway with Auto Focus Mode P143
set to [ ].
Sets whether to display the assist screen that appears
[Pinpoint AF Display] when Auto Focus Mode is set to [ ] in a window or full P143
screen.
AF assist lamp will illuminate the subject when the shutter
[AF Assist Lamp] button is pressed half-way making it easier for the camera P146
to focus when recording in low light conditions.
[Focus/Release Priority] It will set so no picture can be taken when it is out of focus. P147
You can set the focus manually after the automatic focus
[AF+MF] P147
has finished.
[MF Assist] Sets the display method of MF Assist (enlarged screen). P152
Sets whether MF Assist (enlarged screen) will appear in a
[MF Assist Display] P149
windowed screen display or in a full screen display.
When you set the focus manually, an MF guide that allows
[MF Guide] P153
you to check the direction to achieve focus is displayed.
In-focus portions are highlighted when focus is being
[Peaking] P153
adjusted manually.
This allows you to set either to display or not display the
[Histogram] P44
histogram.
This will set the pattern of guide lines displayed when
[Guide Line] P44
taking a picture.

332
13. Others

When the Auto Review function is activated or when

[Highlight] playing back, white saturated areas appear blinking in P47
black and white.
Indicates parts that may be whited out through
[Zebra Pattern] P188
overexposure in a zebra pattern.
[Monochrome Live You can display the recording screen in black and white.
P189
View]
You can check the effects of the chosen aperture and
[Constant Preview] shutter speed on the recording screen in Manual Exposure P91
Mode.
[Expo.Meter] Set whether or not to display the exposure meter. P85
[Dial Guide] Set whether or not to display the dial operation guide. P41
This changes the angle of view during motion picture
[Rec Area] P206
recording and still picture recording.
This will switch display between the number of recordable
[Remaining Disp.] P29
pictures and available recording time.
[Auto Review] Displays a picture immediately after it is taken. P39
You can assign various recording and other functions to
[Fn Button Set] P59
the function button.
[Q.MENU] Switch the setting method of Quick Menu. P56
It is possible to set how the [¦] button to toggle to
[iA Button Switch] P71
Intelligent Auto ( or ) Mode will operate.
[Video Button] Enables/disables the motion picture button. P206
Sets the screen display and lens operations when using an
[Power Zoom Lens] interchangeable lens that is compatible with power zoom P196
(electrically operated zoom).
Sets the Manual Focus operation when using an
[Lens w/o Focus Ring] P152
interchangeable lens with no focus ring.
Sets whether or not to set the Self Shot Mode by rotating
[Self Shot] P82
the monitor.
[Touch Settings] Enables/disables the Touch operation. P49
This allows you to set the speed of continuously forwarding
[Touch Scroll] P217
or rewinding pictures using touch operation.
Set the screen that is displayed when the mode dial is set
[Menu Guide] P98
to and .
Sets whether or not the shutter can be released when no
[Shoot w/o Lens] P30
lens is attached to the main body.

333
13. Others

[Setup]

[Clock Set] Setting Date/Time. P33

Sets the times for the region where you live and your
[World Time] P61
holiday destination.
Departure date and return date of the trip as well as the
[Travel Date] P62
name of the travel destination can be set.
[Wi-Fi] Configure the each setting for Wi-Fi functions. P298
This allows you to set the volume for electronic sound and
[Beep] P63
the electronic shutter sound.
Set the frame rate of the recording screen (Live View
[Live View Mode] P63
screen).
Brightness, colour, or red or blue tint of the Monitor is
[Monitor Display] P63
adjusted.
Set the monitor brightness to suit the amount of
[Monitor Luminance] P64
surrounding light.
The unit can be set up to prevent unnecessary battery
[Economy] P64
consumption.
Sets the communication method when connecting using
[USB Mode] P65
the USB connection cable (supplied).
[TV Connection] This sets how the unit connects to a television etc. P65
Stores the location of the last-used menu item for each
[Menu Resume] P66
menu.
[Menu Background] Set the background colour for the menu screen. P66
Descriptions of menu items or their settings are displayed
[Menu Information] P66
on the menu screen.
[Language] Set the language displayed on the screen. P67
This enables the firmware versions of the camera and lens
[Version Disp.] P67
to be checked.
An exposure value can be reset when the Recording Mode
[Exposure Comp. Reset] P67
is changed or the camera is turned off.

334
13. Others

Sets whether or not to cancel the self-timer when this unit

[Self Timer Auto Off] P67
is turned off.
[No.Reset] Returns the image file number to 0001. P67
The recording or setup/custom settings are reset to the
[Reset] P67
default.
Reset all settings in the [Wi-Fi] menu to factory default
[Reset Wi-Fi Settings] settings. P68
(Excluding [LUMIX CLUB])
It will perform optimisation of imaging device and image
[Pixel Refresh] P68
processing.
Dust reduction to blow off the debris and dust that have
[Sensor Cleaning] P68
affixed to the front of the imaging device is performed.
[Format] The card is formatted. P27

335
13. Others

[Playback]

[2D/3D Settings] Switches the playback method for 3D images. P227

[Slide Show] Selects the type etc. of the images and plays back in order. P227
Selects the type etc. of the images and plays back only
[Playback Mode] P229
particular images.
You can write location information (longitude/latitude) on
[Location Logging] P230
images sent from the smartphone.
Apply effects similar to that of aesthetics or makeup to
[Beauty Retouch] P231
brighten up any face.
You can erase unnecessary parts recorded on the pictures
[Clear Retouch] P233
taken.
[Title Edit] Input texts (comments) on the recorded pictures. P235
Stamps the recorded pictures with recording date and time,
[Text Stamp] P236
names, travel destination, travel date, etc.
[Video Divide] Splits the recorded motion picture in two. P239
Creates a motion picture from a set of group pictures
[Time Lapse Video] P240
recorded with the [Time Lapse Shot].
Creates a motion picture from the Stop Motion Animation
[Stop Motion Video] P240
group.
[Resize] Reduces the image size (number of pixels). P241
[Cropping] Crops the recorded image. P243
[Rotate] Rotate pictures manually in 90o steps. P244
This mode allows you to display pictures vertically if they
[Rotate Disp.] P244
were recorded holding the camera vertically.
Marks can be added to images, and images can be set as
[Favorite] P245
favourites.
[Print Set] Sets the images for printing and the number of prints. P246
[Protect] Protects images to prevent deletion by mistake. P248
Removes or changes information relating to personal
[Face Rec Edit] P249
identity.
Sets the display order of the images you play back on the
[Picture Sort] P249
camera.
This sets which option, [Yes] or [No], will be highlighted first
[Delete Confirmation] when the confirmation screen for deleting a picture is P250
displayed.

336
13. Others

Troubleshooting
First, try out the following procedures (P337 to P350).

If the problem is not resolved, it may be improved by selecting [Reset] (P67) on the
[Setup] menu.

Battery and power source

The camera cannot be operated even when it is turned on.

The camera turns off immediately after it is turned on.
• The battery is exhausted.
> Charge the battery.
• If you leave the camera on, the battery will be exhausted.
> Turn the camera off frequently by using the [Economy] etc. (P64)

This unit is turned off automatically.

• [Economy] is enabled. (P64)
• Is the linked operation of VIERA Link enabled?
> If you are not using VIERA Link, set [VIERA Link] to [OFF]. (P66)

Card/battery door does not close.

• Insert the battery securely all the way in. (P25)

The battery becomes flat too quickly.

• Is a Wi-Fi connection being used for a long period of time?
The battery can become flat quickly when connected to Wi-Fi.
> Turn the camera off frequently by using the [Economy] etc. (P64)

Recording

This unit suddenly turns off during recording.

• When a high ambient temperature, continuous recording or other conditions cause the camera
to overheat, the following restrictions will occur to protect the camera. Wait until the camera
cools down.
– Continuous recording, motion picture recording, and the Wi-Fi connection will be temporarily
disabled.
– If you continue recording even when [ ] is flashing on the screen, a message will be
displayed and the camera will turn off automatically.

337
13. Others

Taking pictures is not possible.

The shutter will not operate immediately when the shutter button is pressed.
• Is the subject focused?
> Is [Focus/Release Priority] in the [Custom] menu set to [FOCUS]? (P147)
You cannot take a picture until the subject is brought into focus.

The recorded picture is whitish.

• Picture might look whitish when lens or image sensor gets dirty with fingerprints or similar.
> If the lens is dirty turn the camera off and then gently wipe the lens surface with a soft, dry
cloth.
> Refer to P352 when the image sensor gets dirty.

The recorded picture is too bright or dark.

• Check that the exposure is correctly compensated. (P156)
• Is the AE Lock (P154) applied incorrectly?

Multiple pictures are taken at one time.

• Cancel the following settings:
– Burst/Auto Bracket/[ ] of the self-timer (P163)
– White Balance Bracket (P126)

The subject is not focused properly.

• The subject is beyond the focus range of the camera. (P38)
• There is camera shake (jitter) or the subject is moving slightly. (P191)
• Is [Focus/Release Priority] in the [Custom] menu set to [RELEASE]? (P147)
• Is the AF Lock (P154) applied incorrectly?

The recorded picture is blurred.

The Optical Image Stabiliser is not effective.
• The shutter speed will become slower and the Optical Image Stabiliser function may not work
properly when taking pictures especially in dark places.
> We recommend holding the camera firmly with both hands when taking pictures. (P35)
> We recommend using a tripod and the self-timer (P170) when taking pictures with a slow
shutter speed.
• Are you using a lens which supports the Stabiliser function? (P16)
• When a moving subject is recorded with the electronic shutter, the subject may appear
distorted on the picture. (P161)

Taking pictures using White Balance Bracket is not possible.

• Is there any memory remaining on the card?

338
13. Others

The recorded picture looks rough.

Noise appears on the picture.
• Try the following:
> Take pictures in bright places.
> Decrease the ISO sensitivity. (P157)
> Increase the setting for [Noise Reduction] in [Photo Style] or lower the setting for each of
the items other than [Noise Reduction]. (P120)
> Set the [Long Shtr NR] to [ON]. (P131)
• Is the [Picture Size] (P127) or the [Quality] (P128) set low?
• Is the [Digital Zoom] set? (P195)

Striping or flicker may appear under lighting such as fluorescent lighting and
LED lighting fixture.

• This is characteristic of MOS sensors which serve as the camera’s

pickup sensors.
This is not a malfunction.
• Are you taking pictures with the electronic shutter? (P161)
> When using the electronic shutter, lowering the shutter speed may
reduce the effect of the horizontal stripes.

The brightness or the hue of the recorded picture is different from the actual
scene.
• When recording under fluorescent or LED lighting fixture, etc., increasing the shutter speed
may introduce slight changes to brightness and colour. These are a result of the characteristics
of the light source and do not indicate a malfunction.
• When recording subjects in extremely bright locations or recording under fluorescent lighting,
LED lighting fixture, mercury lamp, sodium lighting, etc., the colours and screen brightness may
change or horizontal striping may appear on the screen.

Bright spot not in subject is recorded.

• There may be defective pixels in the image sensor.
> Perform [Pixel Refresh] (P68).

Subject cannot be locked.

(AF tracking not possible)
• Set the AF area to the distinctive colour of the subject if there is a part that is different from the
surrounding colour. (P140)

339
13. Others

Operation sound is small.

• Is your finger covering up the speaker? (P13)

Recording by Panorama Shot Mode is ended before finishing.

• If the camera is moved too slowly, the camera has assumed that camera motion was stopped
and will end the still picture recording.
• If there is a great deal of shaking towards the recording direction while moving the camera,
recording will end.

Motion pictures

Recording motion pictures is not possible.

• You may not be able to record for a short while after turning this unit on when using a large
capacity card.

Motion picture recording stops in the middle.

• Use a card with SD Speed Class with “Class 4” or higher when recording motion pictures.
• When a card with a slow data writing speed is used, motion picture recording may stop midway.
> If a card on which recording and deleting have been repeated many times or a card that
has been formatted on a PC or other equipment is being used, we recommend that you
make a backup of the data and format (P27) the card on the unit.

When recording a motion picture, the screen may go dark.

• When recording a motion picture, the screen may go dark after a certain period to reduce
battery consumption, but this will not affect the recorded motion picture.

The screen may be blacked out momentarily, or the unit may record noise.
• Depending on the environment at the time of motion picture recording, the screen may be
blacked out momentarily or the unit may record noise due to static electricity or powerful
electromagnetic waves (radio towers, high voltage power lines, etc.).

Striping or flicker appears under lighting such as a fluorescent or LED lighting

fixture.
The subject appears distorted.
• This is characteristic of MOS sensors which serve as the camera’s pickup sensors.
This is not a malfunction.
When a subject moves across the image very fast, the subject may appear slightly distorted.
• When noticeable flicker or striping is seen under lighting such as a fluorescent or LED lighting
fixture, you can reduce the flicker or striping by setting up [Flkr Decrease] (P215) and fixing the
shutter speed. It is possible to select a shutter speed from [1/50], [1/60], [1/100], or [1/120].

340
13. Others

In motion pictures, abnormal clicking and buzzing sounds are recorded.

The recorded sound is very quiet.
• With recording in a quiet environment, depending on the lenses used, the sound of aperture
and focus actions may be recorded in motion pictures.
Focus operation can be set to [OFF] in [Continuous AF] (P210).
• While recording motion pictures, plugging the aperture of the microphone with a finger may
reduce the level of audio recording or audio may not record at all. Also be careful because the
operation sound of lenses can easily be recorded at this time.

Lens

Recorded image may be warped, or nonexistent colour is surrounding the

subject.
• Depending on the lens used, picture may be warped slightly or you may see colours along the
edge depending on the zoom factor, due to the characteristics of the lens. Also, the peripherals
of the image might look warped because the perspective is enhanced when the wide angle is
used. This is not a malfunction.

When the lens is attached to another digital camera, stabiliser function cannot be
turned off or stabiliser function does not work.
• The Optical Image Stabiliser function of the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032/H-FS35100/
H-PS14042) only works correctly with supported cameras.
> When older Panasonic digital cameras (DMC-GF1/DMC-GH1/DMC-G1) are used,
[Stabilizer] in the [Rec] menu cannot be set to [OFF].
It is recommended to update the firmware of the digital camera at the following website.
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/download/
(This Site is English only.)
> When using this lens with another make of digital cameras, the Optical Image Stabiliser
function will not work.
(As of January 2016)
For details, contact the respective company.

When the lens is attached to another digital camera, manual focus operation
cannot be performed.
• You can use Manual Focus with the interchangeable lens (H-FS12032) only if your model is
compatible with the lens.
Refer to the support website below for details:
http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/dsc/
(This Site is English only.)

341
13. Others

Flash

The flash is not activated.

• Is the flash closed?
> Open the flash. (P198)
• When the electronic shutter is used, the flash is not activated. (P161)
> Set [Shutter Type] to [AUTO] or [EFC].
• When [Silent Mode] is set to [ON], the flash is not activated. (P181)
> Set [Silent Mode] to [OFF].

The flash is activated 2 times.

• The flash is activated 2 times.
The interval between the first and second flash is longer when Red-Eye Reduction (P201) is
set so the subject should not move until the second flash is activated.

Monitor

The Monitor turns off although the camera is turned on.

• If no operations are performed during the set time period, [Auto Monitor Off] (P64) is activated,
and the Monitor turns off.

The Monitor is too bright or dark.

• Check [Monitor Luminance] setting. (P64)
• Perform [Monitor Display]. (P63)

It may flicker for an instant or the brightness of the screen may change
significantly for an instant.
• This occurs due to the aperture of the lens changing when the shutter button is pressed
halfway, or when the brightness of the subject changes. This is not a malfunction.

342
13. Others

Black, red, blue and green dots appear on the Monitor.

• This is not a malfunction.
These pixels do not affect the recorded pictures.

Noise appears on the monitor.

• In dark places, noise may appear to maintain the brightness of the monitor.

Playback

The picture being played back is not rotated, or is rotated in an unexpected

direction, when displayed.
• You can display the pictures without being rotated when [Rotate Disp.] (P244) is set to [OFF].
• You can rotate pictures with the [Rotate] function. (P244)
The picture is not played back.
There are no recorded pictures.
• Is the card inserted?
• Is there a picture on the card?
• Is this a folder or picture which was processed in the PC?
If it is, it cannot be played back by this unit.
> It is recommended to use the software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (P308) to write pictures from
PC to card.
• Has [Playback Mode] been set for playback?
> Change to [Normal Play]. (P229)

343
13. Others

The folder number and the file number are displayed as [—] and the screen turns
black.
• Is this a non-standard picture, a picture which has been edited using a PC or a picture which
was taken by another make of digital camera?
• Did you remove the battery immediately after picture-taking or did you take the picture using a
battery with a low remaining charge?
> To delete such pictures, make a backup of the data and format the card (P27).

Playback sound or operation sound is too low.

• Is something covering up the speaker? (P13)

Images with different date as recorded date are played back in the Calendar
Playback.
• Is the clock in the camera set properly? (P33)
• Images edited on a PC or images recorded on other cameras might display a different date to
the recorded date during the Calendar Playback.

White round spots like soap bubbles appear on the recorded picture.

• If you take a picture with the flash in a dark place or indoors, white
round spots may appear on the picture caused by the flash reflecting of
particles of dust in the air. This is not a malfunction.

[Thumbnail is displayed] appears on the screen.

• Is it a picture that has been recorded with other equipment?
In such cases, these pictures may be displayed with a deteriorated picture quality.

Red part of the recorded image has changed colour to black.

• When Red-Eye Removal ([ ]) or [ ]) is performed, red parts may be corrected to black.
> It is recommended to take a pictures with the flash closed, Flash Mode set to [‰], or
[Red-Eye Removal] set to [OFF]. (P201)

Motion pictures recorded with this model cannot be played back on other
equipment.
• The picture quality or sound quality of recorded motion pictures may be deteriorated even when
these are played back with the compatible devices. Also, recording information may not be
displayed correctly.

344
13. Others

Wi-Fi function

A Wi-Fi connection cannot be established.

Radio waves get disconnected.
Wireless access point is not displayed.
∫ General tips for using a Wi-Fi connection
• Use within the communication range of the device to be connected.
• Is any device, such as microwave oven, cordless phone, etc., that uses 2.4 GHz frequency
operated nearby?
> Radio waves may get interrupted when used simultaneously. Use them sufficiently away
from the device.
• When the battery indicator is flashing red, the connection with other equipment may not start or
the connection may be disrupted.
(A message such as [Communication error] is displayed.)
• If you place the camera on a metal table or shelf, the radio waves may be adversely affected. In
such cases, you may not be able to establish a connection. Move the camera away from the
metal surface.

∫ About a wireless access point

• Check if the wireless access point to connect is in operating state.
• The camera may not display or connect to a wireless access point depending on the radio
wave condition.
> Move this unit closer to the wireless access point.
> Remove the obstacles between this unit and the wireless access point.
> Change the direction of this unit.
> Change the location and orientation of the wireless access point.
> Perform the [Manual Input]. (P291)
• It may not display even if the radio waves exist depending on the setting of the wireless access
point.
> Check the settings of the wireless access point.
> When the network SSID of the wireless access point is set not to broadcast, the wireless
access point may not be detected. Enter the network SSID to start the connection (P291) or
enable the SSID broadcast of the wireless access point.
• Connection types and security setting methods are different depending on the wireless access
point. (Refer to the operating instructions of the wireless access point.)
• Is the 5 GHz/2.4 GHz switchable wireless access point connected to other equipment using the
5 GHz band?
> The use of a wireless access point that can use 5 GHz/2.4 GHz simultaneously is
recommended. It cannot be used simultaneously with this camera if it is not compatible.

It takes long time every time to connect to a smartphone.

• It may take longer time to connect depending on the Wi-Fi connection setting of the
smartphone, but it is not a malfunction.

345
13. Others

This unit is not displayed in the Wi-Fi setting screen of the smartphone.
• From the Wi-Fi setting menu on the smartphone, turn off and then on the Wi-Fi function.

I have forgotten the login ID or password for the “LUMIX CLUB”.

• Check the information in the login screen of “LUMIX CLUB”.
http://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/

I do not have a wireless access point at my home, but I would like to perform
service user registration of the “LUMIX CLUB”.
• Service user registration for the “LUMIX CLUB” is not possible in the environment without a
wireless access point.

I cannot send images to an AV device.

• Sending may fail depending on the operational status of the AV device. Also, sending may take
a while.

Images cannot be transmitted to a PC.

• When the firewall of the OS, security software, etc. is enabled, connecting to the PC may not
be possible.

When I try to set up a Wi-Fi connection with a Windows 8 PC, my user name and
password are not recognised, so I cannot connect to the PC.

• Some OS versions, including Windows 8, use two types of accounts: a local account and a
Microsoft account.
> Be sure to use the user name and password for the local account.
If you haven’t set up a local account, please create one.

The PC is not recognised when I use a Wi-Fi connection. The camera cannot be
connected to PC via Wi-Fi connection.

• The default workgroup name is set to “WORKGROUP”. If you changed the workgroup name,
the PC will not be recognised.
In [Change Workgroup Name] in [PC Connection] of the [Wi-Fi Setup] menu, change the
workgroup name to that of the PC you are connecting to. Refer to P298 for details.
• Please confirm login name and password are correctly typed.
• When the system time of Mac computer or Windows PC connected to a camera differs severely
from that of the camera, the camera cannot be connected to the computer or PC in some OSs.
> Please confirm [Clock Set] and [World Time] of the camera matches with time, date and
time zone in Windows PC or Mac computer. When both settings do not match severely,
please match them.

346
13. Others

Images cannot be transmitted to the web service.

• Confirm that the login information (login ID/user name/email address/password) is correct.
• Web service server or the network may be busy.
> Try again after a while.
> Check the site of the web service you are sending the image to.

It takes time to transmit an image to the web service.

• Is the size of the image too large?
> Reduce the image size at [Size] (P297), and then send.
> Transmit after dividing the motion picture with [Video Divide] (P239).
• It may take longer time to transmit when distance to the wireless access point is far.
> Transmit closer to the wireless access point.

The image that was supposed to have uploaded to the web service is not there.
• Upload may not complete when it is disconnected while transmitting the image.
• It may take some time after uploading the image to be reflected in the web service depending
on the status of the server.
> Wait for a while and try again.
• You can check the transmission status on the web service link settings by logging into “LUMIX
CLUB”.

I would like to return the image in the web service to the camera.
• The images in the web service cannot be saved (downloaded) to this unit.
> Do not delete the uploaded images, and make a backup of them.

I cannot display or delete the images uploaded to the web service by this unit.
• The images uploaded to the web service cannot be displayed or deleted by this unit.
> Perform the task using a smartphone or a PC.

Transmission of the image fails midway. Some images cannot be transmitted.

• Image cannot be transmitted when the battery indicator is flashing red.
• Is the size of the image too large?
> Reduce the image size at [Size] (P297), and then send.
> Transmit after dividing the motion picture with [Video Divide] (P239).
• File format of the motion picture that can be sent differs depending on the destination. (P295)
• Capacity or number of images in the web service is full.
> Login to “LUMIX CLUB”, and check the status of the destination on the web service link
settings.

Your “LUMIX CLUB” login ID and password were deleted after sending the
camera in to be repaired.
• The settings stored in the camera may be deleted depending on the type of repair.
> Always make a copy of important settings.

347
13. Others

I have forgotten the password for the Wi-Fi.

• Execute the [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] in the [Setup] menu. (P68)
However, all the information you have set on the [Wi-Fi Setup] menu will be reset. (excluding
[LUMIX CLUB])

TV, PC and printer

The picture does not appear on the television.

• Is the camera connected to the TV correctly? (P303)
> Set the TV input to external input mode.

The picture is not displayed fully on the TV.

The display areas on the TV screen and the camera’s monitor are different.
• Check [TV Aspect] setting. (P65)
• Depending on the TV model, the pictures may be extended horizontally or vertically or they
may be displayed with their edges cut off.

The motion pictures cannot be played back on a TV.

• Are you trying to play back the motion pictures by directly inserting the card in the card slot of
the TV?
> Connect the camera to the TV with the AV cable (optional), or with the HDMI micro cable,
and then play back the motion pictures on the camera. (P303)

Sound is not output from the speaker of the camera.

• When an AV cable (optional) or an HDMI micro cable is connected, sound is not output from the
camera.

VIERA Link does not work.

• Is it connected properly with the HDMI micro cable? (P303)
• Is the [VIERA Link] on this unit set to [ON]? (P66)
> If the input channel does not switch automatically, use the remote control for the TV to
switch it.
> Check the VIERA Link setting on the connected device.
> Turn this unit off and on.
> Set [HDAVI Control] to [Off] on the TV and then turn it back to [On].
(Refer to the operating instructions of the TV for details.)

Cannot communicate with the PC.

• Is the camera recognised by the PC correctly?
> Set to [PC] in [USB Mode]. (P65, 310)
> Turn this unit off and on.

348
13. Others

The card is not recognised by the PC.

• Disconnect the USB connection cable. Connect it again while the card is inserted in the
camera.
• If there are two or more USB terminal on a single PC, try connecting the USB connection cable
to another USB terminal.

The card is not recognised by the PC.

(SDXC memory card is used.)
• Check if your PC is compatible with SDXC memory cards.
http://panasonic.net/avc/sdcard/information/SDXC.html
• A message prompting to format the card may be displayed when connecting, but do not format.
• If the [Access] displayed on the monitor does not disappear, disconnect the USB connection
cable after turning this unit off.

The picture cannot be printed when the camera is connected to a printer.

• Pictures cannot be printed using a printer that does not support PictBridge.
> Set to [PictBridge(PTP)] in [USB Mode]. (P65, 313)

The ends of the pictures are cut at printing.

• When using a printer with a Cropping or borderless printing function, cancel this function before
printing.
(For details, refer to the operating instructions for the printer.)
• When you order photo studios to print pictures, ask the photo studio if the 16:9 pictures can be
printed.

The panorama picture is not printing correctly.

• Since aspect ratio of a panorama picture differs from normal pictures, it may not always be
possible to print it correctly.
> Please use a printer that supports panorama pictures.
(For details, please see the operating instructions of your printer.)
> We recommend using the software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO” (P308) to adjust the size of the
still picture to the print paper size.

Others

The shutter remains closed when the camera is turned off (including Sleep
Mode).
• If the camera is shaken, it may cause the shutter to close. This is not a malfunction. Do not put
your finger in the mount. Turning on the camera will re-open the shutter.

When I shake the camera, I hear a rattling sound from the attached lens.
• Depending on the lens you attach, it may move inside and create a sound. This is not a
malfunction.

349
13. Others

The camera makes a noise when this unit is turned on.

• This is the noise of the Dust Reduction Function working (P352); it is not a malfunction.

There is a sound from lens unit.

• It is a sound of lens movement or aperture operation when this unit is turned on or off, and it is
not a malfunction.
• The sound, which is caused by the automatic adjustment of the aperture, is heard when the
brightness has changed due to, for example, zooming or the movement of the camera. This is
not a malfunction.

An unreadable language was selected by mistake.

• Press [MENU/SET], select the [Setup] menu icon [ ] and then select the [~] icon to set the
desired language. (P67)

Part of the picture is flashing in black and white.

• This is a highlight function showing the white saturated area. (P47)

A red lamp sometimes turns on when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
• In dark places, the AF Assist Lamp (P146) lights red to make it easier to focus on a subject.

The AF Assist Lamp does not turn on.

• Is [AF Assist Lamp] set to [ON]? (P146)
• The AF Assist Lamp does not turn on in bright places.

The camera becomes warm.

• The surface of the camera and the reverse side of the monitor may become warm during use.
This does not affect the performance or quality of the camera.

The clock is reset.

• If you do not use the camera for a long time, the clock may be reset.
> [Please set the clock] message will be displayed; please reset the clock. (P33)

The file numbers are not recorded consecutively.

• When you perform an operation after taking a certain action, the pictures may be recorded in
folders with different numbers from the ones used prior to the operation.

The file numbers are recorded with previously used numbers.

• If you insert or remove the battery before turning off this unit, the folder and file numbers for the
pictures taken will not be stored in the memory. When this unit is turned on again and pictures
are taken, they may be stored under file numbers which should have been assigned to
previous pictures.

350
13. Others

Cautions for Use

Optimal use of the camera

Keep this unit as far away as possible from electromagnetic equipment (such as
microwave ovens, TVs, video games etc.).
• If you use this unit on top of or near a TV, the pictures and/or sound on this unit may be
disrupted by electromagnetic wave radiation.
• Do not use this unit near cell phones because doing so may result in noise adversely affecting
the pictures and/or sound.
• Recorded data may be damaged, or pictures may be distorted, by strong magnetic fields
created by speakers or large motors.
• Electromagnetic wave radiation may adversely affect this unit, disturbing the pictures and/or
sound.
• If this unit is adversely affected by electromagnetic equipment and stops functioning properly,
turn this unit off and remove the battery or disconnect AC adaptor (optional). Then reinsert the
battery or reconnect AC adaptor and turn this unit on.

Do not use this unit near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines.

• If you record near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines, the recorded pictures and/or sound
may be adversely affected.

Always use the supplied cords and cables.

If you use optional accessories, use the cords and the cables supplied with them.
Do not extend the cords or the cables.

Do not spray the camera with insecticides or volatile chemicals.

• If the camera is sprayed with such chemicals, the body of the camera may be damaged and the
surface finish may peel off.
Do not keep rubber or plastic products in contact with the camera for a long period
of time.

Keep credit cards and other items sensitive to magnetism

away from the magnetic portion A of the camera. 

351
13. Others

Cleaning
Before cleaning the camera, remove the battery or the DC coupler (optional), or
disconnect the power plug from the outlet. Then wipe the camera with a dry, soft
cloth.
• When the camera is soiled badly, it can be cleaned by wiping the dirt off with a wrung wet cloth,
and then with a dry cloth.
• Wipe off any dirt or dust on the zoom ring and the focus ring with a dry, dustless cloth.
• Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, alcohol, kitchen detergents, etc., to clean the
camera, since it may deteriorate the external case or the coating may peel off.
• When using a chemical cloth, be sure to follow the accompanying instructions.

∫ About dirt on the image sensor

This camera features an interchangeable lens system so dirt may get inside the camera
body when changing lenses. Depending on the recording conditions, dirt on the image
sensor may appear on the recorded picture.
To prevent debris or dust adhering to internal parts of the body, avoid changing the lens in
a dusty environment and always fit the body cap or a lens when storing the camera.
Remove any dirt on the body cap before attaching it.

Dust reduction function

This unit has a dust reduction function that will blow off the debris and dust that have
affixed to the front of the imaging device.
This function will function automatically when the camera is turned on, but if you see
dust, perform the [Sensor Cleaning] (P68) in the [Setup] menu.

Removing dirt on the image sensor

The image sensor is very precise and delicate, so be sure to observe the following when
you do have to clean it yourself.
• Blow off the dust on the surface of the image sensor with a commercially available blower
brush. Be careful not to blow too strongly.
• Do not put the blower brush further inside than the lens mount.
• Do not let the blower brush touch the image sensor as the image sensor may get scratched.
• Do not use any objects except a blower brush to clean the image sensor.
• If you cannot remove the dirt or dust with the blower, consult the dealer or Panasonic.

352
13. Others

About the Monitor

• Do not press the monitor with excessive force. Uneven colours may appear on the monitor and
it may malfunction.
• If the camera is cold when you turn it on, the picture on the Monitor will be slightly darker than
usual at first. However, the picture will return to normal brightness when the internal
temperature of the camera increases.

Extremely high precision technology is employed to produce the Monitor

screen. However there may be some dark or bright spots (red, blue or green) on
the screen. This is not a malfunction. Though the Monitor screen parts are
produced with highly controlled precision technology, some pixels may be
inactive or always lit. The spots will not be recorded on pictures on a card.

About the Lens

• Do not press the lens with excessive force.
• Do not leave the camera with the lens facing the sun as rays of light from the sun may cause it
to malfunction. Also, be careful when placing the camera outside or near a window.
• When there is dirt (water, oil, and fingerprints, etc.) on the surface of the lens, the picture may
be affected. Lightly wipe the surface of the lens with a soft, dry cloth before and after taking
pictures.
• Do not place the lens mount facing downwards. Do not allow the lens
mount contacts A to become dirty.

353
13. Others

Battery
The battery is a rechargeable lithium ion battery. Its ability to generate power comes
from the chemical reaction that takes place inside it. This reaction is susceptible to
the surrounding temperature and humidity. If the temperature is too high or too low,
the operating time of the battery will become shorter.

Always remove the battery after use.

• Place the removed battery in a plastic bag, and store or keep away from metallic objects (clips,
etc.).

If you drop the battery accidentally, check to see if the body of the battery and the
terminals are damaged.
• Inserting a damaged battery in the camera will damage the camera.

Bring charged spare batteries when going out.

• Be aware that the operating time of the battery becomes shorter in low temperature conditions
such as at a ski resort.
• When you travel, do not forget to bring the battery charger (supplied) so that you can charge
the battery in the country that you are travelling in.

Dispose of unusable battery.

• The battery has a limited life.
• Do not throw the battery into fire because it may cause an explosion.

Do not allow battery terminals to come into contact with metal objects (such as
necklaces, hairpins, etc.).
• This can cause short-circuiting or heat generation and you may be badly burned if you touch a
battery.

Charger
• The [CHARGE] indicator may blink under the influence of static electricity or electromagnetic
wave. This phenomenon has no effects on charging.
• If you use the battery charger near a radio, the radio reception may be disturbed.
Keep the charger 1 m (3.3 feet) or more away from radio.
• The charger may generate whirring sounds when it is being used. This is not a malfunction.
• After use, be sure to disconnect the power supply device from the electrical outlet.
(A very small amount of current is consumed if it is left connected.)
• Keep the terminals of the charger and battery clean.

354
13. Others

About 3D
∫ About 3D recording
With the 3D interchangeable lens attached, do not record a subject at less than the
minimum focus distance.
• The 3D effects may be more pronounced, and therefore cause tiredness or discomfort.
• When the 3D interchangeable lens (H-FT012: optional) is used, the minimum focus distance is
0.6 m (2.0 feet).

When recording with the 3D interchangeable lens attached, be careful not to shake
the unit.
• Tiredness or discomfort may result if the shake is pronounced, due to riding in a vehicle or
walking etc.
• We recommend using a tripod.

∫ About 3D viewing
Anyone who is hyper sensitive to light, suffers from heart disease or is otherwise
unwell should avoid viewing 3D contents.
• Viewing 3D contents may have an adverse effect to the individual.

If you feel tired, uncomfortable or otherwise strange when viewing 3D contents,

stop viewing at once.
• Continuing to view may cause illness.
• After stopping viewing, please rest appropriately.

When viewing 3D contents, we recommend taking a break every 30 to 60 minutes.

• Viewing for extended periods may cause eye-fatigue.

Short-sighted or long-sighted persons, those with differences in the sight of their

right and left eyes, and those with astigmatism are advised to correct their vision by
wearing glasses etc.
Stop viewing if you can clearly see a double image while viewing 3D contents.
• There are differences in the way that different people experience 3D contents. Please correct
your sight appropriately before viewing 3D contents.
• You can change the 3D setting of your television or 3D output setting of the unit to 2D.

355
13. Others

Card
Do not leave the card where the temperature is high, where electromagnetic waves
or static electricity are easily generated or exposed to direct sunlight.
Do not bend or drop the card.
• The card may be damaged or the recorded content may be damaged or deleted.
• Put the card in the card case or the storage bag after use and when storing or carrying the
card.
• Do not allow dirt, dust, or water to get into the terminals on the back of the card and do not
touch the terminals with your fingers.

Notice for when transferring to another party, or disposing of the memory card
“Format” or “delete” using the camera or a PC will only modify the file management
information, it will not erase the data in the memory card completely.
It is recommended to physically destroy the memory card or use the commercially
available computer data deletion software to completely erase the data in the
memory card before transferring to another party or disposing.
Management of data in the memory card is the responsibility of the user.

About the personal information

If a name or birthday is set for [Profile Setup]/Face Recognition function, this personal
information is kept in the camera and recorded in the image.
We recommend that you enable [Wi-Fi Password] and [Wi-Fi Function Lock] to protect
personal information. (P298 , 299)

Disclaimer
• Information including personal information may be altered or vanish due to erroneous
operation, effect of static electricity, accident, malfunction, repair, or other handlings.
Please note in advance that Panasonic is not liable in any way for any direct or indirect damage
from the alteration or vanishing of information or personal information.

356
13. Others

When requesting a repair, transferring to another party, or disposing.

• After making a copy of personal information, always delete information such as personal
information and wireless LAN connection settings that you have saved within the camera with
[Reset Wi-Fi Settings]/[Delete account] (P68, 288).
• Reset the settings to protect the personal information. (P67)
• Remove the memory card from the camera when requesting a repair.
• Settings may return to factory default when camera is repaired.
• Please contact the dealer where you purchased the camera or Panasonic if above operations
are not possible due to malfunction.

When transferring to another party, or disposing of the memory card, please refer to
“Notice for when transferring to another party, or disposing of the memory card”.
(P356)

When uploading images on web services

• Images may contain information that can be used for identifying individuals such as titles,
recording dates, and location information. When uploading images on web services, check
carefully, and then upload.

When not using the camera for a long period of time

• Store the battery in a cool and dry place with a relatively stable temperature: [Recommended
temperature: 15 oC to 25 oC (59 oF to 77 oF), Recommended humidity: 40%RH to 60%RH]
• Always remove the battery and the card from the camera.
• If the battery is left inserted in the camera, it will discharge even if the camera is turned off. If
the battery continues to be left in the camera, it will discharge excessively and may become
unusable even if charged.
• When storing the battery for a long period of time, we recommend charging it once a year.
Remove the battery from the camera and store it again after it has completely discharged.
• We recommend storing the camera with a desiccant (silica gel) when you keep it in a closet or
a cabinet.
• Check all the parts before taking pictures when you have not used the camera for a long period
of time.

357
13. Others

About the picture data

• Recorded data may be damaged or lost if the camera breaks down due to inappropriate
handling. Panasonic will not be liable for any damage caused due to loss of recorded data.

About tripods or unipods

• When you use a tripod, make sure the tripod is stable when this unit is attached to it.
• You may not be able to remove the card or the battery when using a tripod or unipod.
• Make sure that the screw on the tripod or unipod is not at an angle when attaching or detaching
the camera. You may damage the screw on the camera if you use excessive force when
turning it. Also, the camera body and the rating label may be damaged or scratched if the
camera is attached too tightly to the tripod or unipod.
• When using this unit with a large-diameter lens, the lens may come into contact with the
pedestal depending on the tripod/unipod. Tightening the screw with the lens and pedestal in
contact with each other may damage this unit or the lens. Therefore it is recommended to
attach the tripod adaptor (DMW-TA1: optional) before mounting on the tripod/unipod.
• Read the operating instructions for the tripod or unipod carefully.

About the shoulder strap

• If you attach a heavy interchangeable lens (more than about 1 kg/35.3 oz) to the camera body,
do not carry the camera by the shoulder strap.
Hold the camera and the lens when carrying them.

358
13. Others

• G MICRO SYSTEM is a lens exchange type digital camera

system of LUMIX based on a Micro Four Thirds System
standard.
• Micro Four Thirds™ and Micro Four Thirds Logo marks are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Olympus Imaging
Corporation, in Japan, the United States, the European Union
and other countries.
• Four Thirds™ and Four Thirds Logo marks are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Olympus Imaging Corporation, in
Japan, the United States, the European Union and other
countries.
• SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
• “AVCHD”, “AVCHD Progressive” and the “AVCHD Progressive”
logo are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation and Sony
Corporation.
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
• The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia
Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC in the United States and
other countries.
• HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
• Adobe is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United
States and/or other countries.
• Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
• iMovie, Mac and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
• iPad, iPhone, iPod, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
• App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
• Windows is a registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.

359
• QuickTime and the QuickTime logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Apple Inc., used under license therefrom.
• Android and Google Play are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Google Inc.
• The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a certification mark of Wi-Fi
AllianceR.
• The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Identifier mark is a certification
mark of Wi-Fi AllianceR.
• “Wi-FiR” and “Wi-Fi DirectR” are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi
AllianceR.
• “Wi-Fi Protected Setup™”, “WPA™”, and “WPA2™” are
trademarks of Wi-Fi AllianceR.
• DLNA, the DLNA Logo and DLNA CERTIFIED are trademarks,
service marks, or certification marks of the Digital Living Network
Alliance.
• This product uses “DynaFont” from DynaComware Corporation.
DynaFont is a registered trademark of DynaComware Taiwan Inc.
• QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE
INCORPORATED.
• Other names of systems and products mentioned in these
instructions are usually the registered trademarks or trademarks
of the manufacturers who developed the system or product
concerned.
This product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License for the personal use of a
consumer or other uses in which it does not receive remuneration to (i) encode video in
compliance with the AVC Standard (“AVC Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC Video that was
encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal activity and/or was obtained from a video
provider licensed to provide AVC Video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other
use. Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, L.L.C.
See http://www.mpegla.com